GMDSS_TCE-D
Short Description
Download GMDSS_TCE-D...
Description
TCE-59060-D (J58-19110-0)
System settings list GMDSS Equipment FS-1562
FELCOM 10
FS-75/2550
FELCOM 11
FS-5000/8000
FELCOM 12
DSC-5
FELCOM 80
DSC-6
FELCOM81
DSC-8V
FELCOM82
DSC-60
REMOTE STATION
AA-50
NX-500
DP-5
IB-581
DP-6
IB-582
FM-7000 FM-7500 FM-8000 FM-8500 FM-8700 DMC-5
(0208, NAYO)
Instructions for Canceling Distress Alert Procedure
Sample message
VHF DSC All Stations, All Stations, All Stations 1. Switch off transmitter (transmitter and This is NAME, CALLSIGN, DSC NUMBER, POSITION. DSC terminal) immediately. 2. Switch equipment on and set to Ch 16. 3. Make broadcast to "All Stations" giving Cancel my distress alert of DATE, TIME, UTC. your vessel's name, callsign and DSC =Master, NAME, CALLSIGN. number, and cancel the false distress DSC NUMBER, DATE, TIME UTC. alert. MF DSC All Stations, All Stations, All Stations 1. Switch off equipment (transmitter and This is NAME, CALLSIGN, DSC NUMBER, POSITION. DSC terminal) immediately. 2. Switch equipment on and tune for Cancel my distress alert of Radiotelephony transmission on DATE, TIME, UTC 2182 kHz. 3. Make broadcast to "All Stations" giving =Master, NAME, CALLSIGN. DSC NUMBER, DATE, TIME UTC. the vessel's name, callsign and DSC number, and cancel the false distress alert. HF DSC Same as for MF but the alert must be cancelled on all the frequency bands on which it was transmitted. Hence, the transmitter should be tuned consecutively to the radiotelephony distress frequencies in the 4, 6, 8, 12 and 16 MHz bands, as necessary. Inmarsat C NAME, CALLSIGN, IDENTITY NUMBER,
Notify the appropriate RCC to cancel the alert by sending a distress priority message via the same CES through which the false distress alert was sent.
POSITION, Cancel my Iinmarsat-C distress alert of DATE, TIME, UTC =Master +
EPIRB If for any reason, an EPIRB is activated accidentally, the ship should contact the nearest coast station or an appropriate coast earth station or RCC and cancel the distress alert. * Notwithstanding the above, a ship may use any means available to inform the appropriate authorities that a false distress alert has been transmitted and should be cancelled. * No action will normally be taken against any ship or mariner for reporting and canceling a false distress alert. However, in view of the serious consequences of false alert, and the strict ban on their transmission, Governments may prosecute in cases of repeated violations.
GMDSS equipment key points Equipment
DSC-5
Menu (Item) [SELECT] “PRG” [SETUP] [4]:XMITR Re-enter the MMSI [SETUP] [5]:SCAN
Pass word/key point Ignore ID ON [SETUP] “I”, enter to “652111” Set the RX SCAN frequency as “99999.9”. [SELECT] [1]; Set the UTC as “9999”. [SELECT] [9] “P”, enter to “652111”. Set the RX SCAN frequency as “99999.9”. [SELECT] [1]; Set the UTC as “9999”. EEROM clear (NMI SW ON) [SELECT] [9] “P”, enter to “652111”.
[SETUP] [1]:Position [SELECT] [9] :System [SELECT] [!]:dimmer [SELECT] [0]:SCAN DSC-6 [SELECT] [1]:Position
DSC-8V
[SELECT] [9] “MMSI” (Re-enter the MMSI) [SELECT] [9]:System [SELECT] [!]:dimmer [SELECT] [8]:Receiver [SELECT] [1]:Position
DSC-60
FM-8500
FM-8700
[SELECT] [1]; Set the UTC as “9999”. [SETUP] “System” [SETUP] “Protection”, enter to “652111”. Re-enter the MMSI EEROM clear (NMI SW ON), enter to “652111” Confirmation of present Version [3]:TEST, press [1] key number five times while pressing [#FILE] key. [SELECT] [9] “P”, [SELECT] [9] :System enter to “652111”. [SELECT] [!]:dimmer [SELECT] [1]:Position [SELECT] [1]; Set the UTC as “9999”. EEROM clear [SELECT] [9] “MMSI” (NMI SW ON) (Re-enter the MMSI) [SELECT] [9] “private” [SELECT] [9] “P”, [SELECT] [9] :System enter to “652111”. [SELECT] [!]:dimmer [SELECT] [1]:Position [SELECT] [1]; Set the UTC as “9999”. EEROM clear [SELECT] [9] “MMSI” (NMI SW ON) (Re-enter the MMSI) [SELECT] [9] “private”
i
Note System settings Selection of VHF or MF/HF To canceling SCAN frequency To canceling manual position data. System settings For test To canceling SCAN frequency To canceling manual position data. Ver-1.05 and after System settings For test Selection of VHF or CH70 To canceling manual position data. System settings
System settings For test To canceling manual position data. DSC Ver-03 and later.
System settings For test To canceling manual position data.
Equipment
Menu (Item) System settings; (CH preset, Mode selection, etc)
FM-7000
ATIS setting CH70 setting Setting to connect DSC
FM-7500
Refer to DSC-5 and FM-7000
FM-8000
Pass word/key point Jumper connection and press S17 on PANEL board. JP-1: SUB-CPU board. JP-2: SUB-CPU board. JP-2: PANEL board JP-2: SUB-CPU board. Turn the power on while pressing and holding the [CH16] key, enter to “652111”. Turn the power on while pressing and holding the [RCL] key, select the system CH 9999, then press the [RCL] “1562” and [ENT] key. CH 1 to 200 To erase CH; [RCL] [0] [ENT] [ENT]+[8]:HI power [ENT]+[9]:LOW power [ENT]+[7]:TUNE power Turn the power on while pressing and holding the [TX] key. Turn the power on while pressing and holding the [ENT] key. Turn the power on while pressing and holding the [RCL] key, select the system CH 9999, then press the [CH] “75” and [ENT] key. Each band; 0,1,2,4,6 ---25 To erase CH; [Freq.] [0] [ENT] [ENT]+[8]:HI power [ENT]+[9]:LOW power [ENT]+[7]:TUNE power Turn the power on while pressing and holding the [CURSOL] key. Turn the power on while pressing and holding the [ENT] key.
System settings menu.
System settings menu.
Channel presetting FS-1562 Power adjustment Self test (Transceiver unit) Self test (LCD/key/Ver)
System settings menu.
Channel presetting FS-75/2550 Power adjustment Self test (Transceiver unit) Self test (LCD/key/Ver)
ii
Note
System CH 9998 “0”.
Set the RF gain VR maximum.
System CH 9998 “0”.
Set the RF gain VR maximum.
Equipment AT-1560
Menu (Item)
Pass word/key point Turn on No.2 of the dip SW S2 in the ATU, then press the TUNE SW in the ATU. [STO] “system setting item No.” [ENT] “ setting No.” [ENT]. To preset; [STO] “CH No.” [ENT] [ENT]. To eras; [STO] “CH No.” [ENT] [0] [ENT]. FULL power; [STO] [FULL] adjust to power by [FULL] or [UP] key. LOW power [STO] [LOW] adjust to power by [FULL] or [UP] key. [STO] [BFO] Re-enter AAB; Type “ANSWER CODE” (Type Cap. letter) Re-enter IDs; Type “ID CODE” (Type Cap. letter) Changing system settings Type “DP5” (Type Cap. letter) Re-enter AAB; Type “ANSWER CODE” (Type Cap. letter) Re-enter IDs; Type “ID CODE” (Type Cap. letter) Changing system settings Type “DP6” (Type Cap. letter)
Self test
System settings menu.
Channel presetting FS5000/8000
Power adjustment
BFO setting [F5] 6: AAB DP-5
[F5] 7, 8, 9, 0: IDs [F6]:Terminal [F8]:System [F5] 5: AAB [F5] 6, 7, 8, 9: IDs
[F6]: System
Note To conform System settings [RCL] 9999 [ENT]. To conform user CH setting [RCL] 9998 [ENT].
To keep ”1700Hz”.
DP-6 Quit to application softwear. Terminal program update.
[Fn ]+ [F2] + [Alt] B:\>install B:\> Type “nbdpinst”, press [F1], type “nbdp.exe”. [Fn ]+ [F1], type “DP6”. (Type Cap. letter)
Main program up date. Printer and Language settings.
iii
Ver 16 or later
Equipment
Menu (Item)
Pass word/key point None B:\> Type “ibinst”. [Fn ]+ [Alt] + [F2] B:\> Type “ibinst”. B:\> Type “upf12”, Turn on the power. [Fn ] + [Alt] + [F1]
FELCOM 10 FELCOM 11
Terminal program update. Quit to application softwear. Terminal program update.
FELCOM 12
CPU-2 program updata. Confirm to terminal program version. [F4] [3] [7]:AAB [F4] [6] [6]: commissioning menu
[F4] [6][7]: manual control menu
FELCOM 80
Maintenance code “Status monitor & log print” Maintenance code “Status monitor Maintenance code “Self test” Maintenance code “ADJ to Rx level (Fax by voice CH)” Maintenance code “ADJ to Tx level (Fax by voice CH)” Maintenance code Return to default settings; (All setup item from No.1 TEL)
iv
Note IB-581
Re-enter AAB; [Alt]+[Ctrl], type “ANSWER” Job No.: IMN and OID/DID FURUNOSERVICE Pass word: FELCOM80 “S2-#8 ON” on the CPU 2 board. Job No.: FURUNOMANUAL Pass word: 2582 *91# *96# *90# *70xx# (xx:50 to 82 default 70) *79xx# (xx:22 to 42 default 30) *60#
No.1 telephone
Equipment
Menu (Item) [F4] [3] [8]:AAB [F4] [6] [6]: commissioning menu
[F4] [6][7]: manual control menu
FELCOM 81
Maintenance code “Status monitor & log print” Maintenance code “Status monitor Maintenance code “Self test” Maintenance code “ADJ to Rx level (Fax by voice CH)” Maintenance code “Echo cancel” Maintenance code “ADJ to Tx level (Fax by voice CH)” Maintenance code Return to default settings; (All setup item from No.1 TEL)
All memory clear Setting “Pb”
*90#
v
OID/DID
No.1 telephone
*70xx# (xx:50 to 82 default 70) *99ab#
Each telephone
*79xx# (xx:22 to 42 default 30) *60#
DIP SW-#1 “ON”
Setting “Pb”
Note
*96#
B:\> Type “ibinst”. [1][3][*], power on [STO] [#][*][STO]
Terminal program update. PFX-50 FC622SL1 WG: TEL FC755D1: TEL
Pass word/key point Re-enter AAB; [Alt]+[Ctrl], type “ANSWER” Job No.: FURUNOSERVICE Pass word: FELCOM81 “S1-#8 ON” on the CPU 2 board. Job No.: FURUNOMANUAL Pass word: 3504 *91#
No.1 telephone
Content Content
A. MF/HF SSB Radiotelephone Section A1. FS-1562-15/25 1. Connection...................................................................................................... 1 2. System settings............................................................................................... 2 2.1 Procedure ........................................................................................ 2 2.2 System channel list (Ver-09) ............................................................ 3 2.3 System channel list (Ver-03) ............................................................ 5 2.4 System settings descriptions ........................................................... 6 2.5 LCD/Keyboard test & ROM Version No. Confirmation ...................... 7 3. Channel Programming .................................................................................... 8 4. Power Data Setting ....................................................................................... 10 5. Self test ......................................................................................................... 12 5.1 Transceiver unit .............................................................................. 12 5.2 Antenna coupler unit...................................................................... 13
Section A2. FS-75/2550 1. Connection...................................................................................................... 1 2. System settings............................................................................................... 2 2.1 Procedure ........................................................................................ 2 2.2 System channel list (Ver-09) ............................................................ 3 2.3 System settings descriptions ........................................................... 5 2.4 LCD/Keyboard test & ROM Version No. Confirmation ...................... 6 3. Channel Programming .................................................................................... 7 4. Power Data Setting ......................................................................................... 9 5. Self Test ........................................................................................................ 11 5.1 Transceiver unit .............................................................................. 11 5.2 Antenna coupler unit ...................................................................... 12
1
Content
Section A3. FS-5000/8000 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1 2. System settings .............................................................................................. 2 2.1System Channel List......................................................................... 2 2.2 Confirmation of settings.................................................................... 6 2.3 System channel description ............................................................. 7 2.4 Default setting for each country...................................................... 12 3. Jumper settings ............................................................................................ 13 3.1For NAV data format selecting, CIF or NMEA ................................. 13 3.2When using C.Loop between FS-5000/8000 and DB-500 .............. 13 4. User (Preset) Channel Programming............................................................ 15 5. Power Adjustment......................................................................................... 16 6. Self test......................................................................................................... 21 6.1 Transceiver unit .............................................................................. 21 6.2 Antenna Coupler unit ..................................................................... 22
B. DSC Terminal Section B1. DSC-5 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1 2. Changing System Settings and MMSI number ............................................... 3 2.1 Changing system settings ................................................................ 3 2.2 Settings List...................................................................................... 5 3. Jumper wire settings....................................................................................... 8 4. Self test........................................................................................................... 9 5. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM ................................................... 10 6. DSC Frequency table.................................................................................... 12 7. Menu tree ..................................................................................................... 13 8. Power and Frequency measurement of MF/HF Radiotelephone .................. 17 9. Power and Frequency measurement of VHF Radiotelephone ...................... 18
2
Content
Section B2. DSC-6/6A 1. Connector on Rear Panel ............................................................................... 1 2. Typical Configurations (Type-1)....................................................................... 1 3. System settings .............................................................................................. 3 3.1 Initial settings.................................................................................... 3 3.2 Changing System settings................................................................ 4 4. System settings list ......................................................................................... 5 5. Jumper setting ................................................................................................ 7 6. Changing ID (MMSI) number.......................................................................... 8 7. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM ..................................................... 9 8. Self test......................................................................................................... 11 9. DSC Frequency table.................................................................................... 12 10. Menu list ..................................................................................................... 13 11. Power and Frequency measurement of MF/HF Radiotelephone ................ 15
Section B3. DSC-8V/8VP 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1 2. Changing system settings............................................................................... 2 3. System settings list ......................................................................................... 3 4. Jumper wire setting......................................................................................... 4 5. Clearing contents of S-RAM and EEROM ...................................................... 5 6. Self test........................................................................................................... 7 7. Menu List: [SELECT] ...................................................................................... 8 8. Power and Frequency measurement of VHF Radiotelephone ...................... 10
3
Content
Section B4. DSC-60 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1 2. System setup list ............................................................................................ 2 2.1 Setup menu: [#/SETUP] ................................................................... 2 2.2 System menu description ................................................................. 4 3. Setting DIP Switches ...................................................................................... 6 3.1 Outline of the settings on CONTROL/MODEM board ...................... 6 3.2 Setting for the connection with FS-75/1562/5000 and DP-6............. 7 3.3 Setting for the connection with navigational aids .............................. 8 3.4 Setting for the connection with DMC, IC-302 and PC....................... 9 4. Setting the receiver board............................................................................. 10 5. How to enter MMSI ....................................................................................... 11 6. Self test......................................................................................................... 12 7. Setup menu list ............................................................................................. 13 8. Power and Frequency measurement of MF/HF Radiotelephone .................. 18 9. How to update system program .................................................................... 19 9.1 Over view....................................................................................... 19 9.2 Updating MAIN program with IB-581 ............................................. 20 9.3 Updating MODEM program with IB-581......................................... 21
C. MF/HF Watch Receiver Section C1. AA-50 1. Over view........................................................................................................ 1 2. Connection ..................................................................................................... 2 3. Jumper setting ................................................................................................ 2 4. Self test........................................................................................................... 3
4
Content
D. NBDP Section D1. DP-5 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1 2. Setting list ....................................................................................................... 2 3. Initial settings.................................................................................................. 5 3.1 Answerback code and ID code entry ................................................ 5 3.2 Terminal settings (F6)....................................................................... 6 3.3 System settings (F8) ....................................................................... 9 3.4 Manual Reception (F3-6) .............................................................. 12 3.5 NAV data format selection (CIF/NMEA) ........................................ 12 4. Changing AAB, ID code, Terminal and System settings ............................... 13 4.1 Changing Answerback code and ID code....................................... 13 4.2 Changing F6 and F8 settings ......................................................... 14 5. Clearing contents of S-RAM and EEROM .................................................... 15 5.1 S-RAM clear .................................................................................. 15 5.2 EEROM clear ................................................................................. 16
Section D2. DP-6 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1 2. Settings list ..................................................................................................... 2 3. Initial settings.................................................................................................. 3 3.1 Answerback code and ID code entry ................................................ 3 3.2 System settings (F6) ....................................................................... 4 3.3 Manual Reception (F3-6) ................................................................ 6 3.4 Printer and Language setting ........................................................... 6 4. Changing AAB, ID code and System settings................................................. 7 4.1 Changing Answerback code and ID code......................................... 7 4.2 Changing F6: System settings.......................................................... 8 5. Self Test .......................................................................................................... 9 6. How to Update Programs.............................................................................. 10 6.1Terminal Program ........................................................................... 10 6.2Main: Main Unit Program ................................................................ 12
5
Content
E. VHF Radiotelephone Section E1. FM-7000 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1 2. System Settings.............................................................................................. 2 2.1 System setting Jumper Connections ................................................ 2 2.2 Disabling/enabling ATIS (Jumper Connection on SUB-CPU Board) ....................................... 9 2.3 Disabling/enabling USA CH2/3/4.................................................... 10 2.4 Setting to connect DSC terminal (FM-7000) ................................. 11 3. Adjustment.................................................................................................... 12 3.1Tx Power Adjustment ...................................................................... 12 3.2 Frequency Adjustment ................................................................... 12 4. Self Test ........................................................................................................ 13 5. Private Channel List...................................................................................... 17
Section E2. FM-7500 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1 2. Settings........................................................................................................... 1
Section E3. FM-8000 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1 2. System Settings.............................................................................................. 1 2.1 Changing System setting ................................................................. 1 2.2 Channel Preset (CH0 to CH255 available) ....................................... 5 3. Adjustment...................................................................................................... 8 3.1Tx Power Adjustment ........................................................................ 8 3.2 Frequency Adjustment ..................................................................... 8 4. Self test........................................................................................................... 9 5. Private Channel List...................................................................................... 13
6
Content
Section E4. FM-8500 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1 2. System settings .............................................................................................. 2 2.1 Initial Settings................................................................................... 2 2.2 Changing system settings (Protection ON/OFF) .............................. 5 3. System settings list ......................................................................................... 6 4. Jumper Setting................................................................................................ 8 5. Changing ID (MMSI) and Private mode .......................................................... 9 6. Adjustment.................................................................................................... 11 6.1 TX Power Adjustment ..................................................................... 11 6.2 TX Frequency Adjustment .............................................................. 12 7. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM ................................................... 13 8. Self test......................................................................................................... 15 9. Private Channel list....................................................................................... 18 10. Power and Frequency measurement of VHF Radiotelephone .................... 21
Section E5. FM-8700 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1 2. System settings .............................................................................................. 2 2.1 Initial Settings................................................................................... 2 2.2 Changing system settings (Protection ON/OFF) .............................. 5 3. System settings list ......................................................................................... 6 4. Jumper settings .............................................................................................. 8 5. Changing ID (MMSI) and Private mode .......................................................... 9 6. Adjustment.................................................................................................... 11 6.1 TX Power Adjustment ..................................................................... 11 6.2 TX Frequency Adjustment .............................................................. 13 7. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM ................................................... 14 8. Self test......................................................................................................... 16 9. Private Channel list....................................................................................... 19 10. Power and Frequency measurement of VHF Radiotelephone .................... 22
7
Content
F. Distress Message Controller Section F1. DMC-5 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1 2. System settings .............................................................................................. 1 3. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM ..................................................... 3 4. Self test........................................................................................................... 5
G. INMARSAT C Section G1. FELCOM 10 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1 2. System settings .............................................................................................. 1 2.1 System setup: [F5]............................................................................ 1 2.2 Terminal setup: [F6] .......................................................................... 2 2.3 Updating a Distress Alert: [F10]........................................................ 2 3. Jumper wire setting......................................................................................... 3 3.1 EGC MSG. Alarm Output ON/OFF setting ....................................... 3 3.2 For Data Format (NMEA/CIF) ......................................................... 4 4. System status monitor .................................................................................... 5 5. S-RAM Clear .................................................................................................. 7 6. Menu Tree ....................................................................................................... 8 7. FURUNO Information (FQ5-93-025:New Version CPU Board) ..................... 9
8
Content
Section G2. FELCOM 11 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1 2. System settings .............................................................................................. 1 2.1 System setup: [F5]............................................................................ 1 2.2 Terminal: [F6].................................................................................... 2 2.3 Updating a Distress Alert: [F10]........................................................ 2 3. Dip switch setting............................................................................................ 3 4. System status monitor .................................................................................... 4 5. FURUNO Information...................................................................................... 6 FQ5-96-003: On Shortening the Antenna Cable .................................... 6 FQ5-95-012: Shortening the Antenna Cable/Modification of Power Amplifier ...................................................................................... 7 6. MES ID ........................................................................................................... 8 7. S-RAM Clear (IC-511) .................................................................................... 8 8. Menu Tree ....................................................................................................... 9 9. How to up date the Terminal (IB-581) program ............................................. 10
Section G3. FELCOM 12 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1 2. System settings .............................................................................................. 1 2.1 System: [F8] ..................................................................................... 1 2.2 Updating a Distress Alert: [F8].......................................................... 2 3. Dip switch setting............................................................................................ 3 4. System status monitor .................................................................................... 4 5. MES ID ........................................................................................................... 6 6. Menu Tree ....................................................................................................... 7 7. How to update the Terminal and CPU-2 program ........................................... 8 7.1Terminal ............................................................................................ 8 7.2 CPU-2 .............................................................................................. 9
9
Content
H. INMARSAT B Section H1. FELCOM 80 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1 2. System settings list ......................................................................................... 3 3. Setting procedure ........................................................................................... 5 3.1 DIP switch setting (Antenna unit: IB-180) ......................................... 5 3.2 Tx IF output level setting (Communication unit: IB-280) ................... 6 3.3 Gyro Converter setting (Communication unit: IB-280) .................... 7 3.4 Setting of Telephone ....................................................................... 16 3.5 Printer: PP-510 Setting (Ver 1650098100) ................................... 16 3.6 FAX settings: PFX-50 ..................................................................... 17 3.7 Terminal settings ............................................................................ 22 4. Self Test ........................................................................................................ 25 5. How to update Terminal Program.................................................................. 29
Section H2. FELCOM 81 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1 2. System settings list ......................................................................................... 2 3. Setting procedure ........................................................................................... 4 3.1 Adjustment of limit switch (Antenna unit: IB-181) ............................. 4 3.2 Tx RF output Level setting (Communication unit: IB-281)................. 4 3.3 Setting of Telephone ......................................................................... 5 3.4 FAX settings: PFX-50 ....................................................................... 6 3.5 Terminal settings ............................................................................ 11 4. Self Test ........................................................................................................ 16 4.1 IB-581............................................................................................. 16 4.2 Description of Status Monitor Display............................................. 17 5. How to update the Terminal program ............................................................ 20 Reference) How to use HSD Checker .............................................................. 21
10
Content
Section H3. FELCOM 82 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1 2. System settings .............................................................................................. 2 2.1 Heading alignment ........................................................................... 2 2.2 Telephone setting ............................................................................. 3 2.3 Fax setting (PFX-50) ........................................................................ 4 2.4 Gyro setting ..................................................................................... 6 2.5 Setup NAV data input circuit .......................................................... 10 2.6 Entering answer back code (only for class-1)................................. 11 2.7 OID/DID setting.............................................................................. 12 2.8 HSD set up .................................................................................... 19 2.9 About password ............................................................................. 20 2.10 Returning settings to factory defaults........................................... 22 3. Self-test ........................................................................................................ 23 3.1 Using handset ................................................................................ 23 3.2 Using terminal unit ......................................................................... 24 3.3 Reading program number............................................................... 25 3.4 Distress alert test (FUNC683) ........................................................ 26 3.5 Status monitor ................................................................................ 28 3.6 Using two-digit code service (Loopback test) ................................. 36 3.7 9.6k Data test ................................................................................. 37 3.8 HSD test......................................................................................... 38 3.9 LED status...................................................................................... 40 3.10 How to check angular rate sensor................................................ 45 3.11 How to check rotary joint ............................................................. 45 3.12 Error Messages at the Terminal Unit............................................ 46 4. Program Update ........................................................................................... 51 4.1 Connection ..................................................................................... 52 4.2 Upgrading SYSTEM, DEMOD, SYNC, DECODE, and TERM programs ...................................................................... 53 4.3 Upgrading handset program .......................................................... 55 4.4 Upgrading terminal program .......................................................... 57 5. Menu tree ..................................................................................................... 58 5.1 Menu on handset ........................................................................... 58 5.2 Menu on terminal unit (Class1) ...................................................... 61
11
Content
I. REMOTE STATION 1. Over view........................................................................................................ 1 1.1 Remote port specifications............................................................... 3 2. RB-700 2.1 Priority settings................................................................................. 8 2.2 Jumper settings ................................................................................ 9 2.3 Confirmation of jumper settings...................................................... 10 2.4 Speaker and handset volume ......................................................... 10 3. RB-500 3.1 Jumper settings .............................................................................. 11 3.2 Confirmation of jumper settings...................................................... 12 3.3 Speaker and handset volume ......................................................... 12 3.4 Connection ..................................................................................... 13 4. DB-500 4.1 Connection ..................................................................................... 15 4.2 FS-5000/8000................................................................................. 16 4.3 RB-500/700 Connection ................................................................. 18 4.4 FS-1562 and DSC/DP Connection ................................................. 20 4.5 Interconnection diagrams ............................................................... 21 5. Jumper settings on MAIN Board ................................................................... 24
J. NAVTEX RECEIVER Section J1. NX-500 1. Connection ..................................................................................................... 1 2. Slide switch settings ....................................................................................... 2 3. System settings .............................................................................................. 3 4. FURUNO Information (FQ5-93-006)............................................................... 4 5. Self test........................................................................................................... 6 6. Station List...................................................................................................... 8
12
Content
K. TERMINAL UNIT Section K1. IB-581 1. How to Quit Programs .................................................................................... 1 2. Changing the Terminal Software ..................................................................... 2 2.1 Overview ............................................................................................. 2 2.2 A method to change the terminal program by formatting A-drive ........ 2 3. Installing PC-DOS .......................................................................................... 4 3.1 Overview ............................................................................................. 4 3.2 Outline of the Procedure ..................................................................... 4 3.3 Until PC-DOS Starts ........................................................................... 5 3.4 Backup the System Files (PC-DOS: Ver.6.3)....................................... 7 3.5 Changing BIOS (Basic Input Output System) settings ........................ 8 3.6 Changing DIP SW and Internal Connector ....................................... 10 3.7 Installing System Files ...................................................................... 11 4. How to erase password ................................................................................ 13 5. AR-B1378-F2 (New type CPU card) ............................................................. 14 5.1 How to install PC-DOS...................................................................... 15 5.2 Changing BIOS settings.................................................................... 16
Section K2. IB-582 1. DOS installation.............................................................................................. 1 1.1 How to copy DOS program ................................................................. 1 1.2 Dos installation.................................................................................... 2 2. Erasing password ........................................................................................... 4 3. BIOS default ................................................................................................... 5 4. Layout and hardware settings......................................................................... 8
13
Content
Appendix AP1. Cable specifications 1.1 Cable Specifications ..................................................................................... 1 1.2 How to calculate voltage drop in power cable............................................... 6 1.3 Coaxial Cable Specifications ........................................................................ 9 1.4 How to attach the antenna cable connector ............................................... 11 1.5 Installation of Pre-amp unit and coaxial cable ............................................ 13
AP2. Power consumption 2.1 Power consumption list................................................................................. 1 2.2 Reserve Source of Energy (By class NK)..................................................... 3 2.3 Sample of Battery calculation table .............................................................. 4 2.4 Specifications of Rectifier and Battery charger............................................. 5
AP3. NMEA 3.1 List of NMEA sentences ............................................................................... 1 3.2 Sentences formatters ................................................................................... 3
AP4. Program ROM 4.1 Communication Equipment ROM List........................................................... 1 4.2 Compatibility of CONTROL board, and LCD module changed..................... 9 4.3 FURUNO Information ................................................................................. 11 Schematic diagram 05P0407D ..................................................................................................... a 05P0407E ..................................................................................................... b 05P0407F ......................................................................................................c 05P0407G..................................................................................................... d 05P0407........................................................................................................ e
14
Section A1. FS-1562-15/25 1. Connection
AT-1560-15
AT-1560-25
A1-1
FS-1562
2. System settings 2.1 Procedure 1. While pressing and holding down the [RCL] key, turn the power on. You get the following display. System Channel
9951
Setting No.
3 MEMO
2. Select the system cannel “9999” by rotating the FREQ/CH encoder. 3. Press the [RCL] [1] [5] [6] [2] and [ENT] keys in this order. (1562 is the password.) 4. Select a system channel to be changed by operating the FREQ/CH encoder. 5. Press the [RCL] key, enter a setting number, and press the [ENT] key. 6. To change another channel setting, repeat steps 4 and 5. 7 .To restore normal operation, turn the power off, and on again.
A1-2
FS-1562
2.2 System channel list
(Ver-09) Ver-09
System Channel
Setting Function 0
*9900
Country of Delivery
*9901
User Channel Clear
*9902 *9903 *9904 *9905
TX Frequency Selection RX Frequency Selection TLX Usage TLX RX Bandwidth
Std
1
2
3
Italy
Holland
Other
Free
Marine
ROM
Free
Marine
ROM
TX/RX
RX
Disable
Wide
Narrow
(2.4kHz)
(0.4kHz)
TX Delay Time
*9907
Power Reduction on 2182kHz
Enable
Disable
*9908
AM Usage
TX/RX
RX
Disable
*9909
LSB Usage
TX/RX
RX RX
*9911 *9912
Hol-
Other
Std
Italy
0
1
2
3
Marine Free Marine Free
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
5 to 50m sec
FAX Usage Emission Mode on 2182kHz Alarm TX Time
4
land
Press [RCL] [1] [ENT] key to clear
*9906
*9910
Default
H3E
USB
45 sec
No limit
Disable
Enable
10m sec 0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
Disable
2
2
2
2
Disable
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
Ver 09
0
0
0
0
Ver 09
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
H3E FIX Disable
2182kHz only
J3E FIX
RX+2182
*9913
Test Alarm Transmission
*9914
Test Alarm Frequency
*9915
TX TUNE
Enable
Disable
*9916
Remote Control Format
MIF
TBUS
*9917
EM Mode with TX Key ON from external equipment
change)
9918
Key Response Beep
OFF
ON
1
1
1
1
9919
Noise Blanker
OFF
ON
1
1
1
1
9920
AGC
OFF
ON
2
2
2
2
*9921
Clarifier Change Width
±150Hz
±100Hz
0
0
0
0
*9922
IA/RF Meter
IA
RF
0
0
0
0
*9923
ITU Channel
Std
USA
2
2
2
2
*9924
Channel/Frequency Display
Channel
Frequency
1
1
1
1
1605.0 – 29999.9kHz Auto
2191kHz
Auto (No
SSB
H3E
MODE
Std+MF
TLX
Ver-09:Changed from Ver-09
A1-3
Ver 09
FS-1562
System Channel
Ver07
Setting Function
*9925
Default setting of Power Data
*9926
Tuning Circuit for RX
*9928 9951
Priority setting on 2182kHz Scan Stop Signal Level
0
1
2
Default 3
4
Hol-
Other
Std
Italy
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
land
Press [RCL] [1] [ENT] key to restore to default setting Enable FS-1562
Disable
Ver 07
RB-500 (Remote)
SQ Level
S : 1 to 10
S=3
S=3
S=3
S=3
While receiving
1 – 99 sec
2sec
2sec
2sec
2sec
9952
Scan Stop Time
9953
Sweep Width
0.01 to 29999.99kHz
100k
100k
100k
100k
9954
Sweep Step Frequency
0.01 to 29999.99kHz
1.00k
1.00k
1.00k
1.00k
9955
Squelch Operation
3
3
3
3
9956
Squelch Level
S=5
S=5
S=5
S=5
9957
Squelch Delay Time
1000 ms 1000 Hz
1000 m 1000 Hz
1000 ms 1000 Hz
1000 ms 1000 Hz
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
9958
9959
Squelch Activating Frequency Squelch Activation frequency when 2-tone alarm 2182kHz is received
Voice
Voice + Voice or S-Level S-Level S : 0 to 10
S-Level
500 to 4000m sec 500 to 2000Hz No change
1300Hz (Open)
*9997
Selection of output power
150W AT-1560 -15
250W AT-5000
*9998
User CH Memory & Power ADJ
Enable
Disable
*9999
Password
250W AT-1560 -25
Enter Password:1562 to access (*) mark channel
Ver-07:Changed from Ver-07
Confirm the following system settings for GMDSS. 9904 (TLX Usage) 0:TX/RX default 9905 (TLX RX band width) 1:Narrow default 9906 (TX Delay Time) 10 m sec default 9908 (AM Usage) 1:RX default 9911 (EM on 2182kHz) 3:J3E FIX default 9915 (TX Tune) 0:Enable default 9916 (Remote control format) 0:MIF default 9917 (EM with TX key ON) 0:Auto (No change) default 9997 (Selection of out put power) 0:FS-1562-15 2:FS-1562-25 9928 (Priority setting) 1:Remote (When DSC-60 is connected.)
A1-4
FS-1562
2.3 System channel list
(Ver-03) Add.
Add.
Add.
: Different “setting” between Ver-3 and Ver-9.
A1-5
FS-1562
2.4 System settings descriptions
A1-6
FS-1562
2.5 LCD/Keyboard test & ROM Version No. Confirmation 1. While pressing and holding down the [ENT] key, turn on the power. All LCD segment appear. 2. Release the hand from the [ENT] key. 3. Press keys one by one. When the key is pressed, the corresponding number or letter appears at the upper right of LCD. See table below.
All LCD segments reappear several seconds after the 2 key is pressed.
A1-7
FS-1562
3. Channel Programming System channel: 9998 muse be set “0”, refer to section “2. System settings”. The FS-1562 can store up to 200 user channels, number 1 to 200. Procedure 1. While pressing and holding down the [RCL] key, turn the power on. 2. Select the system channel 9999 by operating the FREQ/CH encoder. 3. Press the [RCL] [1] [5] [6] [2] and [ENT] keys in this order. (Password) 4. Select the system channel 9998. 5. Press the [RCL] [0] and [ENT] keys to enable channel programming. 6. Select an RX channel to be programmed, by operating the FREQ/CH encoder. Operating the FREQ/CH encoder changes the display as below.
7. Select emission mode with the [MODE] key. 8. To enter an RX frequency, press the [RCL] key and enter a frequency with the number keys, then press the [ENT] key. 9. Select a TX channel of the same channel as RX with the FREQ/CH encoder. 10. Enter a TX frequency as follows. Simplex Press the [ENT] key. The same frequency entered at step 8 is stored. Duplex Press the [RCL] key, enter a frequency with the numeral keys, then press the [ENT] key.
A1-8
FS-1562
11. To program another channel, repeat steps 6 to 10. 12. Set the system channel 9998 to “1” (user channel memory: disable). 13. Turn the power off to store channel programmed. To erase a user channel 1. Select an RX channel to erase with the FREQ/CH encoder. 2. Press the [RCL] [0] [ENT] keys in this order. 3. Rotate the FREQ/CH encoder clockwise by one turn to select a TX channel of the same channel as RX. 4. Press the [RCL] [0] [ENT] keys in this order. To erase another user channel, repeat steps 1 to 4.
A1-9
FS-1562
4. Power Date Setting System channel: 9998 muse be set “0”, refer to section “2. System settings”. 1. Turn the power on. 2. Select a channel (Frequency). Referring to next page; Power data setting table. 3. Press the TX TUNE key. “TUNE” appears and the coupler starts tuning. When the tuning is completed successfully, “TUNE OK” appears. 4. While pressing and holding down the [ENT] key, press the [8] ,[9] or [7] key for HI, LOW, and TUNE respectively. [ENT] + [8]
HI Power
[ENT] + [9]
LOW Power
[ENT] + [7]
TUNE Power Normally this adjustment factory adjusted is not necessary. The tune power set on a channel can be used on all channel.
Power data appears Power data High power Low power Tune power
Default 220 40 20
FS-1562-15 Range of adjustment (LOW data+1) to 255 HI data – 1 0 to 60
Default 120 35 0
FS-1562-25 Range of adjustment (LOW data+1) to 150 HI data – 1 0 to 10
5. Set the power data by rotating the FREQ/CH encoder. (Observe the readout on power meter, If connected, while pressing the PTT switch and whistling or speaking into the handset.) 6. Press the [ENT] key to register power data. Power data disappears from the LCD. 7. To set another channel, repeat steps 2 top 6.
A1-10
FS-1562
Power data setting table
Note) Power data for user channel is commonly used for all class of emission.
The table below shows output power calculated from power data when 50 ohms dummy load is connected to the transceiver unit. Reference only. Condition; 4MHz SSB, Single tone (whistling into the handset). Power data Output Power
150W 250W
255
240
220
200
180
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
10
0
180
178
153
132
112
92
76
61
48
34
23
18
15
8
8
150: 345
320
260
200
160
115
80
50
35
25
A1-11
FS-1562
5. Self test 5.1 Transceiver unit
Condition: TLX mode 13.5MHz AGC ON
Condition: TLX mode Tone 1700Hz 3 MHz PA OFF
Condition: TLX mode Tone 1700Hz 3 MHz 20W/Full power
When the CPU is detected unlock signal from SYN circuit, frequency indication blinking.
A1-12
FS-1562
5.2 Antenna coupler unit The CPU and the relays which select capacitors and coil for tuning can be checked. Procedure 1. Open the antenna coupler cover. 2. Open the shield cover inside the coupler. 3. Turn on No.2 of the DIP switch S2. 4. Press the TUNE switch in the antenna coupler. 5. The 24 LEDs (CR1 to CR24) light one by one 1 second each. 6. Turn off No.2 of the DIP switch S2. 7. Close the covers. If CPU error is detected, CR1 light for ROM error, CR2 for RAM error, CR3 for A/D converter error. (ROM/RAM/AD converter incorporated in the CPU.)
A1-13
Section A2. FS-75/2550 1. Connection FS-75 (150W)
AT-1560-15 AT-1560-25
FS-2550 (250W)
AT-1560-25
A2-1
FS-75/2550
2. System settings 2.1 Procedure 1. While pressing and holding down the [CH] key, turn the power on. You get the following display. System Channel
9951
Setting No.
3 MEMO
2. Select the system cannel “9999” by rotating the FREQ/CH encoder. 3. Press the [CH] [7] [5] and [ENT](入力 入力) 入力 keys in this order. (75 is the password.) 4. Select a system channel to be changed by operating the FREQ/CH encoder. 5. Press the [CH] key, enter a setting number to be set, and press the [ENT] key. 6. To change another channel setting, repeat steps 4 and 5. 7 .To restore normal operation, turn the power off, and on again.
A2-2
FS-75/2550
2.2 System channel list
(Ver-09) Ver-09
System Channel
Function
*9900
Country of Delivery
*9901
User Channel Clear
*9902
Note-1
*9903
Note-1
TX Frequency Selection RX Frequency Selection
*9904
TLX Usage
*9905
TLX RX Bandwidth
*9906
Note-2
Setting 0 SSB
1 GMDSS
2
3
4
SSB
GMDSS
0
1
3
3
0
0
2
0
1
1
Press [CH] [1] [ENT] key to clear Free
Marine
ROM
Free
Marine
ROM
TX/RX
RX
Disable
Wide
Narrow
(2.4kHz)
(0.4kHz)
TX Delay Time
Marine Free Marine Free
5 to 50m sec
Power Reduction on 2182kHz
Enable
Disable
AM Usage
TX/RX
RX
Disable
*9909
LSB Usage
TX/RX
RX
*9910
FAX Usage
RX
*9911
Emission Mode on 2182kHz
USB
*9912
Alarm TX Time
45 sec
TX TUNE
Enable
EM Mode with TX Key ON from external equipment
9918
*9907
Default
10m sec 0
0
1
1
Disable
2
2
Disable
1
1
3
3
Ver 09
Disable
0
0
Ver 09
Disable
Auto
0
0
Auto (No change)
SSB
H3E
0
0
Key Response Beep
OFF
ON
1
1
9919
Noise Blanker
OFF
ON
1
1
9920
AGC
OFF
ON
1
1
*9922
IA/RF Meter
IA
RF
0
0
*9923
ITU Channel
Std
USA
0
0
*9925
Default setting of Power Data
*9908
Note-3
*9915
Note-5
*9917
Note-7
*9926
Note-8
*9927 *9928
Tuning Circuit for RX Recall of 27MHz CH frequencies Priority setting on 2182kHz
2182kHz only
RX+2182kHz
J3E FIX
TLX
MODE Std+MF
Press [CH] [1] [ENT] key to restore to default setting
Note-11
Enable
Disable
1
1
Disable
Enable
0
0
FS-75/2 550
(Remote)
0
0
RB-500
Ver 07: Changed from Ver 07 Ver 09: Changed from Ver09
A2-3
Ver 09
Ver 07
FS-75/2550
System Channel
Function
9951
Scan Stop Signal Level
9952
Scan Stop Time
9953
Sweep Width
9954
Sweep Step Frequency
9955
Squelch Operation
9956
Squelch Level
9957
Note-9
0 SQ Level
GMDSS
S : 1 to 10
S=3
S=3
1 – 99 sec
0
0
0.01 to 29999.99kHz
100k
100k
0.01 to 29999.99kHz
1.00k
1.00k
3
3
S=5
S=5
500 to 4000m sec
1000ms
1000m
500 to 2000Hz
1000Hz
1000Hz
2
While receiving
Voice
Default SSB
1
3
Voice + Voice or S-Level S-Level S : 0 to 10
S-Level
Squelch Delay Time Squelch Activating Frequency Squelch Activation frequency when 2-tone alarm 2182kHz is received Check meter on display
9958
Setting 4
No change
1300Hz (Open)
0
0
Individual
All
1
1
Selection of output power
150W AT-1560 -15
250W AT-5000
0
0
*9998
User CH Memory & Power ADJ
Enable
Disable
1
1
*9999
Password
9959
9960 *9997
Note-10
250W AT-1560 -25
Enter Password:75 to access (*) mark channel
Conform the following system setting for GMDSS. 9904 (TLX Usage) 0:TX/RX GMDSS default 9905 (TLX RX band width) 1:Narrow SSB/GMDSS default 9906 (TX Delay Time) 10 m sec SSB/GMDSS default 9908 (AM Usage) 1:RX SSB/GMDSS default 9911 (EM on 2182kHz) 3:J3E FIX SSB/GMDSS default 9915 (TX Tune) 0:Enable SSB/GMDSS default 9917 (EM with TX key ON) 0:Auto(No change) SSB/GMDSS default 9997 (Selection of output power) 0:FS-75 2:FS-2550 (AT-1560-25 installed) 9928 (Priority setting) 1 (When DSC-60 is connected.)
A2-4
FS-75/2550
2.3 System settings descriptions
Not use
Not use
A2-5
FS-75/2550
2.4 LCD/Keyboard test & ROM Version No. Confirmation 1. While pressing and holding down the [ENT] key, turn on the power. All LCD segment appear. 2. Release the hand from the [ENT] key. 3. Press keys one by one. When the key is pressed, the corresponding number or letter appears at the upper right of the LCD. See table below. Ex.) The 2 key is pressed. Key indication
111 - - - - - 1 0158100
ROM Version No.
All LCD segments reappear several seconds after the 2 key is pressed. Cursor
Key
1
2
3
Indication
0
1
2
3
Key
4
5
6
Freq.
Indication
4
5
6
7
Key
7
8
9
CH
Indication
8
9
A
b
Key
2182
0
ALARM
ENT
Indication
C
d
E
F
A2-6
FS-75/2550
3. Channel Programming System channel: 9998 muse be set “0”, refer to section “2. System settings”. The FS-75/2550 can store up to 200 user channels, See the table below. Band(MHz) 0 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 18 22 25
Channel 1-10 1-10 1-10 1-10 1-20 1-20 1-20 1-20 1-20 1-20 1-20 1-20
Procedure 1. While pressing and holding down the [CH] key, turn the power on. 2. Select the system channel 9999 by operating the FREQ/CH encoder. 3. Press the [CH] [7] [5] and [ENT] keys in this order. (Password) 4. Select the system channel 9998. 5. Press the [CH] [0] and [ENT] keys to enable channel programming. 6. Select an RX channel to be programmed by operating the FREQ/CH encoder. Operating the FREQ/CH encoder changes the display as below. Band
Channel
0 - 01 0.00
R
Frequency
MEMO J3E
9999
9998
0-01 R
0-01 T
------
------
25-20 R
9900
25-20 T
7. Select the emission mode with the [MODE] key. 8. To enter an RX frequency, press the [Freq] key and enter a frequency with the number keys, then press the [ENT] key. 9. Select a TX channel of the same channel as RX with the FREQ/CH encoder.
A2-7
FS-75/2550
10. Enter a TX frequency as follows. Simplex Press the [ENT] key. The same frequency entered at step 8 is stored. Duplex Press the [Freq] key, enter a frequency with the numeral keys, then press the [ENT] key. 11. To program another channel, repeat steps 6 to 10. 12. Set the system channel 9998 to “1” (user channel memory: disable). 13. Turn the power off to store channels programmed. To erase a user channel 1. Select an RX channel to be erased with the FREQ/CH encoder. 2. Press the [Freq] [0] [ENT] keys in this order. 3. Rotate the FREQ/CH encoder clockwise by one turn to select a TX channel of the same channel as RX. 4. Press the [Freq] [0] [ENT] keys in this order. To erase another user channel, repeat steps 1 to 4.
A2-8
FS-75/2550
4. Power Date Setting System channel: 9998 muse be set “0”, refer to section “2. System settings”. 1. Turn the power on. 2. Select a channel (Frequency). Referring to next page; Power data setting table. 3. Press the TX TUNE key. “TUNE” appears and the coupler starts tuning. When the tuning is completed successfully, “TUNE OK” appears. 4. While pressing and holding down the [ENT] key, press the [8] , [9] or [7] key for HI, LOW, and TUNE respectively. [ENT] + [8]
HI Power
[ENT] + [9]
LOW Power
[ENT] + [7]
TUNE Power Normally this adjustment factory adjusted is not necessary. The tune power set on a channel can be used on all channel.
Power data High power Low power Tune power
Default 220 40 20
FS-75 Range of adjustment (LOW data+1) to 255 HI data – 1 0 to 60
Default 120 35 0
FS-2550 Range of adjustment (LOW data+1) to 150 HI data – 1 0 to 10
5. Set the power data by rotating the FREQ/CH encoder. (Observe the readout on power meter, if connected, while pressing the PTT switch and whistling or speaking into the handset. Or press [0]:tone key, then while pressing the PTT switch.) 6. Press the [ENT] key to register power data. Power data disappears from the LCD. 7. To set another channel, repeat steps 2 to 6.
A2-9
FS-75/2550
Power data setting table
Note) Power data for user channel is commonly used for all classes of emission. The table below shows output power calculated from power data when 50 ohms dummy load is connected to the transceiver unit. Reference only. Condition) 4MHz SSB, Single tone (whistling into the handset) Power data Output Power
150W 250W
255
240
220
200
180
180
178
153
132
112
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
10
0
92
76
61
48
34
23
18
15
8
8
150: 345
320
260
200
160
115
80
50
35
25
A2-10
FS-75/2550
5. Self Test 5.1 Transceiver unit This test checks the transceiver for proper operation. It should be conducted regularly to ensure proper operation. Before starting the test, set the RF GAIN control knob to maximum (fully clockwise). Procedure 1. While pressing and holding down the [CURSOR] key, turn on the power. All LCD segments appear. 2. Release the hand from the [CURSOR] key. The FS-75/2550 starts self-test and the display shows the following indications in order.
Condition: TLX mode 13.5MHz AGC ON
Condition: TLX mode Tone 1700Hz 3 MHz PA OFF
Condition: TLX mode Tone 1700Hz 3 MHz 20W/Full power
When the CPU is detected unlock signal from SYN circuit, frequency indication blinking.
A2-11
FS-75/2550
5.2 Antenna coupler unit The CPU and the relays which select capacitors and coil for tuning can be checked. Procedure 1. Open the antenna coupler cover. 2. Open the shield cover inside the coupler. 3. Turn on No.2 of the DIP switch S2. 4. Press the TUNE switch in the antenna coupler. 5. The 24 LEDs (CR1 to CR24) light one by one for 1 second each. 6. Turn off No.2 of the DIP switch S2. 7. Close the covers. If CPU error is detected, CR1 lights for ROM error, CR2 for RAM error, CR3 for A/D converter error. (ROM/RAM/AD converter incorporated in the CPU.)
A2-12
Section A3. FS-5000/8000 1. Connection The below installation is the connected for FS-5000.
Note) FS-8000 Transceiver unit Control unit AC/DC Power supply
: FS-8000T : FS-5000C : PR-850A x 2sets
A3-1
FS-5000/8000
2. System settings Change the specifications with the following key sequence. 1. Press [STO] key. 2. Enter item number (system setting No.), and press [ENT] key. 3. Setting number desired, and press [ENT] key. Ex) [STO] [9] [9] [0] [1] [ENT] [0] [ENT] Reference; A power supply is only connected with the controller unit (FS-5000C), while pressing and holding the [ENT] key, turn on the power. Controller working individually. and system settings of FS-5000 can be done.
2.1 System Channel List The default settings are shown in a screened cell of setting item. Ver-21 Channel No. 9900 9901 9902 9903 9904 9905 9906 9907 9908 9909 9910 9911 9912 9913 9914 9915 9916
System setting No.
Function Model TX freq. Selection N.C. Output power of transceiver unit on MF band Class of emission on 2182kHz TX tune
0 FS-5000 Free
1 FS-2500 Limited
2 FS-1600 ROM
400W
150W
50W
AM
SSB
SSB FIX
Enable
Disable
3 FS-8000 Marine
Auto (Tuning is done when setting TX freq.)
Scan of TX channel Enable Disable Time display format Japan USA Europe Second unit display Enable Disable Display of class of emission NOR(SSB) ITU(J3E) Numerical display of check meter Disable Enable data Test alarm RX TX Test alarm freq. 2191kHz (Selectable) TX delay time 30ms (Selectable:5-99ms) Note) FS-8000:10ms Alarm sending time 45sec (Selectable:1-9999s) Check meter items Full Short Keyboard lock OFF Lock Intercom (controlled by [*]key)
A3-2
4
FS-5000/8000
Channel No. 9917 9918 9919 9920 9921 9922
50 ohm BK. relay Time adj. (Clock) Control unit priority Beep sound ON/OFF Beep sound level Beep sound freq.
9923
Dummy
9924
Freq. rang in which shortening capacitor tunes on. (9923 should be set at "2") Test tone Power reduction on 2182/2187.5kHz
9925 9926 9927 9928
Minimum output power
9930
Data to "REM1" terminal
9931
Data to "REM2" terminal
9932
Data to "REM3" terminal
9933
Data to "CIF" terminal
9934 9935 9936 9937 9938
9939
Setting No.
Function
Class of emission of TX/RX, when unit connected to "REM1" is once keyed. Class of emission of TX/RX, when unit connected to "REM2" is once keyed. Class of emission of TX/RX, when unit connected to "REM3" is once keyed. Class of emission of TX only while unit connected to "REM1" is keyed. Class of emission of TX only while unit connected to "REM2" is keyed. Class of emission of TX only while unit connected to "REM3" is keyed.
0 ON/OFF Auto NO OFF
Enable
1 2 3 ON (Fixed) Manual 1 (Local) 2 (Remote) ON (Fixed) 6 (Selectable:0-10) 2000Hz (Selectable:100-3000Hz) Shortening Disable capacitor Lower limit 2500kHz
Enable
Upper limit 3999.9kHz Disable
Enable
Disable
Less then 60W MIF (4800bps) MIF (4800bps) MIF (4800bps) MIF (4800bps)
60W or more TBUS
CIF
NMEA
TBUS
CIF
NMEA
TBUS
CIF
NMEA
TBUS
CIF
NMEA
No change
SSB
AM
TLX
No change
SSB
AM
TLX
No change
SSB
AM
TLX
No change
SSB
AM
TLX
No change
SSB
AM
TLX
No change
SSB
AM
TLX
A3-3
4
MIF 2 (1200bps) MIF 2 (1200bps) MIF 2 (1200bps) MIF 2 (1200bps)
FS-5000/8000
Channel No. 9940 9941 9942 9943 9944 9945 9946 9947 9948 9949 9950 9951 9952 9953 9954 9955 9956 9957 9960 9961 9962
Setting No. Function Receiver bandwidth in kHz : SSB (Changeable thru keyboard) Receiver bandwidth in kHz : CW (Changeable thru keyboard) Receiver bandwidth in kHz : TLX (Changeable thru keyboard) Receiver bandwidth in kHz : AM (Changeable thru keyboard) Receiver bandwidth in kHz : R3E (Changeable thru keyboard) Receiver bandwidth in kHz : FAX (Changeable thru keyboard) Receiver bandwidth in kHz : LSB (Changeable thru keyboard) Squelch on telex mode Noise blanker on telex mode AGC on telex mode Duplex mode on telex mode Receiving antenna on telex mode (Only when optional R.ANT SEL board is installed.) Tx antenna status at reception Operation on AM mode Operation on R3E mode Operation on FAX mode Operation on LSB mode Cypher communication (Vs Enable control signal ON/OFF on TB2-10 in FS-5000C unit) Recall of 27MHz SSB/DSB freq. ITU freq. Table selection MF band : 405-526.5kHz transmission (When optional MF tuner : AT-410 is installed.)
0
1
2
6kHz
3kHz
0.3kHz
6kHz
3kHz
0.3kHz
6kHz
3kHz
0.3kHz
6kHz
3kHz
0.3kHz
6kHz
3kHz
0.3kHz
6kHz
3kHz
0.3kHz
6kHz
3kHz
0.3kHz
No change No change No change No change
OFF OFF FAST Disable
3
Main Dup (Used) (Not used) OFF ON (No change) (To GND) T/RX
RX only
Disable
T/RX T/RX T/RX
RX only RX only RX only
Disable Disable Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable Standard
Enable USA
Disable
Enable
A3-4
Europe
2182kHz only
4
FS-5000/8000
Channel No. 9963 9964 9965 9966 9980 9981 9982 9989 9997 9998 9999
Setting
Function
0 1 2 3 User channel programming Enable Disable FS-8000 only check meter indication for both upper & lower No Yes transceiver unit Scan response time (DSC/NBDP) Standard Fast The transmission of AM tow-tone Free Limited Disable alarm is restricted or not. Select default setting for each Enter international telephone country code country 0:standerd 1:USA 31Holland 44:Europe 81:Japan Dummy load installation NO Yes (Both functions of 9911 and 9923 9911:RX, 9911:TX, 9923:Disable 9923:Enable are determined.) ANT BK. relay or RX ANT Yes NO installation (Both functions of 9913 9913:30ms, 9913:10ms, 9917:ON/OFF 9917:ON and 9917 are determined.) Power default setting Europe Norway (When old type Ant. coupler is installed.) All user CH clear Clear System Lock (Important system [OFF/ON]: Enter "present time" to change setting. setting are not changeable.) System initialization (Default) Disable Enable
4
47:Norway
Important) When the ROM change, should be changing both the ROMs of same version number in Control unit and Transceiver unit.
A3-5
FS-5000/8000
2.2 Confirmation of settings To confirm settings, press [RCL] [9] [9] [9] [9] and [ENT] in this order. Then press [ENT] key successively. System setting for GMDSS FS-5000) System channel:9982 (A.BK relay or R.ANT) ---- [1]: YES Note) 9913:System Delay 10 ms 9917:50 ohm BK Relay 1:ON (Permanently) *The 50 ohm BK is installed the TX FIL board.
Tx ANT
Tx/Rx ANT
Rx ANT AT-5000
AT-5000
or
ANT BK Relay Tx
Tx
Rx
Rx
FS-5000T
FS-5000T
FS-8000) 9913:System Delay 10 ms 9917:50 ohm BK Relay ON or OFF (depend on installation) *The 50 ohm BK is installed the COMBINER board.
Tx ANT
Tx/Rx ANT
Rx ANT AT-5000
AT-5000
or Tx/Rx
FS-8000T
9917: 0 (ON/OFF)
Tx
Rx
FS-8000T
9917: 1 (ON)
“BFO” setting frequency The DSC and NBDP are connected, the BFO frequency should be set to 1700 Hz. 1700 Hz; [BFO] 1700 [ENT]
A3-6
FS-5000/8000
2.3 System channel description The following describes about some system channels. 9900 Output power of ITU/DSC channels and direct key-in frequencies are preset as shown below. Model vs Max. Output Power (*): for Japanese vessels only. Output Power
FS-5000 400W
FS-2500* 250W
FS-1600* 150W
FS-8000 800W
9901 Free
Any frequencies (1.6065 to 29.9999 MHz) can be transmitted by direct key-in. Limited The frequencies in the ITU/DSC and user channels can be transmitted. ROM Only the frequencies stored in the user channel can be transmitted. Marine Any frequency in the following bands may be transmitted. 1606.5 - 4438 kHz, 5680 kHz 18780 - 18900 kHz, 6200 - 6525 kHz, 19680 - 19800 kHz, 8100 - 8815 kHz, 22000 - 22855 kHz, 12230 - 13200 kHz, 25070 - 25210 kHz, 16360 - 17410 kHz, 26100 - 26175 kHz 9911 To test the transmitter press [TEST] and [START] keys in this order. The dummy load (if equipped) is connected automatically and the test signal of 2191kHz, modulated by two-tone alarm, is sent to the dummy load. 9915 If you select "1" (short), only check data for Ia, Vc, Ic and Pi are displayed repeatedly every pressing of the [CHECK METER] key. 9916 To enable to lock the keys except for [SEND], [START], [2182], and [2187.5] keys, select "1" (ON). Then press the * key to turn on the key lock function. First press of the * key make the keys inactive. (Keyboard Lock [ON]" will be displayed.) Select "2" (Intercom call), to use the [*] key for intercom call. Note that the AF board 05P0356-33 in the Control Unit is required.
A3-7
FS-5000/8000
9917 Used if installation contains a receiving antenna or ANT BK RELAY board (in antenna coupler). For high speed switching between receiving and transmitting (for example, telex) set to "1." Then, TX delay time (system setting 9913) is shortened to "10ms”. 9919 For control unit priority, select the same setting numbers for both control units. *To give priority to No. 1 Control Unit; *To give priority to No. 2 Control Unit; No.1 Control Unit: Setting ”1” No.1 Control Unit : Setting “2” No.2 Control Unit: Setting ”1” No.2 Control Unit : Setting “2” 9923 Setting No.
Contents LCD Indication Remarks Dummy load can be switched With DUMMY LOAD “0”(Enable) DUMMY by DUMMY key. PCB. DUMMY key is not Without DUMMY --“1”(Disable) operative. LOAD PCB Shortening capacitor automatically turns on in the “2” range set by 9924/9925. S.CAP(Shorten-ing With modified (Short Cap.) Further, DUMMY key is capacitor) DUMMY LOAD PCB allowed to turn on/off shortening capacitor.
9928 For 1988 SOLAS Convention ships (GMDSS) set this item to "1." Then, minimum output power is automatically set at 60W (power data -- MF:115, HF:110), except for minimum power data already stored into user channel. 9930 - 9932 MIF
Furuno Multi Interface for Radio communication. Selected when DP-6, DSC-6 is connected. TBUS Selected for equipment made by 'Thrane & Thrane A/S" of Denmark. If TBUS data is used, it is not necessary to connect TXD/RXD lines.
9934 – 9936 If you wish to change the class of emission only while the selcall is transmitted and to restore it automatically to previous status after transmission, set the channel Nos. 9934 - 9936 and 9937 to "0" (No change) and "2" (AM), respectively. EX) Selcall is connected REM 1, set to system channel “9934” to “0” and “9937” to “2”..
A3-8
FS-5000/8000
9947 The "1": SQ on Telex [1-OFF] setting automatically turns off the SQ (if ON) when class of emission is changed to TELEX. (Note that AF signal to DP-5/6 is not passed through squelch circuit, so this setting is not for DP-5/6 connection.) 9948 The '1": NB on Telex [1-OFF] setting automatically turns off the NB (if ON) when class of emission is changed to TELEX. 9949 AGC on Telex *The "1" setting sets AGC to FAST when class of emission is changed to TELEX. 9950 Duplex on Telex *The "1" setting inhibits DUPLEX mode (unnecessary on TELEX) when class of emission is changed to TELEX. 9952 1: ON (Connected to GND) *This function is available only when the Rx antenna is installed and dummy load board with antenna earth relay is mounted in the coupler. If you want to connect the Tx antenna to ground manually (irrespective of 9952 setting), press the [DUMMY] key. (For HF band of the FS-8000, this function is operative only when the output power is selected for "Low 2" or less.) 9953 2182 --- Transmission 2182 kHz, Reception all frequencies 9961 ITU Freq. Table [0-Standerd, 1-USA, 2-EU] [2-EU] selection; MF band ITU frequency list added.
A3-9
FS-5000/8000
9966 In accordance with both the above setting and system setting 9953 (Operation on AM mode), the transmission of two-tone alarm on AM mode is as follows:
System setting:9966 0:FREE (Factory setting)
1: LIMITED
System setting:9953 0: TX/RX 1: RX only 2: No 3: 2182 0: TX/RX 1: RX only 2: No 3: 2182
TX of two-tone alarm on AM mode. Possible on all frequencies. Disabled Possible on all frequencies. Possible on all frequencies. Disabled Possible on 2182 kHz only.
9980 Returns to default setting for each country. For example, enter “44” for Europe. 9981 Determines the functions of 9911 and 9923 as follows: 9981 9911: Alarm 9923 : Dummy
[0] NO 0-Receive 1-Inhibit
[1] YES 1-Transmit 0-Enable
9982 Determines the functions of 9913 and 9917 as follows: 9982 9913 : System 9917: 50 ohms BK Relay
[0] NO 30 ms 0-on/off
[1] YES 10 ms 1-Permanently on (fixed)
A3-10
FS-5000/8000
9989 Power setting for Europe and Norway type [1-EU, 2-NOR]. Setting of power data. (When old type Ant. coupler is installed. :05P0358-44 and after) EU (Europe) 1.6-2.5 FS-5000 MHz FS-8000
Power data 225 160
NOR (Norway) 1.6-2.5MHz 2.5-4.0MHz 4.0-30MHz
Power data FS-5000: 200 FS-8000: 160 FS-5000: 210 FS-8000: 160 FS-5000: 225 FS-8000: 160
9998 Ex) Preset time is 12 : 35. Press 1235 [ENT] in this order to turn on or off the system lock function. The following system settings are not changeable when you turn on the system lock function. * STO FULL (or LOW) Power Adjustment * STO 9900 Model 9901 Tx freq. selection 9903 Output power of SSB on MF band 9914 Alarm sending time 9960 Recall 27MHz freq. 9999 System initialization
A3-11
FS-5000/8000
2.4 Default setting for each country [STO] [9] [9] [8] [0] [ENT] Country code [ENT] The default settings are shown in a screened cell of setting item. The system channel that it isn't mentioned in the below list is the same as standard setting. Refer to section “2.1 System Channel List”. Country Code List CH No.
Setting
Country Code
Function 0
1
0
U 0
3
44: EU S 0
50W
0
1
0
0
0
2
2
3
4
Types of delivery for each country 9901 9903
TX freq. Selection Output power of transceiver unit on MF band
Free
Limited
ROM
400W
150W
Marine
0: Standard
1:USA
31: Holland
47: 81: Norway Japan N K 3 0
9904
Class of emission on 2182kHz
AM
SSB
SSB FIX
2
2
2
2
2
2
9907
Time display format
Japan
USA
Europe
0
1
2
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
30 10
30 10
30 10
30 10
10 10
30 10
0
0
0
0
1
0
9910 9913 9917 9923 9926 9927 9928
9950 9953 9954 9955 9956
9957
9961
Numerical display of Disable Enable check meter data TX delay time 30ms (Selectable:5-99ms) Note) FS-8000:10ms *Upper:FS-5000 *Lower:FS-8000 ON 50 ohm BK. relay ON/OFF (Fixed)
Dummy Test tone Power reduction on 2182/2187.5kHz Minimum output power
Enable Disable
1
1
1
1
1
1
Enable
Disable
0
1
1
1
1
0
Enable
Disable
0
1
1
1
1
0
Less then 60W
60W or more
0
1
1
1
1
0
Disable
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
No Duplex mode on change telex mode Operation on AM T/RX mode Operation on R3E T/RX mode Operation on FAX T/RX mode Operation on LSB T/RX mode Cypher communication (Vs Enable control signal Disable ON/OFF on TB2-10 in FS-5000C unit) ITU freq. Table selection
Shortening capacitor
Standard
2182kHz only
RX only
Disable
RX only
Disable
0
0
1
1
1
1
RX only
Disable
0
0
1
1
1
1
RX only
Disable
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
2
2
2
0
Enable
USA
Europe
A3-12
FS-5000/8000
3. Jumper settings 3.1 For NAV data format selecting, CIF or NMEA Jumper wire setting on AF board selects data format to be received. Referring to next page. In addition, system setting for “9933:Data to CIF terminal” port must be set. [STO] 9 9 3 3 [ENT] 0: MIF(4800bps) 1: TBUS 2: CIF 3: NMEA 4: MIF2(1200bps) FS-5000C
TB-4
CIF/NMEA (TXD/RXD)
NMEA
or MIF(4800bps)
Nav device
FURUNO Radio Equipment EX)RB-500
3.2 When using C.Loop between FS-5000/8000 and DB-500 Put a jumper wire on the AF board to use current loop format. Refer to the next page for locatin of parts on AF board having suffix number –33 and after. In addition confirm the system setting for “9931:Data to REM 2 terminal” port. To connect with the DB-500 (C.Loop) or RB-500, setting should be as below. [STO] 9 9 3 1 [ENT] 0: MIF(4800bps) 3: NMEA
1: TBUS 4: MIF2(1200bps)
Jumper wire: Short (Current Loop)
A3-13
2: CIF
FS-5000/8000
CIF/NMEA *CIF NMEA: Open, CIF: Short *NMEA NMEA: Short, CIF: Open REM2 *C.Loop Short *RS-232C Open
A3-14
FS-5000/8000
4. User (Preset) Channel Programming The 'TX freq. selection" (9901) is set to "1" (Free), so you may store frequencies by recalling the ITU/DSC channels or by keying in a frequency through the keyboard. Select class of emission, bandwidth, and frequency, then press the following keys to store the frequencies (class of emission & BW as well) into the user channel. [STO] (User CH No.) [ENT] [ENT] *User CH No. : 1 to 8999 CH (storage capacity: 400 CH) Execute the following key sequence to store ITU frequencies (class of emission & BW as well) into the user channel. [ITU] (ITU CH No.) [ENT] [STO] (User CH No.) [ENT] [ENT] Note) To see stored user channels, press [RCL] 9998 [ENT].
To erase a user channel, press [STO] “User CH No.” [ENT] [0] [ENT].
A3-15
FS-5000/8000
5. Power Adjustment
A3-16
FS-5000/8000
A3-17
FS-5000/8000
A3-18
FS-5000/8000
A3-19
FS-5000/8000
A3-20
FS-5000/8000
6. Self test 6.1 Transceiver unit
A3-21
FS-5000/8000
6.2 Antenna Coupler unit Old type antenna coupler
New type antenna coupler
(05P0358-44 and after)
To check the antenna coupler for proper operation, press the CHCK button (S2) on the coupler board. The relay start chattering and LED’s CR1 to CR24 blink one by one in ascending order. If device failure is found, an appropriate LED lights to indicate the offending device: Device LED ROM CR1 RAM CR2 A/D converter CR3 Note) ROM, RAM, A/D converter are incorporated in the CPU.
A3-22
Section B1. DSC-5
1. Connection
DSC-5 Rear View
DSC-5 configurations MF/HF system *DSC-5 + AA-50 + FS-1562/5000/8000 + DP-5/6 *DSC-5 + AA-50 + FS-1562/5000/8000 + DP-5/6 + RV-118G/128G *DSC-5 + AA-50 + FT-258/508 + RV-118G/128G + DP-5/6 *DSC-5A (with 2187.5kHz WR) + FS-1562/5000/8000 + (DP-5/6) VHF system *DSC-5 + FM-7000 (with Channel 70 watch receiver) *DSC-5V (with Channel 70 WR) + FM-7000
B1-1
DSC-5
MF/HF System
Not use.
VHF System
Note) key-lock command: Priority command
B1-2
DSC-5
2. Changing System Settings and MMSI number 2.1 Changing system settings To change system settings; 1. Press the [SETUP] key at the default display followed by pressing the [FILE] key within two or three seconds.
MES AD
-------- I
2. Select “I” by pressing the [SELCT] key several times. 3. Then, press the [ENT] key. Self-ID
: 431456789
Group-ID : 011111111
4. Enter cipher code 652111. Self-ID
Here !!
:?
You can enter new ID number.
Group-ID :?
5. Enter self ID code followed by pressing the [ENT] key. 6. Enter group ID code followed by pressing the [ENT] key. *Ready for filing* S:431456789 G:011111111
Note) When own ship is not assignment to Group ID, set to “011111111”. 7. Enter cipher code 652111 again. Ignore ID < > ON OFF
8. Select “ON” then press the [ENT] key. “TEST” indication blinks. TEST
B1-3
DSC-5
9. You can change (set) following settings. *Selection (VHF or MF/HF) of communication equipment. [SETUP] - [4] *”COMM” setting in the PROG menu. [SELECT] - [PROG] --- [COMM] *Tx-key timing setting in the “SYS” sub menu. [SELECT] - [PROG] - [SYST] --- “key” *Further, ”TO” (Test tone) in the self test can be done. [SELECT] [PROG] [TEST] --- “TO” Refer to Setting List for details. 10. After changing the settings, set the “Ignore ID” in the “TO” test to “OFF” for normal operation by taking the steps below. TEST
[SELECT]
CALL
-----
PROG
Select "PROG"
[ENT]
TIME
-----
TEST
Select "TEST"
[ENT] Self test < > Select "TO" MO TO
----[ENT]
NARK
-----
ID
Select "ID"
[ENT] Ignore ID < >
Select "OFF"
ON OFF [ENT] Watch
Returns to default display
B1-4
Important !!
DSC-5
2.2 Settings List For MF/HF DSC system Standard type AA-50/DSC
Note) The AA-50 is not required when DSC-5A is installed. DMC
or
D
B
A
E
CIF/NMEA
DSC
DSC-5
Note)
MF/HF TR
FS-5000 -8000
AA-50 MF/HF RX
Printer
FS-1562
DB-500 DB-120
DP-5/6
DMC-5
REM
DB
REM1-3
NBDP
C
REM1-3
REM-B
PP-500 -510
REM-A
DP-5/6
Added Receiver type RCV RV-118G 128G
REM
Note) The AA-50 is not required when DSC-5A is installed.
MF/HF TR Note)
REM
DSC
AA-50
DMC-5
DB
or
DSC DMC
A
B
E
MF/HF RX
CIF/NMEA
MF-HF T/R
DSC-5 Printer
FS-1562
DB-500 DB-120
DP-5/6
C
D
REM1-3
FS-5000 -8000
NBDP
REM1-3
REM-B
PP-500 -510
REM-A
DP-5/6
For VHF DSC system DMC-5 C D E
DMC A
B
CIF/NMEA
DSC-5/5V Printer
REM-1
FM-7000 VHF
Note) DSC-5V is equipped with CH70 WR.
PP-500 -510
B1-5
DSC-5
The default settings are shown in a screened cell of each setting item. Setting List Key operation Item Select XMITR MMSI Group ID TIME Line out level
1
2
3
Settings
4
5
[FILE] [FILE]
VHF System
MF/HF
VHF
I I TIME
DMC connection
REM-A
VHF connection
REM-B
NBDP connection
COMM
[SELECT]
REM-C
PROG
REM-D
HF RX connection
REM-E
NBDP remote
NBDP
EXT ALM
Note
Own ID Group ID Date & UTC
LINE CIF/ NMEA
0dBm
1dBm Jumper setting: CONT pcb JP-1/2 ON:DMC-5 connected
CIF CIF or NMEA NMEA ON OFF OFF VHF VHF+CH70 TERM OFF NBDP VHF TERM WR RT ON XT TERM WR RT OFF XT TERM OFF WR RCV TERM A1A:ON A1A:OFF
DIS URG SAF BUS ROU AUTO 0.5 / 15
ALARM SYST
Tx key timing
MF/HF DSC System Add. Standard RCV
[4]:XMITR [SET UP]
NAV device selection
HF TR connection
6
KEY
B1-6
ON or OFF
OFF
No.1VHF: VHF No.2VHF VHF+ CH70
OFF or NBDP
OFF
ON-WR
ON-RT
OFF-XT
WR
WR
OFF
ON
OFF
DIS
AUTO
0.5
NBDP:DP connected
DSC-5
Key operation Item
1
2
3
Printer selection
[SELECT]
PROG
SYST
Monitor selection
AUTO ACK setting
[6]: AUTOACK
DIS/URG ALM type
SLOW DSC & MODEM Ver BEEP 1:lineout 2:line in 3:DMC TxD MO 4:DMC RxD 5:CIF TxD 6:CIF TEST RxD TO RR RL LL MC K D P
[0]: PRINT
VHF System
Note Quick: PP-500/510 connected
QUIK
BEEP or 1
For monitor test
--
ABLE NR / MOD 0 / 9 ON OFF ON OFF
UNABLE
KEY ALM
[5]: SCAN
6 QUICK
[7]: VOL
[SETUP]
Manual position
5
TYPE
Key click ON/OFF ALM ON /OFF
Printer ON/OFF setting
4 PRT
Ver check
Scan freq. setting
Setting value MF/HF DSC System Standard RCV
ABLE
1 ON ON
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
T2189.5/R2177.0 T4208.0/R4219.5 T6312.5/R6331.0 T8415.0/R8436.5 T12577.5/R12657.0
F6
T16805.0/R16903.0
AUTO MANU
[1]:POSITION
B1-7
Not used
Recommend to International Freq (To cannel scan freq.,set the RX freq. as 99999.9.)
AUTO
When NAV device is not connected.
To cancel the manually entered data. Enter 9999 for the UTC.
DSC-5
3. Jumper wire settings DSC-5A only
Format CIF (default) NMEA
JP 1 Open Short
JP 2 Short Open
Note) CIF/NMEA selection must be also made through the menu; Select the PROG menu and call the COMM menu, then select CIF/NMEA selection mode. (COMM menu can be called only when “Ignore ID” is set to “ON” .)
B1-8
DSC-5
4. Self test Pressing the [3] key at normal display, automatically starts the daily test. The test checks the MODEM, Remote line and the connection between DSC, MF/HF RT and NBDP with MIF commands.
B1-9
DSC-5
5. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM After replacing the ROM on the CONTROL board or if the unit is not working properly, be sure to press the NMI switch on the CONTROL board after turning on the unit, to clear contents of S-RAMs.
1. Turn the power on. 2. Press the NMI switch. For DSC-5/5A (1) The power is automatically cut off. (2) Turn the power on manually. For DSC-5R Since the indication of “Turn off the power” appears on the screen, turn the power off and on manually. 3. The screen should look something like this: NO
RAM1
RAM2
EEROM
RAM clear 1. When Select to RAM 1 or RAM 2, press the [ENT] key; For DSC-5/5A (1) The power is automatically cut off. (2) Turn the power on again manually. For DSC-5R Turn the power off and on again manually. 2. The default display appears. Watch
B1-10
DSC-5
EEROM clear The PROG menu (returns to default settings) and clears self-ID code, etc. You must do setup of system !! Refer to section “2.2 settings list”. 1. When select to EEROM, press the [ENT] key; Note) If you want to print out the contents of the EEROM, place the cursor on the “EEROM” position and press the [0]: print key. For DSC-5/5A (1) After about 15 second the power is automatically cut off. (2) Turn the power on manually. For DSC-5R (1) After about 15 seconds the indication of “Turn off the power” appears on the screen. (2) Turn the power off and on manually. 2. The screen should look something like this: Self-ID ? Group ID:
Enter self-ID and group-ID codes. [ENT] *Ready for filing* S:
G:
[ENT] Test
Note) Item RAM 1 RAM 2 EEROM (RAM & EEROM)
Purpose Clears work area only in the S-RAMs. Clears all contents of the S-RAMs (incl. Transmitted and received messages, and file prepared in the MES menu.) Clears all contents of the S-RAMs and contents of the PROG menu (returns to default settings) and clears self-ID code, etc.
B1-11
DSC-5
6. DSC Frequency table
B1-12
DSC-5
7. Menu tree
B1-13
DSC-5
B1-14
DSC-5
B1-15
DSC-5
Clearing Manual POS.: Enter to 9999 on UTC.
Clearing SCAN Freq.: Enter to 99999.9 on Rx Freq.
B1-16
DSC-5
8. Power and Frequency measurement
of MF/HF Radiotelephone MF/HF DSC signal is not transmitted by pressing a PTT switch, because of its emission mode of F1B (J2B). Tone signals (1700Hz + 85Hz) must be input to the radiotelephone. To measure the output power of DSC signal, follow the below. The radiotelephone must be set to the frequency to measured and to F1B (J2B/TLX). The MF/HF radiotelephone TX key line and inputting tone signal is controlled by the DSC-5/5A. The DSC-5/5A muse be set the Ignore ID ON. Refer to section “2.1 Changing System settings”. Ignore ID ON TEST
Press [SELECT] key. Function < > CALL
RCV
XMIT
PROG
Select "PROG", press [ENT] key. Program < > TIME
COMM
SYST
TEST
Select "TEST", press [ENT] key. Self test MO TO RR RL LL MC K D P
Select "TO", press [ENT] key. MARK tone:1700Hz-85Hz SPACE tone:1700Hz+85Hz DOT:1700Hz+85Hz
Tone test < > MARK SPACE DOT T1 T2
Don’t select T1 and T2 !!
Select "MARK or Space", press [TEST] key. For example, select "Space". Tone test < Space tone > Now doing
Outputting tone signal Press [CANCEL] key several times. Return to "self test" display.
Self - test MO TO RR RL LL MC K D P
Select "MC", press [ENT] key. Manual cont out < > IN OUT
Select "OUT", press [ENT] key. Manual cont out < > ALM DIS VK VM HK HM HH
Select "HK", press [TEST] key. Manual cont out < HF Key >
Tx ON
ON
(Measurment: power and frequency)
Fo+85Hz Press [TEST] key. Manual cont out < HF Key >
Tx OFF
OFF
Press [CANCEL] key several times. TEST
B1-17
DSC-5
9. Power and Frequency measurement of VHF Radiotelephone The VHF CH 70 is not transmitted by pressing a PTT switch. To measure the output power of VHF CH 70, follow the below. The radiotelephone must be set to CH 70. The VHF radiotelephone TX key line is controlled by the DSC-5/5V. The DSC-5/5A muse be set the Ignore ID ON. Refer to section “2.1 Changing System settings”. Ignore ID ON TEST
Press [SELECT] key. Function < > CALL
RCV
XMIT
PROG
Select "PROG", press [ENT] key. Program < >
or
TIME
COMM
SYST
TEST
Select "TEST", press [ENT] key. Self test MO TO RR RL LL MC K D P
Select "MC", press [ENT] key.
Select "TO", press [ENT] key. MARK tone:1700Hz-400Hz SPACE tone:1700Hz+400Hz DOT:1700Hz+400Hz
Tone test < > MARK SPACE DOT T1 T2
Don’t select T1 and T2 !!
Select "MARK or Space", press [TEST] key. For example, select "Space". Tone test < Space tone > Now doing
Outputting tone signal Press [CANCEL] key several times. Return to "self test" display.
Self - test MO TO RR RL LL MC K D P
Select "MC", press [ENT] key. Manual cont out < > IN OUT
Select "OUT", press [ENT] key. Manual cont out < > ALM DIS VK VM HK HM HH
Select "VK", press [TEST] key. Manual cont out < VK Key >
Tx ON
ON
(Measurment: power and frequency)
Press [TEST] key. Manual cont out < VK Key >
Tx OFF
OFF
Press [CANCEL] key several times. TEST
B1-18
156.525MHz (+10ppm)
Section B2. DSC-6/6A 1. Connector on Rear Panel Connect equipment to the DSC-6/6A as shown in the figure which follows.
2. Typical Configurations
(Type-1)
EX 1) DSC-6 + AA-50 + DP-5/6 + FS-5000 CIF/NMEA
MF/HF Rx
DSC
DSC-6
MF/HF TR
REM1-3
FS-5000
AA-50
REM3-1
NBDP
REM-B
REM-A
DP-5/6
EX 2) DSC-6 + AA-50 + DP-5/6 + FS-1562 CIF/NMEA
MF/HF Rx
DSC
DSC-6
MF/HF TR
REM
DB
AA-50 REM
NBDP
REM-B
REM-A
DP-5/6
B2-1
REM
REM
FS-1562
DSC-6
Installation Type
Not use
Note) Key-lock command :priority command
Note) RC-1500 and RC-2000-3F: Type-1 (FS-1562 + AA-50 + DSC-6 + DP-5/6) RC-5000 and RC-8000: Type-1 (FS-5000/8000 + AA-50 + DSC-6 + DP-5/6)
B2-2
DSC-6
3. System settings 3.1 Initial settings At power on, the display shown below appears. Enter own ship’s ID (MMSI), data format of navigator (NMEA or CIF), DMC-5 connection, DP-5/6 connection, installation type, Tx timing and AF line output level as below. Protection OFF Refer to section “3.2 Changing system settings”.
See page B2-2.
B2-3
DSC-6
3.2 Changing System settings The set up menu appears by pressing the [SELECT] key at the normal display. Watch
[SELECT] Set up menu <
>
Set up menu
TIME 1 2 3 4 6 7 9 0 ALM
Note) To release protection for “9:system” menu. Watch
[SELECT]
[9]
System < > V P ID ---Select "P" and press [ENT] * System protected *
Enter cypher code; 652111
Protection < > ON OFF
Select "OFF" and press [ENT]. System < > V P ID ---Now you may reenter the following * Format of navigator * Installation type * TX timming * DMC-5 connection * AF line out level * DP-5/6 connection
The registered MMSI number is reading only. If you want to change of MMSI number, refer to section "6. Changing ID number". After changing the settings, set the "Protection" menu to "ON" for normal operation.
Important !!
TEST
[SELECT]
[9]
[>]
[ENT]
Protection < > ON OFF Select "ON" and press [ENT]. Press [CANCEL] several times. Watch
Returns to normal display.
B2-4
DSC-6
4. System settings list MF/HF Rx
NMEA
NMEA data
DSC
DSC-6 DMC
MF/HF TR
FS-5000 FS-8000 REM3-1
NBDP
REM-B
DMC-5
REM1-3
AA-50
or
To AA-50
FS-1562
DB
To DP-5/6
REM-A
DP-5/6
Installation type; Type-1
NMEA
NMEA data
Note) NMEA –0183 data sentence receiving by DSC-6: GLL, RMA, RMC
The default settings are shown in a screened cell of setting item. Settings list Set up menu TIME 1
Position
2
Comply status
3
Self test
Menu-1 Menu-2 Mon – day –year -UTC L/L & UTC(Auto/Manual)
Setting Date & UTC —
To cancel the manually entered data, enter 9999 for the UTC.
Able
Proposal from other station is acceptable or not.
—
See S/M
Auto
Automatic printing
Quick
PP-510/500 is connected
Able Unable
Auto/Manual 4
Print out
Type (Printer type)
NOR || MOD Auto Manual Quick Slow
Print out to EEROM content
EEROM Key click
6
Sound Monitor
Note
ON OFF OFF 1.AF OUT 2.AF IN 3.NMEA Tx 4.NMEA Rx 5.DMC Tx 6.DMC Rx
ON
OFF, 1, or 2
For check For check Not use For check For check For check
Message Enter to Group ID
Address 7
File
Tel No. Work-F DSC-F
B2-5
0 MID X5 - X9
DSC-6
Set up menu
Menu-1 V (ROM Version)
Menu-2
Setting
P (Protection)
ID (MMSI)
Own ID
NMEA N/C (NMEA/CIF) System
9
(Protected: Refer to section 3.2 “Changing system settings”.)
DMC (DMC ON/OFF) DP (NBDP ON/OFF)
CIF ON OFF ON OFF
RT (Type 1/2/3) (Refer to page DSC6-2)
K (Tx kye timing)
0
Scan Freq.
ALM
L (Line out level) F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 ON/OFF Type (DIS and URG)
ON or OFF ON or OFF
1
1
2
2
3 OFF Auto 0.5 sec || 15 sec 0dBm
ON OFF 1-9
B2-6
NMEA or CIF
Note DSC & MODEM Pass word : 652111 To clear contents of EE-ROM. (NMI SW ON) Refer to section “6. Changing ID number”. Refer to section “5. Jumper setting”. (CONT PCB:J2) ON:DMC is connected OFF:DMC is not connect ON:NBDP is connected OFF:NBDP is not connected
Type-1:RT and DSC is connected Type-2:RT, RCV and DSC is connected Not use
Auto
FURUNO SSB
0dBm 2189.5/2177.0 4208.0/4219.5 6312.5/6331.0 8415.0/8436.5 12577.5/12657.0 16805.0/16903.0
FURUNO SSB
ON 1
Recommend to International Freq. (To cancel scan frequency, set the RX frequency as 99999.9.)
DSC-6
5. Jumper setting
(Receiver board and CONTROL board)
Note that NMEA/CIF setting in system menu must also be changed. Refer to section “4. System settings list”.
B2-7
DSC-6
6. Changing ID (MMSI) number
(Ver-1.05 and after)
Refer to section “7. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM”. Procedures 1. Press the NMI switch S1 on the CONTROL board with the unit turned on.
2. Since the power is automatically cut off, turn the power on. 3. The screen should look something like this: Clear NO
RAM1
RAM2
EEROM
4. Select “EEROM” and press the [ENT] key to clear data on the EEROM. 5. Since the power is automatically cut off, turn the power on again. The initial setting display appears. (Refer to section “3.1 Initial settings”) TEST
6. Enter own ship’s ID (MMSI), data format of navigator (NMEA or CIF), DMC-5 connection, DP-5/6 connection, Installation type, Tx timing and AF line output level.
B2-8
DSC-6
7. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM After replacing the ROM on the CONTROL board or if the unit is not working properly, be sure to press the NMI switch on the CONTROL board after turning on the unit, to clear contents of S-RAMs.
Procedures 1. Press the NMI switch S1 on the CONTROL board with the unit turned on. 2. Since the power is automatically cut off, turn the power on. 3. The screen should look something like this: Clear NO
RAM1
RAM2
EEROM
4. Clear to RAM 1, RAM 2 or EEROM. RAM 1 or RAM 2 clear When Select to RAM 1 or RAM 2, press the [ENT] key; The power is automatically cut off. Turn the power on again manually.
B2-9
DSC-6
EEROM clear When select to EEROM, press the [ENT] key; After about 15 second the power is automatically cut off. Turn the power on again manually. The initial setting display appears. TEST
(Refer to section “3.1 Initial settings”) Note) Before clearing EEROM, print out the contents of EEROM by pressing the [4] key.
Contents of S-RAM and EEROM Item RAM 1 RAM 2
EEROM
Purpose Clears work area only in the S-RAMs. Clears all contents of the S-RAMs (incl. transmitted and received messages, and prepared in messages in FILE menu: [SELECT] [7]) Clears contents of EEROM. *Settings of [SELECT] and [ALARM STOP] menu. *Scan programmed frequencies of [SELECT] [0] menu. *Distress massage *AD/Tel No./Work-F/DSC-F data of [SELECT] [7] in File menu *System setting of [SELECT] [9] menu. MMSI, data format of navigator (NMEA or CIF), DMC-5 connection, DP-5/6 connection, installation type, Tx timing and AF line output level.
B2-10
DSC-6
8. Self test Pressing the [3] key at normal display, automatically starts the daily test and displays the results. The test checks the MODEM, Remote line and the connection between DSC and MF/HF RT, NBDP in MIF command.
B2-11
DSC-6
9. DSC Frequency table
B2-12
DSC-6
10. Menu list
Clearing Manual POS.: Enter to 9999 on UTC.
B2-13
DSC-6
Enter to Group ID.
Clearing SCAN Freq.: Enter to 99999.9 on Rx Freq.
B2-14
DSC-6
11. Power and Frequency measurement of MF/HF Radiotelephone MF/HF DSC signal is not transmitted by pressing a PTT switch, because of its emission mode of F1B (J2B). Tone signals (1700Hz + 85Hz) must be input to the radiotelephone. To measure the output power of DSC signal, follow the below. The radiotelephone must be set to the frequency to measured and to F1B (J2B/TLX). The MF/HF radiotelephone TX key line and inputting tone signal is controlled by the DSC-6/6A.The DSC-6/6A muse be set the protection OFF. Refer to section “3.2 Changing System settings”. Protection OFF TEST
Press [SELECT], [
] key.
T/A test < tone /signal > TONE MANUAL-CONT DIS-FREQ
Select "TONE", press [ENT] key. Tone test < > MARK SPACE DOT T1 T2
MARK tone:1700Hz-85Hz SPACE tone:1700Hz+85Hz DOT:1700Hz+85Hz
Don’t select T1 and T2 !!
Select "MARK or Space", press [ENT] key. For example, select "Space". Tone test < Space tone > Now doing
Outputting tone signal Press [CANCEL] key twice.
T/A test < tone /signal > TONE MANUAL-CONT DIS-FREQ
Select "MANUAL-CONT", press [ENT] key. Manual cont out < > IN OUT
Select "OUT", press [ENT] key. Manual cont out < > ALM
DIS
HK
HM
HH
Select "HK", press [ENT] key. Manual cont out < HF Key > OFF
Press [ENT] key. Manual cont out < HF Key > ON
Tx ON
(Measurment: power and frequency)
Press [ENT] key again. Manual cont out < HF Key > OFF
Press [CANCEL] key several times.
TEST
B2-15
Fo+85Hz
Section B3. DSC-8V/8VP
1. Connection
DMC-5
DMC-5
A
A B
CIF/NMEA
REM-1
DSC-8V
B
CIF/NMEA
FM-8000 VHF RT
Printer
21.6 - 31.2V
PP -510
or
100/220 VAC
VHF RT Printer
PP -510
or
PP-500
POWER
POWER
24 VDC
DSC-8V System
DC
13.5V
10.8 - 40.0V
PP-500
POWER 24 VDC
DC
DC
REM-1
FM-7000
DSC-8VP
100/220 VAC
POWER
DSC-8VP System
The difference between the DSC-8V and DSC-8VP is asbelow. DSC-8V No power supply circuit. Power is supplied from VHF radiotelephone FM-8000. (When the FM-8000 is turned on, the power (15VDC) is supplied to the DSC-8V.) DSC-8VP
Built-in Power board. The DSC-8VP operates from 10.8 to 40.0VDC.
B3-1
DSC-8V/8VP
2. Changing system settings The set up menu appears by pressing the [SELECT] key at the normal display. Watch
[SELECT] Set up menu <
>
Set up menu
TIME 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 ALM
Note) To release the protection for 9:system and 8:RECEIVER menu, follow the steps below.. Watch
[SELECT]
[9]
System < > V P ID ---Select "P" and press [ENT] * System protected *
Enter cypher code; 652111 Protection < > ON OFF Select "OFF" and press [ENT]. System < > V P ID ---Now you may reenter the following * AF line out level * MMSI * Format of navigator * CH70 WR selection * DMC-5 connection
After changing the settings, set the "Protection" menu to "ON". TEST
Important !! [SELECT]
[9]
[>]
[ENT]
Protection < > ON OFF Select "ON" and press [ENT]. Press [CANCEL] several times. Watch
B3-2
DSC-8V/8VP
3. System settings list The default settings are shown in a screened cell of setting Item. Settings list Set up menu TIME 1
Position
2
Comply status
3
Self test
Menu-1
Menu-2
Mon – day –year -UTC
Setting Date & UTC
L/L & UTC(Auto/Manual)
—
To cancel the manually entered data, enter 9999 for the time.
Able
Proposal from other station Is acceptable or no.
—
See S/M.
Able NOR Unable
||
MOD Auto Manual Quick Slow
Auto/Manual 4
Print out
Type
Auto Quick
ON OFF OFF 1.AF OUT 2.AF IN 3.NMEA Tx 4.NMEA Rx 5.DMC Tx 6.DMC Rx
Key click
Sound Monitor
7
File
8
RECEIVER (Protected: Refer to section2. Changing system settings)
9
System (Protected: Refer to section2. Changing system settings) ALM
PP-510/500 is connected Print out to EEROM content
EEROM
6
Note
ON
For check OFF or 1
Message Address Tel No.
Group ID
CH70
No.1 VHF :CH70
VHF
No.2VHF :VHF
V (ROM Version) P (Protection) ID (MMSI)
(3: Not use)
DSC & MODEM Pass word : 652111 Own ID
N/C (NMEA/CIF) DMC (DMC ON/OFF) L (Line out level) ON/OFF Type (DIS and URG)
B3-3
NMEA CIF ON OFF 0dBm ON OFF 0-1 - 9
NMEA or CIF ON OFF 0dBm ON 1
Jumper setting. (CONT PCB:J2) ON:DMC is connected OFF:DMC is not connect
DSC-8V/8VP
4. Jumper wire setting Jumper JP-2 on the CONTROL board selects receiving data format, NMEA or CIF.
CONTROL Board NMEA/CIF setting is also required through System menu. Refer to section “3. System setting list”.
B3-4
DSC-8V/8VP
5. Clearing contents of S-RAM and EEROM After replacing the ROM on the CONTROL board or if the unit is not working properly, be sure to press the NMI switch on the CONTROL board after turning on the unit, to clear contents of S-RAMs.
Procedures 1. Press the NMI switch S1 on the CONTROL board with the unit turned on. 2. For DSC-8VP a, The power is automatically cut off. b, Turn the power on manually. For DSC-8V Since the indication of “Turn off the power” appears on the screen, turn the power of FM-8000 off and on manually. 3. The screen should look something like this: Clear NO
RAM1
RAM2
EEROM
B3-5
DSC-8V/8VP
4. Clear to RAM 1, RAM 2 or EEROM. RAM 1 or RAM 2 clear When Select to RAM 1 or RAM 2, press the [ENT] key; For DSC-8VP a, The power is automatically cut off. b, Turn the power on again manually. For DSC-8V Turn the power off and on again manually. The normal display appears. Watch VHF CH70
EEROM clear When select to EEROM, press the [ENT] key; After about 15 second , For DSC-8VP a, The power is automatically cut off. b, Turn the power on again manually. For DSC-8V Turn the power off and on again manually. The initial setting display appears. TEST
(Refer to section “3. System settings list”) Note) Before clearing EEROM, print out the contents of EEROM by pressing the [4] key.
Contents of S-RAM and EEROM Item RAM 1 RAM 2 EEROM
Purpose Clears work area only in the S-RAMs. Clears all contents of the S-RAMs (incl. transmitted and received messages, and prepared in messages/address/Tel No in FILE menu: [SELECT] [7]) Clears contents of EEROM. (Own ship’s ID number, etc)
B3-6
DSC-8V/8VP
6. Self test Pressing the [3] key at normal display automatically starts the daily test and displays the results.
B3-7
DSC-8V/8VP
7. Menu List: [SELECT]
Clearing Manual POS.: Enter to 9999 on UTC.
B3-8
DSC-8V/8VP
Enter to Group ID.
B3-9
DSC-8V/8VP
8. Power and Frequency measurement of
VHF Radiotelephone The VHF CH 70 is not transmitted by pressing a PTT switch. To measure the output power of VHF CH 70, follow the below. The radiotelephone must be set to CH 70. The VHF radiotelephone TX key line is controlled by the DSC-8V/8VP. The DSC-8V/8VP muse be set the protection OFF. Refer to section “2. Changing System settings”. Protection OFF TEST
Tx key ON.
Press [SELECT], [
] key.
INSPECTION TEST < > TONE MANUAL-CONT DIS-CH
Select "TONE", press [ENT] key. Tone test < > MARK SPACE DOT T1 T2
MARK tone:1700Hz-400Hz SPACE tone:1700Hz+400Hz DOT:1700Hz+400Hz
Don't select T1 and T !!
Select "MARK or Space", press [ENT] key. For example, select "Space". Tone test < Space tone > Now doing
Outputting tone signal Press [CANCEL] key twice.
INSPECTION TEST < > TONE MANUAL-CONT DIS-CH
Select "MANUAL-CONT", press [ENT] key. Manual cont out < > IN OUT
Select "OUT", press [ENT] key. Manual cont out < > VK
Select "VK", press [ENT] key. Manual cont out < VHF- Key > OFF
Press [ENT] key. Manual cont out < VHF- Key > ON
Tx ON
(Measurment: power and frequency)
Press [ENT] key again. Manual cont out < VHF- Key > OFF
Press [CANCEL] key several times.
TEST
B3-10
156.525MHz (+10ppm)
Section B4. DSC-60
FAX-5 + 2.6m Whip Antenna
FAX-5 + 2.6m Whip Antenna
1. Connection
RT Antenna
Option
Option
Option
ANT
Antenna Coupler
D.ANT Option
Option Option
DMC Terminal (DMC-5)
DMC
MF/HF RT (FS-xxxx)
RX PCB (05P0703)
OR
FS-75 FS-2550 FS-1562 FS-2500 FS-5000 FS-8000
Distress Button (IC-302) RT Option
Incomming Indicator (IC-303) Option
Option
RCV BZ
IEC-61162 (NMEA)
Nav device
Distributor (DB-120/500)
DSC/WATCH RECEIVER (DSC-60)
NBDP
Option DSC
RT
NBDP (DP-6)
IEC-61162 (NMEA)
Term
Option Option
COM1
NBDP Terminal (IB or P/C)
Speaker Printer Handset
Printer
Option
Printer SEL
24V DC DC24V Battery 24V 100/110/200/220V AC
Option
AC/DC Power Supply (PR-300)
Option
Printer (PP-510)
Note) With the optional DSC general watch keeping receiver board, communication by radiotelephone and NBDP is enabled by the MF/HF radiotelephone while watching DSC distress, safety and general frequencies. If DSC general watch keeping receiver board is not installed, DSC general frequency is watched by the MF/HF radiotelephone, and it cannot be watched during communication by radiotelephone and NBDP.
B4-1
DSC60
2. System setup list 2.1 Setup menu: [#/SETUP] The default settings are shown in a screened cell of each setting item. The recommended “settings” listed in the table are presumed to be the standard settings. Set them according to user’s requests. In addition to these settings, required are DIP switch settings on the CONTROL/MODEM board. System setup menu list Setup menu
Item RCVD CALL OLD POSITION
ALARM
POSITION OLDER
EXT ALARM
AUTO ACK
POSITION
PRINT
SCAN FREQ.
COMPLY TYPE POSITION CALL POLLING CALL INPUT TYPE XMTD CALL RCVD CALL DAILY TEST
ROUTINE
setting ON OFF ON OFF 4H 3H 2H 1H 0.5H DIS/URG ROUTINE ALL OFF ABLE UNABLE ON OFF ON OFF AUTO MANUAL MANUAL AUTO MANUAL AUTO MANUAL AUTO F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
Note
ON ON
4H
In the rule, means to activate an alarm when the position information is over 4H old.
DIS/URG
IC-303
ABLE ON ON AUTO
GGA > RMC > RMA > GLL > ZDA
MANUAL AUTO
When printer is connected, set to AUTO.
MANUAL 2M INTL 4M INTL 6M INTL 8M INTL 12M INTL 16M INTL
B4-2
Default settings : OFF
DSC60 Setup menu
Item
setting
2M
SCAN FREQ.
DISTRESS
KEY CLICK VOLUME
HANDSET ORDINARY ALARM DISTRESS ALARM MMSI
SYSTEM (PROTECTED)
Pass word: 652111
Note)
WATCH RCVR LINE OUT LEVEL TX KEY TIMING RT PORT REMOTE STATION NBDP PORT
Note
FIXED ON 4M OFF ON 6M OFF 8M FIXED ON 12M OFF ON 16M OFF ON OFF 32
FIXED
32
ADJ.:0-63
8
8
ADJ.:0-63
8
8
ADJ.:8-63
X1–X9 (FIXED) MF/HF MF
ON ON FIXED ON
Note) Depend on “WACTH RCVR” setting in Setup menu-SYSTEM.
ON ON
FIXED MF/HF type MF type
0dBm
0dBm
AUTO
AUTO
MIF IEC OFF ON OFF OFF ON
*MF/HF type: watch keeping 2, 8MHz and other one Freq. *MF type: Fixed on 2MHz.
With MNI switch set to on, and enter the password (652111). Depend on specification. (Sea area A3:Set to MF/HF type.)
MIF
When FS-xxxx connected, set to MIF.
ON or OFF
Depend on specification
ON or OFF
When DP-6 connected, set to ON.
CH DET S LEVEL
OFF – 255 (100)
100
REGULATION
INTL RUSSIA
INTL
DIST
Date & UTC
--
Used for CH busy check. (Calling category: routine and business used) Russian vessel: setting to “RUSSINA” Date and UTC indication of transmitted Distress alert
Note) “SYSTEM” menu is protected. To cancel the protection; 1. While displaying DSC normal display, press [SETUP]. The setup menu appears. 2. Select “SYSTEM” by using an arrow key. 3.Press [ENT] key. 4. Confirm that “PROTECTION”: ON is displayed on the bottom line. Type 652111. 5. Then, “PROTECTION” ON is changed to “PROTECTION” OFF, which enables setting of each item. Now you can modify each item in the system setup menu.
B4-3
Main Ver:2.09
Main Ver:2.09 Main Ver:2.09
DSC60
2.2 System menu description 1. MMSI The registered MMSI Number is reading only, that is, can not be changed in this menu. 2. WATCH RCVR (Default setting: MF/HF) This item sets the frequencies of DSC watch keeping receiver. - MF/HF : Up to 6 scan frequencies can be selected for the reception of MF/HF DSC messages. - MF : The receiver frequency is fixed to 2187.5 kHz. 3. LINE OUT LEVEL (Default setting: 0dBm) Select default setting “0 dBm”, if FS-75/1562 or FS-5000 series is connected. This item adjusts the output level from DSC, LINE OUT. The output level can be set at every 1.5 dBm step with the left and right arrow keys. The adjusting range is from –12 to +12 dBm. 4. TX-KEY TIMING (Default setting: AUTO) This item sets the transmission timing between DSC and MF/HF radiotelephone for DSC call. FS-75/1562 or FS-5000 series is connected, set this timing at the default setting “AUTO”. The timing can be set at AUTO, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, or 15 seconds. For example, if the timing is set at 5 seconds, transmitting message is output to the LINE OUT line 5 seconds after [CALL] key has been pressed. If AUTO is selected, LINE OUT signal is output after TUNE OK signal has come back from the radiotelephone. 5. RT-PORT (Default setting: MIF) This item sets the protocol to control the radiotelephone. The setting is made at MIF, IEC, or OFF. If FS-75/1562 or FS-5000 series is connected, set this item at the default setting “MIF”. - MIF: Furuno radiotelephone interface - IEC: IEC-61162-1 - OFF: Radio remote control is turned OFF. Note) Related settings Select RS-232C, RS-422, or Current Loop by DIP switches S4 and S5 on CONTROL/MODEM board. The pin assignment of the RT connector for MIF data is different from those for IEC data. When FS-1562 or FS-5000 series is connected, set DIP switch as below. - S4-#1 and #2: ON - S4-#3 and #4: OFF 6. REMOTE STATION (Default setting: OFF) Main Ver 2.09 and after This setting determines whether DSC-60 is operated as remote station or not. This item is set at ON or OFF. If it is set at OFF, the remote function can not be switched by [1/RT/2182] key.
B4-4
DSC60
7. NBDP PORT (Default setting: OFF) If FS-75/1562 or FS-5000 series is connected to Furuno NBDP, DP-5/6, set this item at ON. Then, the control of the NBDP can be made by the MIF protocol. Whereas MAIN and MODEM CPU programs are updated from IB-581 or PC, NBDP Port setting is disregarded. At this time, however, set DIP switch S3-1 and 2 at ON, S3-3 and 4 at OFF. Note) Related settings Select RS-232C, RS-422, or Current Loop by DIP switches S3 and S5 on CONTROL/MODEM board. The pin assignment of NBDP connector for MIF data is different from those for IEC data. When DP-6 or DP-5 is connected, set DIP switch as below. - S3-#1 and #2: ON - S3-#3 and #4: OFF
8. CH DET S LEVEL (Default setting: 100) Main Ver 2.09 and after Before transmitting Routine and Business message, the system checks whether the frequency to be transmitted is already in use or not. If it is used, the transmission is commenced after the channel is not used. The maximum scale of the S-meter corresponds to 255. To deactivate this function, select OFF. 9. REGULATION (Default setting: INTL) Main Ver 2.09 and after In Russian version; - Alarm is released continuously after transmitting distress alert. - The [CANCEL] key can be used during the transmission of distress alert. The transmission sequence is stopped at the end of the fifth transmission. - If another distress alert or urgent message is received after pressing the [CALL] key for distress relay or distress acknowledgement, the received message has priority while the function triggered by the [CALL] key is cancelled. 10. DIST Date and time of the latest distress alert are displayed. The data is stored onto the EEROM. Main Ver 2.01: Date and time in ZDA is used. If ZDA is not available, XXXX is shown. Main Ver 2.09: ZDA or RMC is used. If ZDA or RMC are not input, XXXX is shown.
B4-5
DSC60
3. Setting DIP Switches 3.1 Outline of the settings on CONTROL/MODEM board For data communication between the DSC and connected equipment, such as RT, NBDP, DMC and navaids, the DIP switches on CONTROL/MODEM board are setup to select data format. The outline of the settings is shown in the Table and Figures below.
422
S5
ON
1 2 3 4
S6
C.LOOP
J3
J8
ON
1 2 3 4
J9
422
J7
S7
J4
ON
S5 U5
EEPROM J6
S1 NMI SW
U11
S6 S7 S4 S3 S2 S8 J5
(RT) (NBDP) (DMC)
J1
S6 S7 S8
1 2 3 4
232
S8
ON
05P0702
1 2 3 4
S4 S3
S2
(RT) (NBDP) (DMC)
CALL
ON
1 2 3 4
232 422
Default settings) - S2-#1 and #2 : - S2-#3 and #4 :
OFF ON
- S3-#1 and #2 : - S3-#3 and #4 :
- S4-#1 and #2 : - S4-#3 and #4 :
ON OFF
- S5, S6, S7, S8 : All OFF
B4-6
ON OFF
DSC60
3.2 Setting for the connection with FS-75/1562/5000 and DP-6 TX/RX control data exchange between Furuno radio units is made normally by MIF protocol through the RS-232C connections with factory-default setting.
[REM-1/2/3]
[RT] #2-SD #3-RD
DSC-60 [NBDP]
[REM]
[RT] DB-120
#2-SD #3-RD
[REM-B]
#2-SD #3-RD
[REM-A]
DSC-60
FS-5000C [REM-1/2/3]
[NBDP]
DP-6
#2-SD #3-RD
Connection with FS-5000 and DP-6
[REM-B]
[REM-A]
REM-A PCB
FS-75/1562
DP-6
Connection with FS-75/1562 and DP-6
The DIP switches on CONTROL/MODEM board of DSC-60 are set as follows: RT: S4 (Selection of data format for the communication with RT) - S4-1 and 2 : ON (RS-232C) - S4-3 and 4 : OFF (RS-232C) NBDP: S3 (Selection of data format for the communication with NBDP) - S3-1 and 2 : ON (RS-232C) - S3-3 and 4 : OFF (RS-232C)
Note) Related settings Pressing [#/SETUP] key reveals “Setup menu” screen. Select SYSTEM, and set RT PORT and NBDP PORT. - RT PORT ->>> MIF - NBDP PORT ->>> ON Furthermore, priority setting must be made on FS-75/1562:Ver.07 and after. Not necessary on FS-5000. FS-75/1562 Set to setting No.9928:1 Priority 1 2 3 4 5 6
FS-75/1562 0: Main unit takes priority. DSC Distress alert 2182kHz (Main unit) DSC other than distress Remote TEL (DSC) NBDP Main unit
Setting of 9928 1: Remote control takes priority. DSC Distress alert DSC other than distress Remote TEL (DSC) NBDP 2182kHz (Main unit) Main unit
B4-7
DSC60
3.3 Setting for the connection with navigational aids The input data from navigation aids is selected in format, IEC: RS-422 or Current Loop, using the DIP switches on CONTROL/MODEM board of DSC-60. Set S5-#4 to ON for the reception of IEC data from GPS, such as GP-500M2 and GP-80. S5
422 ON
1 2 3 4
C.LOOP
1.NBDP 2.RT 3.DMC 4.NMEA
IEC:RS-422 S5-4: ON C.Loop S5-4: OFF
Note) Related settings “AUTO” or “MANUAL” is selectable for POSITION setting in “System setup” menu. If AUTO is selected, the DSC-60 accepts the sentences of GGA, RMC, RMA, GLL, and ZDA. The data that DSC uses are Position data and Time data (automatically combined with transmitting messages). - GGA : Global positioning system fix data - RMC : Recommended minimum specific GPS/TRANSIT data - RMA : Recommended minimum specific LORAN-C data - GLL : Geographic position, latitude/longitude - ZDA : Time and date The ZDA is used for automatically printing-out of sending/receiving messages and the selftest result, and date and time in the communication log.
B4-8
DSC60
3.4 Setting for the connection with DMC, IC-302 and PC DMC-5, IC-302, and PC can be connected to DMC port. Set the DIP switches on CONTROL/MODEM board as follows: *Default settings: - S5, S6, S7, S8 : All OFF 1. Connecting PC (for use in future) To connect PC, set the DIP switches to RS-232C. - S2-#1 and #2 : ON (RS-232C, TX/RX data) - S2-#3 and #4 : OFF - S5-#3 : OFF - S6-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : OFF - S7-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : ON (PC) - S8-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : OFF 2. Connecting DMC-5 To connect DMC-5, set the DIP switches to RS-422. - S2-#1 and #2 : OFF - S2-#3 and #4 : ON (RS-422, TX data) - S5-#3 : ON (C.Loop, RX data) - S6-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : ON - S7-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : OFF - S8-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : OFF 3. Connecting IC-302 To connect IC-302, set the DIP switches to Current Loop. - S8-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : ON - S7-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : OFF - S6-#1, #2, #3 and #4 : OFF
Pin assignment of DMC port J3 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6
DMC-5 TD-A TD-B RD-A RD-B NC F.GND
P/C SD GND RD GND NC F.GND
B4-9
IC-302 DMC-OUT-H DMC-OUT-C DMC-IN-H DMC-IN-C CTR F.GND
DSC60
4. Setting the receiver board A FAX-5+2.6m whip active antenna is usually used to receive DSC distress signal and DSC general signal. Set J3 on the RX board to ACTIVE to apply voltage to the antenna.
ANT
J2
J3 RX 05P0703
Ref.OSC
05P0703: DSC watch keeping receiver board and DSC general watch keeping receiver board (option).
B4-10
ACTIVE ACTIVE
455kHz FIL
DSC60
5. How to enter MMSI This information explains how to release the protector to enter MMSI in System Setup menu.
How to enter MMSI To enter MMSI (Maritime Mobile Service Identity number), follow steps below. 1. Turn on the unit, and press S1 (NMI SW) on the CONTROL/MODEM board. The EEROM clear display appears.
DSC-60 with top cover removed
2. Type 652111. (ENT key is unnecessary.) The display does not change. 3. Select MMSI CLEAR by pressing an arrow key, and press [ENT]. MMSI default number appears.
4. Enter the MMSI of own ship by using numeric keys. 5. Confirm that the number displayed on the screen is correct. 6. Press [ENT]. The message “PLEASE POWER DOWN” appears. 7. Turn off and on the unit.
B4-11
DSC60
6. Self test Pressing [3/TEST/DEF] key with DSC standby screen or Radiotelephone setting screen automatically starts the daily test, and the test results are displayed. Main CPU, MODEM, and RX boards can be checked, and the connection between MF/HF radiotelephone and NBDP made by Furuno can be checked by MIF commands. Procedures 1. Press [3/TEST/DEF] key with DSC standby screen or Radiotelephone setting screen. 2. The test automatically starts. The test can not be cancelled once if started. * DSC-60 daily test * JAN - 10 - 2000 - 15:26 MAIN CPU MODEM RCVR1 RCVR2 REMOTE RT REMOTE DP
: : : : : :
3. It takes 30 to 40 seconds to complete the test. Then, the distress alarm LED flashes, and the buzzer and external speaker sounds for 2 seconds. 4. The test results are displayed. If a printer is connected, pressing [8/PRINT/TUV] key can print out the results. * DSC-60 DAILY TEST * JAN - 10 - 2000 - 15:26 MMSI : 123456789 MAIN CPU : OK VER.xx MODEM : OK VER.xx RCVR1 : OK RCVR2 : OK REMOTE RT : OK FS-1562 REMOTE DP : OK DP-6
* DSC-60 dialy test * JAN - 10 - 2000 - 15:26 MAIN CPU MODEM RCVR1 RCVR2 REMOTE RT REMOTE DP
: OK VER.xx : OK VER.xx : OK : OK : OK FS-1562 : OK DP-6
Note) The default setting of DAILY TEST in PRINT OUT submenu of “Setup menu” is set at “MANUAL”. Set it at “AUTO” to print out the test results automatically. The printed date and time is the data of NMEA data (ZDA) from the navaids.
To display the present program version number, press the [1 RT] key five times while pressing the [* FILE] key.
5. Pressing [CANCEL] key returns the screen to DSC standby screen.
B4-12
DSC60
7. Setup menu list
B4-13
DSC60
B4-14
DSC60
B4-15
DSC60
B4-16
DSC60
Main CPU Ver:2.09 and after. Set up
Menu 1
Menu 2 MMSI
LINE OUT LEVEL
Menu 3 X1--X9 MF/HF MF 0 dBm
Tx KEY TIMING
AUTO
WATCH RCVR
System
PROTECTION Note) PASS WORD:xxxxxxx
RT PORT REMOTE STATION NBDP PORT CH DET S LEVEL REGURATION DIST
MIF IEC OFF ON OFF OFF ON 100 INTL RUSSIAN Date & UTC
B4-17
Menu 4
-12 - +12 dBm 0.1, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15 sec
Setting: OFF – 255
Menu 5
Menu 6
DSC60
8. Power and Frequency measurement of MF/HF Radiotelephone MF/HF DSC signal is not transmitted by pressing a PTT switch, because of its emission mode of F1B (J2B). Tone signals (1700Hz + 85Hz) must be input to the radiotelephone. To measure the output power of DSC signal, follow the below. The radiotelephone must be set to the frequency to measured and to F1B (J2B/TLX). 1. Pressing [#/SETUP] key reveals “Setup menu” screen. Select TEST and press [ENT] key. Then, the following “Test function” screen appears. * * Setup menu * * ALARM AUTO ACK ERASE FILE MESSAGE POSITION PRINT OUT
SCAN FREQ USER CH VOLUME
* * Test function * * [ENT]
TONE BK REMOTE EXT ALARM EXT ALERT
TEST SYSTEM
AF PCB CONT PCB PANEL PCB RX PCB TA TEST
PROTECTION : ON
To execute the test function, cancel “PROTECTION”. Enter “652111” from the numeric keys. 2. Selecting TONE and pressing [ENT] key reveals a submenu. Choose MARK or SPACE on the submenu, and turn the signal “ON” by pressing [ENT] key. For example, choose “MARK”. MARK :OFF SPACE :OFF DOT :OFF
MARK:1700Hz – 85Hz SPACE:1700Hz + 85Hz DOT:1700Hz + 85Hz
* * Test function * * TONE BK REMOTE EXT ALARM EXT ALERT
AF PCB CONT PCB PANEL PCB RX PCB TA TEST
PROTECTION : OFF
3. Transmit power by turn ON the handset PTT switch of DSC-60, and measure the frequency and power. 4. To measure other frequencies, turn OFF the handset PTT switch and change the frequency of MF/HF radiotelephone. Repeat steps 3 and 4. 5. After the completion of the measurements, turn off power for DSC-60.
B4-18
DSC60
9. How to update system program 9.1 Over view The program disk supplied includes two programs: main program and modem program. To update the system program, DIP switch #1 and #2 of S3 on the CONTROL/MODEM board must be set to ON position. Either of an IB-581 or a PC PC/AT compatible is connected as follows. Using IB-581 Any IB-581 can be used.
Using PC The PC is connected to the DSC-60 as below.
DSC-60 NBDP
DSC-60
COM-1
S3
NBDP
S3
IB-581
ON
RS-232C
PC
ON
KEY 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
(NBDP)
(NBDP)
Key board
Connection between DSC-60 and PC/IB-581
The connection is made with the following interconnection cable. The connector to the DSC-60 is a 25-pin D-SUB male, and to the IB-581 or PC a 9-pin D-SUB female.
D-SUB 9pin DCD RXD TXD DTR GND DSR RTS CTS RI
D-SUB 25pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
B4-19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
F.GND SD RD RTS CTS DSR S.GND NC S.GND NC
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
NC DTR TD-A TD-B RD-A RD-B NC
DSC60
9.2 Updating MAIN program with IB-581 1. Connect the IB-581 to the DSC-60. 2. Turn on the IB-581, but do not turned on the DSC-60. 3. Terminate the terminal program. When using IB-581 for DP-6, FELCOM 12/81, while press and holding down [Alt] and [Fn], press [F2]. For example, A:\DP10\TERMINAL appears on the DP-6 terminal. When using IB-581 for FELCOM 11, press [F1] and [8] in order. 4. Insert the program floppy disk in the slot. 5. Type B: and press [Enter]. The prompt B:\> appears. 6. Type “UPDSC” and press [Enter]. The following message appears. Program upload utility Version 6.21 Copyright(c) FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.1997,1998,1999 (T.K) uppg infile 1 infile 2 p1 p2 p4 p5 p1:Deletion waiting time. p2:Waiting time to write. p3:Password output interval. p4:ID number.(1,2...) p5:Poer number.(1,2...) Erase Wait:osec Wait:o Wait counter=100 Port no.=1 TARGET POWER ON. 7. Turn on the DSC-60. The indication on the DSC screen changes as below. The picture on the IB-581 runs. 8. Wait for about 5 minutes. 9. The DOS prompt appears after the message “Finish version up.” 10. Turn off the DSC-60, disconnect the IB-581 and turn on the DSC-60 again. 11. Press [3/TEST/DEF] to perform the selftest and confirm the program has been updated. *** Checking program Version, refer to section “6.Self test”. ***
B4-20
DSC60
9.3 Updating MODEM program with IB-581 1. Connect the IB-581 to the DSC-60. 2. Turn on the IB-581, but do not turned on the DSC-60. 3. Terminate the terminal program. When using IB-581 for DP-6, FELCOM 12/81, while press and holding down [Alt] and [Fn], press [F2]. For example, A:\DP10\TERMINAL appears on the DP-6 terminal. When using IB-581 for FELCOM 11, press [F1] and [8] in order. 4. Insert the program floppy disk in the slot. 5. Type B: and press [Enter]. The prompt B:\> appears. 6. Type “UPMODEM” and press [Enter]. The following message appears. Program upload utility Version 6.21 Copyright(c) FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.1997,1998,1999 (T.K) uppg infile 1 infile 2 p1 p2 p4 p5 p1:Deletion waiting time. p2:Waiting time to write. p3:Password output interval. p4:ID number.(1,2...) p5:Poer number.(1,2...) Erase Wait:osec Wait:o Wait counter=100 Port no.=1 TARGET POWER ON. 7. Turn on the DSC-60. The message “Now Loading” appears on the DSC screen. The picture on the IB-581 runs. 8. Wait for about 5 minutes. 9. The DOS prompt appears after the message “Finish version up.” 10. Turn off the DSC-60, disconnect the IB-581 and turn on the DSC-60 again. 11. Press [3/TEST/DEF] to perform the self test and confirm the program has been updated.
*** Checking program Version, refer to section “6.Self test”. ***
B4-21
Section C1. AA-50 1. Over view The AA-50 MF/HF DSC Watch Receiver receives distress and safety frequencies (max. 6), and are mainly fitted on the vessels which operate in ocean areas A3 and A4.
Receiving distress and safety calls
Receiving general calls
AA-50 Receiver
DSC-5 or DSC-6
Receiving
Transmitting
Relay
FS-xxxx K2, 3
Relay turns upward upon receiving distress and safety calls.
Note) SOLAS Chapter-4 Regulation 12 (watch) 1. Every ship, while at sea, shall maintain a continuous watch: .1 on VHF DSC channel 70, if the ship, in accordance with the requirements of regulation 7.1.2, is fitted with a VHF radio installation; .2 on the distress and safety DSC frequency 2,187.5kHz, if the ship, in accordance with the requirements of regulation 9.1.2 or 10.1.3, is fitted with an MF radio installation; .3 on the distress and safety DSC frequencies 2,187.5kHz and 8,414.5kHz and also on at least one of the distress and safety DSC frequencies 4,207.5kHz, 6,321kHz, 12,577kHz or 16,804.5kHz, appropriate to the time of day and geographical position of the ship, if the ship, in accordance with the requirements of regulation 10.2.2 or 11.1, is fitted with an MF/HF radio installation. This watch may be kept by means of a scanning receiver; .4 for satellite shore to ship distress alerts, if the ship, in accordance with the requirement of regulation 10.1.1, is fitted with an INMARSAT ship earth station.
C1-1
AA-50
2. Connection 2.6m Whip antenna FAX-5
ANT DSC-5 or DSC-6
MF-HF T/R
DSC RS-232C
RS-232C
AA-50
FS-xxxx
REM
MF/HF Rx
Connection ANT MF-HF T/R
The potentionmeter for adjustment of LINE OUTPUT LEVEL (+10dBm adjustable) is on the rear panel. It is pre-adjusted at the factory (0dBm output) for use with the DSC-5/6.
DSC
LINE LEVEL 0dBm
BREAKER 10.0V-40.0V 2A
Grounding Terminal
To Receiver or Radiotelephon :RV-xxxG/FS-xxxx
To DSC Terminal:DSC-5/6
AA-50 Rear Panel
3. Jumper setting When the Pre-AMP unit (FAX-5) is installed, the jumper block of J9 on the Receiver Board must be set to “ACTIVE” to supply about 9Vdc to the Pre-AMP unit.
2.6m Whip antenna FAX-5
Receiver Board J1 To Antenna
J9
Factory setting:Active Active
Note) ACTIVE Antenna : 2.6m Whip antenna + FAX-5
C1-2
AA-50
4. Self test 1. Tune on the power. (Scanning starts.) 2. Press the TEST switch. (“TEST” LED lights.) *If problem, the “frequency” LEDs light in order. 2187.5 4207.5 6312 16804.5 REMOTE (Note) Lighting Lighting Lighting Lighting Lighting *If error, Frequency indication LEDs blink. To restart scanning, press any key. (RCVR board or OSC board is suspected to be faulty) 3. The self test stops automatically and scanning restarts. (“TEST” LED goes off.) Note) The “REMOTE” LED blinks when the AA-50 and DSC-5 (DSC-6) do exchange data. Cause: DSC turned off, cable between AA-50 and DSC-5 (DSC-6) loosened or Disconnected, or wrong DSC system settings DSC-5: [Remote-E] setting ---“OFF” and “TERM”, DSC-6: [Type] setting ------ “OFF”. To restart scanning, press any key.
C1-3
DP-5 Section D1. DP-5
1. Connection PP-500 PP-510
Power
Printer
GLL, RMA, RMC, VTG DBT, MTW, VHW, TRF
NAV Device Printer
NMEA/CIF
REM
Key board
REM-A(RT)
MF/HF RT
Key board
* NBDP
DP-5
CONTROL
REM-B(DSC)
MF/HF DSC
24VDC
*
* When the radiotelephone (DSC) is connected to REM-A port, set to RT (DSC) on F6: terminal menu. * When the DSC (radiotelephone) is connected to REM-B port, set to DSC (RT) on F6: terminal menu.
FS-1562
REM
Distributor (05P0606)
REM-A
MF/HF TR
AA-50
MF/HF Rx DSC
DSC-5/6
NBDP REM-B
REM 1 or 2 or 3 REM-A
FS-5000 REM 2 or 3 or 1 MF/HF TR
AA-50
MF/HF Rx DSC
D1-1
DSC-5/6
NBDP REM-B
DP-5
DP-5
DP-5
2. Setting list Function F3:Operate
Item 6:Manual Reception
Default
Setting
AUTO
AUTO
1:Station Entry
Storing MMSI+CS+X
6:Answerback Code Entry
F5:Station
F6:Teminal
7:Group ID Entry (4/5 digit) 8:Group ID Entry (9 digit) 9:Select ID Entry (4/5 digit) 0:Select ID Entry (9 digit)
X1 –X5
To enter appropriate station at least one. Password: ANSWER CODE (Caps Lock)
Password: ID CODE (Caps Lock)
MMSI
RX MSG Save Active file Auto Send Signal Tracking Edit before sending ARQ Error count Communication time Dual font (Bold:Sending) Echo Sending Volume display Comm. Status display
OFF OFF OFF NO OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
OFF OFF ON YES or NO ON ON ON ON ON ON
*ARQ/FEC Center Freq *Shift Freq DIRC Center Freq Shift Freq Rate CW Mode Frq Rate Line Out Level (dBm)
1700 +85 1700 +85 60 1615 10 0
1700 +85 1700 +85 60 1615 10 0
*Remote A Mode *Rate (baud) *Start Bit *Date Bit *Stop Bit *Parity Bit *Delimiter MIF Tune Freeze
OFF 4800 1Bit 7Bit 2Bit Even CR OFF OFF
RT 4800 1Bit 7Bit 2Bit Even CR OFF OFF
OFF
ON or OFF
AGC
Note
Pass word:DP5(Caps Lock) Don’t change.
Pass word:DP5(Caps Lock) Don’t change. Note) RT is connected to REM-A port.
FS-1562:OFF FS-5000:ON or OFF
*: Password : [DP5] is needed for change of these setting.
D1-2
DP-5
Function
F6:Teminal
F8: System
Item
Default
Setting
*Remote B Mode *Rate (baud) *Start Bit *Date Bit *Stop Bit *Parity Bit *Delimiter MIF Tune Freeze AGC
OFF 4800 1Bit 7Bit 2Bit Even CR OFF OFF OFF
DSC 4800 1Bit 7Bit 2Bit Even CR OFF OFF OFF
CIF/NMEA Mode
CIF
CIF Rate (baud) Monitor Line In Level Line Out Level Beep Level CRT Economy Mode File Partial View *Slave Delay *BK Timing Pre tone *Post Tone *Mute Timing Pre BK *Post BK
Reception Alarm Time System Time & Date Printer Header File Name Time Footer Language Self Test Version No. Modem Version No.
Note
Pass word: DP5(Caps Lock) Don’t change. Note) DSC is connected to REM-B port.
4800 OFF 4 4 4 OFF OFF
CIF or NMEA CIF:4800 Line OUT 4 4 4 ON ON
Pass word: DP5(CAPS LOCK) Jumper setting: JP-2 on the CONTROL Board.
5 msec 10 msec 0 msec 0 msec
5 msec 10 msec 0 msec 0 msec
Pass word: DP5(Caps Lock)
0 msec
0 msec
ON OFF 90/1/1 PP-500 ON ON OFF Normal
ON UTC Setting PP-500 ON ON OFF Normal
Note) Refer to next page. *Timing depends on the type of the transceiver unit connected.
PP-500/510 is connected.
Ver x.xx Ver x.xx
*: Password : [DP5] is needed for change of these setting.
D1-3
DP-5
Reference) Timing depends on the type of the transceiver unit connected. Setting of timing list F6:System Timing (m sec) Slave Delay BK Timing Pre tone Post Tone Mute Timing Pre BK Post BK DP-5 F6:Terminal MIF AGC Remarks
RT :System settings
FS-1562
FS-5000 FS-8000
FS-1503
FS-1502 FS-1552
5 10 0 0 0
5 10 0 0 0
5 10 0 0 0
50 50 10 0 0
RC-258 RC-508 RC-808 5 5 0 0 0
OFF
ON or OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
9906: 10msec
9982:1 or
9910:10 msec
Tx delay time Default: 30 msec
--
(9913:10msec) (9917:BK ON)
D1-4
DP-5
3. Initial settings 3.1 Answerback code and ID code entry Enter vessel’s answerback code AAB and ID code as follows. “Page D1-13” describes how to change AAB and IDs. 1. Press function key [F5] to display the “Station” menu. Station 1: Station Entry 2: Timer Operation Entry 3: Scan Entry 4: Scramble Code Entery 5: User Channel Entery 6: Answerback Code Entry 7: Group ID Entry (4/5 digit) 8: Group ID Entry (9 digit) 9: Select ID Entry (4/5 digit) 0: Select ID Entry (9 digit)
2. Press [6] key to select “Answerback code Entry”, or operate the cursor to highlight item to [6], and press the [Enter] key. The display should look something like below. Answerback Code Entry Answerback Code
3. Enter vessel’s answerback code. Press the [Enter] key. The prompt “OK/Cancel” asks for verification of date. If correct, press the [Enter] key again. Answerback Code Entry Answerback Code 432456789 FURU X
OK Cancel
Caution Confirm the “CODE” before pressing ENTER key. You cannot change the CODE once it has been entered.
4. Do the same to enter IDs.
D1-5
DP-5
3.2 Terminal settings (F6) Press function key [F6] to display the Terminal display. To change settings, first, select “Change” on the top (Set UP) line. Press the [↓] key to select item, then press the [→] or [←] key to select option. “Default” on the setup line is for factory use. “Section 4.2” describes how to change Terminal menu.
Don’t change !!
Don’t change. Note) RT is connected to REM-A port.
FS-1562:OFF Don’t change. Note) DSC is connected to REM-B port.
*: Password : [DP5] is needed for change of these setting.
D1-6
DP-5
Terminal menu Description (F6)
D1-7
DP-5
D1-8
DP-5
3.3 System settings (F8) Press function key [F8] to display the System screen. To change settings, first, select “Change” on the top (Set UP) line. Press the [↓] key to select item, then press the [→] or [←] key to select option. “Default” on the setup line is for factory use. “Section 4.2” describes how to change Terminal menu.
Don’t change. Note) Refer to Setting of timing. (Page D1-4.)
When the PP-500/510 is connected.
*: Password : [DP5] is needed for change of these setting
D1-9
DP-5
System menu Description (F8) *:protected
D1-10
DP-5
D1-11
DP-5
3.4 Manual Reception (F3-6) Selects communication mode for reception. 1. Press Function key [F3] and then the [6] key. 2. Select receive mode: “AUTO”. (Default) Manual Reception AUTO
ARQ
FEC
DIRC
3. Press the [Enter] key. The reception mode: AUTO appears on the screen. Note) *AUTO mode ARQ mode FEC mode DIRC mode
: Automatic operation in ARQ and FEC. : ARQ mode only. :FEC mode only : DIRC mode only
3.5 NAV data format selection (CIF/NMEA) Jumper wire JP2 on the CONTROL board selects the format of the signal from the navigator connected to the DP-5. CONTROL board
Receiving NAV data; ROMs
CIF :Short NMEA :Open (Factory setting) JP2
GLL, RMA, RMC, VTG, DBT, MTW, VHW, TRF
1. Call up the F6: Terminal menu screen that the format selected invalid. Then press DP5 in this order to enable NMEA/CIF mode selection. 2. Press the down arrow key to display the NMEA/CIF mode selection screen. 3. To change the mode, move the cursor from “Look” to “Change” by pressing the right arrow key. Place the cursor at the NMEA/CIF mode position with the down arrow key, then select a format. Then press the [ENTER] key to return to the normal display.
D1-12
DP-5
4. Changing AAB, ID code, Terminal and System settings 4.1 Changing Answerback code and ID code Answerback and ID codes can be changed as follows: 1. Press function key [F5] to display the “Station” menu. Station 1: Station Entry 2: Timer Operation Entry 3: Scan Entry 4: Scramble Code Entery 5: User Channel Entery 6: Answerback Code Entry 7: Group ID Entry (4/5 digit) 8: Group ID Entry (9 digit) 9: Select ID Entry (4/5 digit) 0: Select ID Entry (9 digit)
2. Press [6] key and [Enter] keys in order. 3. Press the [Caps Lock] key to type in upper case letters. Type [A] [N] [S] [W] [E] [R] (Space) [C] [O] [D] [E]. Answerback Code Entry Answerback Code
4. Enter vessel’s new answerback code. Press the [Enter] key. The prompt “OK/Cancel” asks for verification of date. If correct, press the [Enter] key again. 5. Do the same to changing IDs. For IDs code, type [I] [D] (Space) [C] [O] [D] [E].
D1-13
DP-5
4.2 Changing F6 and F8 settings To change “Locked” items in [F6] and [F8] menus. 1. For example, press function key [F6]: Terminal. 2.Press the [Caps Lock] key to type in upper case letter. Type [D] [P] [5]. 3. To change settings, select “Change” on the top line. Press the [↓] key to select item, then press the [→] [←] key to select option. Note) To select the default setting, select “Default” on the top line, and then press [Enter] key.
D1-14
DP-5
5. Clearing contents of S-RAM and EEROM 5.1 S-RAM clear The S-RAM clear is needed when the characters are corrupted, and when the three ROMs on the CONTROL board are replaced. To clear contents of S-RAMs, use the NMI switch on the rear panel as below. Procedure 1. Turn the power on. 2. After characters are displayed on the screen, press the NMI switch.
NMI SW
REMOTE A
REMOTE B
PRINTER
CONTROL
CIF/NMEA
Rear panel view of DP-5 3. After several seconds, the normal display comes on automatically.
When clearing S-RAM, Message and Log file is erased.
D1-15
DP-5
5.2 EEROM Clear 1. Press function key [F8] to open the "System" menu. To change setting, move the cursor to "Change" on the top line. Press the [↓] key to select "Self Test", then press [Enter] key. "Self Test" menu appears on the display. 2. Select "EEROM" on the Self Test menu, then press [Enter] key. 3. EEROM check starts automatically. ( Check Address counts up.) 4. Press [ESC] key while EEROM check is carried out. The message "EE-ROM check completed. Press any key to escape." appears on the display. 5. Press [C] while pressing [Ctrl] key. 6. "Self Test" menu appears on the display. 7. Turn OFF power and ON again. 8. "WRITING to EEROM" appears on the display. 9. Normal display is shown automatically about one minute later.
EEROM contents [F5]: Station menu [F6]: Terminal menu [F7]: Editor menu [F8]: System menu
D1-16
Section D2. DP-6 1. Connection Key board
Key board 24VDC
Printer
IB-581 Terminal unit
Printer
24VDC
Printer (PP-510) COM-2
COM-1
NC
GLL, RMA, RMC, VTG DBT, MTW, VHW, TRF
NAV Device ICE1162(NMEA)
REM
Terminal
REM-A(RT)
*MF/HF RT
24VDC
DP-6 Main unit NBDP
REM-B(DSC)
*MF/HF DSC
*MF/HF Radiotelephone :FS-5000, FS-1562 series *MF/HF DSC :DSC-5/6/60
FS-1562
REM
Distributor (05P0606)
REM-A
MF/HF TR
AA-50
MF/HF Rx DSC
DSC-6
NBDP
DP-6 (Main unit)
REM-B
or RT
DSC-60
NBDP
Note) Remote A and B ports of Main unit are connected to FS-1562 and DSC-6. The Distributor board (05P0606) is necessary in the RC-1500 console.
REM 1 or 2 or 3 REM-A
FS-5000
DP-6 (Main Unit)
REM 2 or 3 or 1 MF/HF TR
AA-50
MF/HF Rx DSC
DSC-5/6
REM-B
or RT
DSC-60
D2-1
NBDP
NBDP
DP-6
2. Settings list Function F3:Operate
Item
Default
6:Manual Reception
Setting
AUTO
AUTO Terminal Ver20 and after MMSI+CS(4 digit) +X
5:Answerback Code Entry F5:Station
F6:System
6:Group ID Entry (4/5 digit) 7:Group ID Entry (9 digit) 8:Select ID Entry (4/5 digit) 9:Select ID Entry (9 digit) *Slave Delay *BK Timing Pre tone *Post Tone *Mute Timing Pre BK *Post BK *Modem Output Level MIF Tune Freeze
5 msec 10 msec 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec 0 dBm OFF OFF
X1 –X5 MMSI 5 msec 10 msec 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec 0 dBm OFF OFF
OFF
ON or OFF
ON OFF OFF UTC
ON ON or OFF On or OFF UTC
AGC Emission TX/RX MSG Save Edit Before sending Time System Time & Date
Fn+F1
Note
Password: ANSWER CODE (Caps Lock)
Password: ID CODE (Caps Lock) Password: DP6 (Caps Lock) Note) Timing depends on the type of the transceiver unit connected. See to “Reference”.
FS-1562:OFF, FS-5000:ON or OFF
ZDA (Terminal Ver 17 and after) Note) When NMEA data is not connected, entry by manual.
---
Display Mode Language Printer
Normal Normal PP-510
Normal Normal PP-510
Password: DP6 (Caps Lock)
*: Password is needed for change of these setting. Reference) Timing values depend on the transceiver connected. Setting of timing F6:System Timing (m sec) Slave Delay BK Timing Pre tone Post Tone Mute Timing Pre BK Post BK DP-6 F6:System MIF AGC Remarks RT :System settings
FS-1562
FS-5000 FS-8000
FS-1503
FS-1502 FS-1552
5 10 0 0 0
5 10 0 0 0
5 10 0 0 0
50 50 10 0 0
RC-258 RC-508 RC-808 5 5 0 0 0
OFF
ON or OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
9906: 10msec
(9913:10msec) (9917:BK ON)
9910:10 msec
Tx delay time Default: 30 msec
--
9982:1
D2-2
DP-6
3. Initial settings 3.1 Answerback code and ID code entry Enter vessel’s answerback code and ID code as follows. “Section 4” describes how to change AAB and IDs. 1. Press function key [F5] to display the “Station” menu. Station 1: Station Entry 2: Timer Operation Entry 3: Scan Entry 4: User Channel Entery 5: Answerback Code Entry 6: Group ID Entry (4/5 digit) 7: Group ID Entry (9 digit) 8: Select ID Entry (4/5 digit) 9: Select ID Entry (9 digit)
2. Press [6] key to select “Answerback code Entry”, or operate the cursor to highlight item to [6], and press the [Enter] key. The display should look something like below.
Answerback Code Entry Answerback Code
3. Enter vessel’s answerback code. Press the [Enter] key. The prompt “OK/Cancel” asks for verification of date. If correct, press the [Enter] key again. Answerback Code Entry Answerback Code 432456789 FURU X
OK Cancel
Caution Confirm the “CODE” before pressing ENTER key. You cannot change the CODE once it has been entered.
4. Do the same to enter IDs.
D2-3
Terminal program Ver 20 and later, AAB: MMSI(9digits)+4charctor+X
DP-6
3.2 System settings (F6) Press function key [F6] to display the System display. To change settings, first, select “change” on the top (Setup) line. Press the [↓] key to select item, then press the [→] or [←] key to select option. “Default” on the setup line is for factory use. “Section 4.2” describes how to change System menu.
Don’t change !! *Password is needed for change of these setting. Pass word: DP6 (Caps Lock)
FS-1500 serise:OFF
Enter setting referring to below. MIF Tune Freeze AGC Emission Tx/Rx MSG Save Edit before sending
OFF OFF OFF: FS-1562 ON ON or OFF ON or OFF
D2-4
ON or OFF: FS-5000
DP-6
F6: Menu description
Timing values depend on the transceiver connected. Therefore some trial and error may be necessary to find suitable values. *MIF Tune Turn on to send ATU tuning command. *Freeze Turn on to send “freeze” command to radio equipment connected. *AGC Turn on to automatically control gain in telex mode. (FS-1500 series RT is not supports AGC command.) *Emission Turn on to automatically change mode at RT to telex. *Tx/Rx MSG Save Turn on to automatically save incoming and outgoing message to FDD. *Edit before sending “No” transmits keying operation one by one. “Yes” transmits message only when the [Enter] key is pressed after confirming text typed.
D2-5
DP-6
3.3 Manual Reception (F3-6) Selects communication mode for reception. 1. Press Function key [F3] and then the [6] key. 2. Select receive mode: “AUTO”. (Default) Manual Reception AUTO
ARQ
FEC
DIRC
3. Press the [Enter] key. The reception mode: AUTO appears on the screen. Note) *AUTO mode ARQ mode FEC mode DIRC mode
: Automatic operation in ARQ and FEC. : ARQ mode only. :FEC mode only : Not use
3.4 Printer and Language setting Press [F1] while pressing [Fn] keys. The “Set up” will appear on the screen. Set up Language
Normal Norway Sweden UK
Printer
PP-510 Other
Default Setting) Printer: Language:
PP-510 Normal
When you change the Printer or Language setting, enter “unlocking” code in upper case letter: [D] [P] [6].
D2-6
DP-6
4. Changing AAB, ID code and System settings 4.1 Changing Answerback code and ID code Answerback and ID codes can be changed as follows: 1. Press function key [F5] to display the “Station” menu. Station 1: Station Entry 2: Timer Operation Entry 3: Scan Entry 4: User Channel Entery 5: Answerback Code Entry 6: Group ID Entry (4/5 digit) 7: Group ID Entry (9 digit) 8: Select ID Entry (4/5 digit) 9: Select ID Entry (9 digit)
2. Press [6] key and [Enter] keys in order.
3. Press the [Caps Lock] key to type letters. Type [A] [N] [S] [W] [E] [R] (Space) [C] [O] [D] [E]. Answerback Code Entry Answerback Code
4. Enter vessel’s new answerback code. Press the [Enter] key. The prompt “OK/Cancel” asks for verification of date. If correct, press the [Enter] key again. 5. Do the same to changing IDs. For IDs code, type [I] [D] (Space) [C] [O] [D] [E].
D2-7
DP-6
4.2 Changing F6: System settings To change “Locked” items in [F6] and [F1]+[Fn] menus. 1. For example, press function key [F6]: System. 2.Press the [Caps Lock] key to enter upper case letters. Type [D] [P] [6]. 3. To change settings, Select “Change” on the top line. Press the [↓] key to select item, then press the [→] [←] key to select option. Note) To select the default setting, select “Default” on the top line, and then press [Enter] key.
D2-8
DP-6
5. Self Test To run the self test. 1. Press [F6] to display the system menu. 2. Press [→] to display Change in reverse video. 3. Press [↓] to select Self Test. 4. Press the [Enter] key to start the test.
5. Print out printer test.
Test description *Terminal unit test Displays terminal unit version No. *Main unit test Displays MODEM board version no. If NG (No good) appears check communication cable and if main unit is powered. *Radio unit test Transmits CAID command in MIF format to external equipment, and name of external equipment returns. if NG (No good) appears check communication cable and if SSB radiotelephone is powered. *DSC unit test Transmits CAID command in MIF format to external equipment, and name of external equipment returns. If NG (No good) appears check communication cable and if DSC terminal is powered. *Printer unit test If NG appears check if printer is powered and if cable between printer and terminal is connected.
D2-9
DP-6
6. How to Update Programs 6.1 Terminal Program Note) The program floppy disk supplied contains both the terminal and main (main unit) programs. 1. Quit the terminal program. With the terminal program version -16 or later, - press [F2]while pressing [Alt] and [Fn] keys. With the version -15 or earlier, - press [F2] while pressing [Fn] key. The prompt, "A: \>DP10\TERMINAL>", will appear on the screen. Note) When updating the terminal program of Ver.-11 or prior, delete "DP10.SAV" file in advance. 1) Quit the terminal program. "A:\>DP10\TERMINAL>" will appear. 2) Confirm the above file, DP10.SAV - Press [D], [I], [R], and [Enter] keys successively. 3) Files in "A:\>DP10\TERMINAL>" directory will shown. 4) If there is "DP10.SAV" file, delete it as follows. - Press [D], [E], [L], [Space], [D], [P], [1], [0], [.], [S], [A], [V], and [Enter] key successively. 2. Insert the floppy disk containing the terminal program into the FD drive. 3. Change to "B" drive by pressing keys, - [B], [:], and [Enter], successively. The prompt, "B:\>", will appear on the screen.
D2-10
DP-6
4. To update the terminal program, (Terminal Program for Standard) - press keys, [I], [N], [S], [T], [A], [L], [L], and [Enter], successively. Then, the updating will proceed automatically by following the instructions as shown below: 1) After a message, "Overwrite A:\DP10>----- (Yes/No/All)?", has appeared, - Then, press keys, [A] and [Enter] , successively. 2) After a message "Press any key to continue." has appeared, - press any key, for example, [Enter] key. (Terminal Program for Russian) - press keys, [R], [U], [S], [I], [N], [S], [T], and [Enter], successively. Then, the updating will proceed automatically by following the instructions as shown below: After a message "Press any key to continue." has appeared, - press any key, for example, [Enter] key. Reference) (1) Press [Alt] key while pressing left [Shift] key, alternates the language for composing messages between English and Russian. (2) To install the new program for English version, - successively press keys, [I], [N], [S], [T], [A], [L], [L], and [Enter]. The updating automatically proceeds by following instructions to be displayed. 5. Then, the updating will be finished, displaying the prompt "A:\>". 6. Turn off once and on again the terminal unit.
Confirming program version To confirm the version of the Terminalv program, execute "[F6]:System ---> Self-Test".
D2-11
DP-6
6.2 Main: Main Unit Program 1. Quit the terminal program. With the terminal program version -16 or later, - press [F2] while pressing [Alt] and [Fn] keys. With the version -15 or earlier, - press [F2] while pressing [Fn] key. The prompt, "A:\DP10\TERMINAL>", will appear on the screen. 2. Insert the floppy disk containing the terminal program into the FD drive. 3. Change to "B" drive by pressing keys, - [B], [:], and [Enter], successively.
The prompt, "B:\>", will appear.
4. Turn off once and on again the DP-6 (main unit). 5. To update the main unit program, - press keys, [N], [B], [D], [P], [I], [N], [S], [T], and [Enter] key, successively. 6. After a message "DP-10 File Update" has appeared, - press [F1] key. 6. - Press [N], [B], [D], [P], [.], [E], [X], [E], and [Enter] keys successively for "File Name". If an error message "Timeover Err" appears, turn off and on again the DP-6 main unit after pressing [Esc] key. Then, try again from step 6. 8. Wait about 5 minutes until the "%" of "File Data Transferring" display reaches 100%. 9. When "Transfer Complete" is displayed, the main unit program updating has finished. 10. Turn off once and on again power of the main and terminal units. Confirming program version To confirm the version of the main program, execute "[F6]:System ---> Self-Test".
D2-12
Section E1. FM-7000 1. Connection
ANT
CH70 ANT REMOTE 1
MIC
VHF RT
DSC-5V CH70 WR
FM-7000-F
REMOTE 2
RB-700
12VDC SPKR
EXT SP & Wing Handset
FM-7000 + DSC-5V (with Channel 70 watch receiver board)
ANT REMOTE 1 MIC
VHF RT
DSC-5 FM-7000-E-HK
REMOTE 2
RB-700
12VDC CH70 WR
SPKR
EXT SP & Wing Handset
FM-7000 (with Channel 70 watch receiver board) + DSC-5
E1-1
FM-7000
2. System Settings Preset jumper connections on the PANL board, RX board and SUB-CPU board (option) according to local regulations. You can make USA CH 2/3/4 inoperative. 2.1
Note)
E1-2
FM-7000
E1-3
FM-7000
E1-4
FM-7000
Not use in GMDSS
E1-3.
To default settings
E1-5
FM-7000
E1-6
FM-7000
E1-7
FM-7000
Not use in GMDSS
Not use in GMDSS E. Registration of steps A to D
Registered
E1-8
FM-7000
2.2
JP2 (CH70: refer to page FM7000-11)
E1-9
FM-7000
2.3
E1-10
FM-7000
2.4
E1-11
FM-7000
3. Adjustment 3.1 Tx Power Adjustment Item SIMP DUP LOW
Rating 20 to 25 W 18 to 25 W Loss than 1 W
Hot Power
6 to 8 W
Check Point
Adjuster R54 R55 R56
ANT connector
Condition Simplex CH, Power: HI Duplex CH, Power: HI CH16, Power: LOW CH16, Power: HI (Temporarily disconnected lead wire of posistor RT1.)
R53
Note) Hot power; It reduces the power automatically to 6 to 7 w when the temperature at the power amplifiers exceeds 100 degrees (actually 85 degrees)“HI” indication blinks when power is reduced. MAIN UNIT TX Board
Pick up
PA
Power meter
ANT
RT1 R56 [Low] To check "HOT" power,remove RT1 at solder side.
R55 [DUP] R54 [SIMP] R53 [Hot]
Frequency Counter
VCO C68
Frequency ADJ.
Power ADJ.
3.2 Frequency Adjustment TX Freq. on CH16 (Rating) 156.8 MHz±300Hz (Rule: ±10ppm)
Conditions PTT: ON
Adjuster C68 (TX Board)
If the frequency is out of the rating, adjust C68 on TX Board to correct. (Adjust to PLL reference OSC: 8 MHz )
E1-12
FM-7000
4. Self Test The built-in self test-diagnosis tests checks the EEROM, Keyboard, PTT switch and auto revert rest for proper operation.
E1-13
FM-7000
Keyboard/Switch Check To check the keyboard, PTT switch, and auto revert rest, press them in succession.
E1-14
FM-7000
E1-15
FM-7000
Error Messages The LCD displays error messages to alert you to possible equipment fault. The table below describes these error messages.
E1-16
FM-7000
5. Private Channel List
E1-17
FM-7000
E1-18
FM-7000
E1-19
Section E2. FM-7500
1. Connection The FM-7500 VHF Radiotelephone consists of; -VHF Radiotelephone FM-7000 -DSC Terminal DSC-5 -Power unit
ANT REMOTE 1 MIC
DSC-5
CIF/NMEA
VHF RT
FM-7000
12VDC
REMOTE 2
RB-700 CH70 WR
12VDC AC100/220V 24VDC
SPKR
EXT SP & Wing Handset
AC/DC Power supply
12VDC
FM-7500
2. Settings Referring to FM-7000 and DSC-5 setting list.
E2-1
EXT SP & Wing Handset
Section E3. FM-8000 1. Connection The FM-8000 enables GMDSS operation with VHF DSC terminal, DSC-8V.
T/R antenna
CH70 antenna
ANT
ANT REMOTE 1
MIC
VHF RT
DSC-8V FM-8000
REMOTE 2
RB-700
24VDC SPKR
EXT SP & Wing Handset
2. System Settings 2.1 Changing System setting
E3-1
FM-8000
E3-2
FM-8000
E3-3
FM-8000
E3-4
FM-8000
2.2 Channel Preset (CH0 to CH255 available)
E3-5
FM-8000
E3-6
FM-8000
E3-7
FM-8000
3. Adjustment 3.1 Tx Power Adjustment Item
Rating
High Power Low Power
20 to 25 W Loss than 1 W
Hot Power
6 to 8 W
Check Point
Adjuster
Condition
R54 R56
CH16, Power: HI CH16, Power: LOW CH16, Power: HI (Temporarily disconnected lead wire of posistor RT1.)
ANT connector R53
Note) Hot power; It reduces the power automatically to 6 to 7 w when the temperature at the power amplifiers exceeds 100 degrees (actually 85 degrees) “HI” indication blinks when power is reduced. MAIN UNIT
Pick up
PA
TX Board
Power meter
ANT
RT1 R56 [Low] To check "HOT" power,remove RT1 at solder side.
Frequency Counter
R54 [High] R53 [Hot] VCO
C67
Frequency ADJ.
Power ADJ.
3.2 Frequency Adjustment TX Freq. on CH16 (Rating) 156.8 MHz±300Hz (Rule: ±10ppm)
Conditions PTT: ON
Adjuster C67 (TX Board)
If the frequency is out of the rating, adjust C67 on TX Board to correct. (Adjust to PLL reference OSC: 8 MHz )
E3-8
FM-8000
4. Self test
E3-9
FM-8000
E3-10
FM-8000
Error Indication
E3-3.
E3-3.
E3-11
FM-8000
E3-12
FM-8000
5. Private Channel List
E3-13
FM-8000
E3-14
FM-8000
E3-15
FM-8500 Section E4. FM-8500
1. Connection
Note) For RMC, data (month and day) are entered in the log, and for GLL, time (hour/min/sec) is entered in the log.
FM-8500 rear view, showing connector location
E4-1
FM-8500
2. System settings 2.1 Initial Settings This section provides how to set up the following items. 1. Ship’s ID number 4. Channel system settings 2. DSC block settings 5. Selection of LCD display, Japanese or English 6. Protection (on/off) 3. VHF block settings Protection OFF Refer to section “2.2Changing system settings”.
TEST VHF ch70 manual
(*1)
[SELECT]
[9]
System < Rom version > V P ID DSC RT CH PO L
RT3-Time out timer < OFF > OFF [1] ON [2] Disable or continue after a long transmission. For USA, set to ON, Not effective unless USA mode is enabled. Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key .
Select "ID" press the [ENT] key. Enter own identification [digits] MMSI: - - - - - - - - -
Refer to section “5 changing ID and Private mode”.
RT4-TX AF monitor < OFF > OFF [1] ON [2]
Enter own ship's ID and the [ENT] key twice. DSC : Receiver < CH70 > CH70 [1] VHF [2]
RT5-Auto 1W < ON > ON [1] OFF [2]
When two FM-8500s are installed, designate one as Main (CH70) and the other as Sub (VHF). The default setting is "CH70" as mainunit.
ON:Automatic setting of 1W when selecting the low output power channel set by "Channel Preset" operation.
Select "CH70" or "VHF" press the [ENT] key.
Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key .
DSC : remote DMC ON ON [1] OFF [2]
RT6-Dual watch < ON > ON [1] OFF [2]
Select whether DMC-5 is connected or not. (ON:connected) Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key twice.
Disable or enable dual watch. Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key . RT6-Scanning < ON > ON [1] OFF [2]
RT1-Mode : USA/WX < OFF > ON [1] OFF [2]
Disable or enable channel scanning. Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key .
Disable or enable the USA/WX mode. Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key . RT1-Mode : private < OFF > OFF [1] ON [2]
Refer to section “5.Changing ID and Private mode”.
RT7-Auto SQ LOW= 00 HIGH HOLD
Disable or enable the PRIVATE channel mode.
RT2-Hook work : CH16 < ON > ON [1] OFF [2] Disable or enable watch on CH16 when handset is on hook. Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key. RT2-Hook work : SP < ON > ON [1] OFF [2]
*You had better not change these value.
Settings auto SQ function (*better not change these value) LOW:Enter lowest limt of voice frequency which open automatic SQ. Enter value by the following formula. Setting value x 50 = Low Frequency HIGH:Enter highest frequency which opens automatic SQ. Setting value x 50 = Hi Frequency HOLD:Enter SQ hold time in two digits, by follwing the formula. Setting value x 20 msec= Time desired Press the [ENT] key 4 times .
Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key.
*
INTL CH:016 < TX SIMP HI > ENABLE= TX[1] RX[2] UN[3]
Disable or enable speaker when handset is on hook. Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key .
(*1)
OFF !!
Disable or enable monitoring of external equipment; For example, Remote Station RB-700 is monitored. Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key.
(continued next page)
E4-2
FM-8500 (From previous page)
*INTL Channel mode
*
INTL CH:016 < TX SIMP HI > ENABLE= TX[1] RX[2] UN[3]
The international channel setting display appears.
TX: Transmission and reception available RX:Reception only UN:Transmission and reception prohibited Rotate CHANNEL knob to a select channel to be set. Press TX[1], RX[2], or UN[3] key, and [Enter] key depending on channel. INTL CH:001 < TX DUP HI > TELECOM=SIMP[1] DUP[2] Select communication mode. Select "SIMP" or "DUP" and press the [ENT] key . INTL CH:001 < TX DUP HI > TX POWER= HIGH[1] LOW[2] Select TX power. Select "HIGH" or "LOW" and press the [ENT] key .
To set other INTL channels. Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set.
To select other mode (USA, WX or Private), Press the [CH16] key while pressing the a CHNNEL knob. (RT program Ver-06 and later)
*USA Channel mode
*PRIVATE Channel mode
USA CH:016 < TX SIMP HI > ENABLE= TX[1] RX[2] UN[3]
P01/ CH:- - - < - - - - - - - -> PRIV No.SELECT: [] key Press the arrow key to select private channel (P01 to P20) to be set. Press the [ENT] key.
TX: Transmission and reception available RX:Reception only UN:Transmission and reception prohibited Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set. Press TX[1], RX[2], or UN[3] key, and [Enter] key depending on channel. USA CH:001 < TX DUP HI > TELECOM=SIMP[1] DUP[2]
P01/ CH:001 ENABLE=TX[1] RX[2] UN[3] TX: Transmission and reception available RX:Reception only UN:Transmission and reception prohibited Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set. Press TX[1], RX[2], or UN[3] key, and [Enter] key depending on channel. P01/ CH:001 < TX SIMP LOW > TELECOM= SIMP[1] DUP[2]
Select communication mode. Press SIMP[1] or DUP[2] key, and [Enter] key. USA CH:001 < TX DUP HI > TX POWER= HIGH[1] LOW[2]
Select communication mode. Press SIMP[1] or DUP[2] key, and [Enter] key.
Select TX power. Press HIGH[1] or LOW[2] key, and [Enter] key.
P01/ CH:001 < TX SIMP LOW > TX POWER= HIGH[1] LOW[2]
To set other USA channels. Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set.
Select TX power. Press HIGH[1] or LOW[2] key, and [Enter] key.
*WX Channel mode
To set other private channels.
WX CH:001 < RX > ENABLE= RX[1] UNABLE[2]
Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set.
ENABLE:WX Reception UNABLE:WX reception prohibited Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set. Press ENABLE[1] or UNABLE[2] key, and [Enter] key depending on channel.
To set other WX channels. Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set.
Press the [CANCEL] key. System < Rom version > V P ID DSC RT CH PO L
(continued on next page)
E4-3
FM-8500
(From previous page)
System < Channel > V P ID DSC RT CH PO L
Note) PO:TX power adjustment Refer to section "6. 1 Tx Power adjustment".
Select "L" and press the [ENT] key .
LCD language < English > E[1] J[2] For the Tx/RX massage display in DSC and menu display, Japanese or English is selected. Press E[1] or J[2] key, and [Enter] key. System < Rom version > V P ID DSC RT CH PO L Select "P" and press the [ENT] key . Protection ON
< OFF > OFF
* Important !!
Select "ON" and press the [ENT] key .
System < Channel > V P ID DSC RT CH PO L To return to normal display, press [CANCEL] key several times. Watch VHF ch70 auto
E4-4
FM-8500
2.2 Changing system settings (Protection ON/OFF) The set up menu appears by pressing the [SELECT] key at the normal display. Watch VHF ch70 auto [SELECT] Set up menu < M.Position > 1 2 3 4 6 7
9 ALM
Set up menu
To release protection of menu 9, follow the steps below.
Watch VHF ch70 auto [SELECT]
[9]
[ ]
System V P ID ---Select "P" and press [ENT] key. * System protected *
Enter cypher code "652111" Protection < ON > ON OFF Select "OFF" and press [ENT] key. System V P ID ---Now you can reset the followings. * RT block * DSC block * Power setting * Channel system * Setting language
The registered MMSI number and Private mode"ON or OFF" is reading only. If you want to change MMSI number and Private mode "ON or OFF", refer to section "5. Changing ID and Private mode". After changing the settings, set the "Protection" menu shown below to "ON" for normal operation.
Importamt !!
TEST VHF ch70 manual [SELECT]
[9]
[>]
[ENT]
Protection ON OFF Select "ON" and press [ENT] key. Press [CANCEL] key several times. Watch VHF ch70 auto
Returns to normal display.
E4-5
FM-8500
3. System settings list [SELECT] “Setup menu” The default settings are shown in a screened call of each setting item.
1
Setup menu
Menu-1
Manual Position
L/L and UTC
Menu-2
Auto ack
UNABLE
ROM/RAM
3
Diagnosis (Protected) 652111
Remote loop
Note To cancel the manually entered data, enter 9999 for the UTC.
ABLE 2
Setting
ABLE No reason Busy Equip disable Unable channel Unable mode ROM RAM EEROM NMEA DMC Remote station Printer IF Without the [CANCEL] [DIMM] [SELECT] and [ENT] key.
Keyboard test Display test Print out test 4
Print out
6
Sound
7
File
AUTO/MANU
EEROM Keyboard click MASSAGE ADDRESS TEL No.
AUTO MANU
AUTO Print out to EEROM content.
ON OFF
ON Group ID
E4-6
0 MID X5 - X9
FM-8500
Setup menu
Menu-1 Rom version Protection
Own-ID number
Menu-2
Menu-3
RT and DSC version ON/OFF ID (MMSI)
Own ID CH70[1]
DSC:
Receiver
RCVR/DMC
DMC RT1:USA/WX
RT1:private RT2:Hook work CH16 RT2:Hool work SP RT3:Time out RT1-7 9
RT4:AF monitor RT5:Auto 1W
System
RT6:Dual watch RT6:Scanning RT7:Auto SQ
Channel
INTL, USA,WX, PRIV
CH Tx power HI/L
VHF[2] ON[1] OFF[2] OFF[1] ON[2] OFF[1] ON[2] ON[1] OFF[2] ON[1] OFF[2] OFF[1] ON[2] OFF[1] ON[2] ON[1] OFF[2] ON[1] OFF[2] ON[1] OFF[2] LOW (00) HIGH (03) HOLD (30) ENABLE CH (TX /RX/UN) TELECOM (SIMP/DUP) TX POWER (HIGH/LOW) CH60 CH88 CH14 CH60 CH88 CH14
English[1] Japanese[2] Ordinary alarm ON/OFF TYPE : 0, 1, 2, 3,4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
LCD Language ALM
Setting
Main VHF:CH70 Sub VHF:VHF
Pass word:652111 To clear EEROM content. (NMI SW ON) When two sets are installed, designate one as Main (CH70) and the other as Sub (VHF). ON:DMC-5 is connected.
By request By request
To clear EEROM content. (NMI SW ON)
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 00 03 30
By request
Default:750
Power adjustment required.
Default:100
Power adjustment required.
English ON 1
E4-7
Note
FM-8500
4. Jumper Setting Change the jumper plug setting (JP2) on the CONTROL board according to the type of the wing microphone : Carbon MIC or Dynamic MIC. Handset - HS-6000FZ6 - HS-6000FZ5 MIC Receptacle Box -RBD-VHF -RBD-VHF-B
(Carbon MIC) (Dynamic MIC) (For Carbon MIC) (For Dynamic MIC)
Top view of CONTROL PCB For dynamic MIC, set R152 on the CONTROL board at fully counterclockwise (max). No adjustment is required for carbon MIC.
E4-8
FM-8500
5. Changing ID (MMSI) and Private mode (DSC ROM Ver-03 and after) Procedures 1. Press the NMI switch S1 on the CONTROL board with the power turned on.
2. Turn off the power. 3. Turn on the power again, then this display will appear. Clear < Do not clear > NO RAM EEROM ALL
4. Select EEROM with the arrow key and press [ENT] key. A display “Now WRITING EEROM” will appear, and after about 15 seconds another display “Turn off the power” will appear. Then, turn off the power, 5. Turn on the power again, then this display will appear. TEST VHF ch70 manual
6. Press [SELECT] key and the [9] key, then this display will appear. System V P ID DSC CH PO L
7. Put the cursor on “ID” by pressing [>] key and press [ENT] key. Enter own identification [digits] MMIS: - - - - - - - -
Changing ID number.
E4-9
FM-8500
8. Input the ID number of the own ship in nine digits, check to be sure about the input number, and press [ENT] key. (When a wrong number is input, press [CANCEL] key and enter the correct number.) System V P ID DSC RT CH PO L
9. Put the cursor on “RT” and press [ENT] key twice. RT1-Mode:private OFF[1] ON[2]
Setting Private mode ON or OFF.
10. After the selection, press [CANCEL] key. System < RT 1-7 > V P ID DSC RT CH PO L
11. Put the cursor on “P”, and press [ENT] key. Protection
ON OFF
12. Select “ON”, and press [ENT] key. (By pressing [ENT] key again, the input ID number can be confirmed. If the number is incorrect, input the correct number, from the first step.) 13. Return to the normal display by pressing [CANCEL] key several times. Watch VHF ch70 auto
The ID number to be input must be the MMSI number that is allocated to the ship. Again, check that the input number is correct.
E4-10
FM-8500
6. Adjustment 6.1 TX Power Adjustment Connect Power meter and Dummy load or Antenna as illustrated below. Handset
50Ω
FM-8500
CH60 :156.325MHz CH14 :156.7MHz CH88 :157.425MHz
50Ω Power meter High Power Low Power
50Ω
50Ω Dummy load or Antenna
:21 - 25W :0.7 - 1.0W
Must be “Protection OFF”. *Referring to section : 2.2 Changing System settings (Protection ON/OFF) 1. At the normal display, Press [SELECT] and [9] keys in this order. 2. Select “P” by pressing the [>] keys, then press the [ENT] key. 3. Type password :652111. 4. Select “Protection OFF” by pressing the [>] key, then press the [ENT] key. “Protection OFF” 5. Select “PO” by pressing the [>] key, then press the [ENT] key. The following display appears. Tx power - CH60 SELECT: [MODE] [CH] [H/L] sw
Adjust high power and low power on INTL CH14, CH60 and CH88 as follows. 6. For example to adjust high power on INTL CH60; While pressing the PTT switch, rotate the CHANNEL knob to set high power data. Release the PTT switch when the desired value (power data) appears on the channel display. 7. Then, press [HIGH/LOW] key. The following display appears. Adjust low power by doing the same high power. Tx power - CH60 SELECT: [MODE] [CH] [H/L] sw
8. Change the channel to CH14 or CH88 with the CHANNEL knob. Adjust high power and low power by doing the same as CH60. 9. After completion of power adjustment on INTL mode, adjust the output power for PRV mode in the same procedure as for INTL power adjustment. Note that for PRV mode, you can adjust power for each channel.
E4-11
FM-8500
Must be “Protection ON”. *Referring to section “2.2 Changing System settings” (Protection ON/OFF) 10. After completion of power adjustment on all modes, press the [CANCEL] key. 11. Select “P”, then press the [ENT] key. 12. Select “ON”, then press the [ENT] key. “Protection ON” 13. To return to the normal display, press the [CANCEL] key several times.
6.2 TX Frequency Adjustment
Rule:+10 ppm
E4-12
FM-8500
7. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM After replacing the ROM on the CONTROL board or if the unit is not working properly, be sure to press the NMI switch on the CONTROL board after turning on the unit, to clear contents of S-RAMs.
Procedures 1. Press the NMI switch S1 on the CONTROL board with the unit turned on. 2. Turn off the power. 3. Turn on the power again, then this display will appear. Clear < Do not clear > NO RAM EEROM ALL
4. Clear to RAM, EEROM or ALL. RAM clear When select to RAM, press the [ENT] key; Turn on the power again, then this display will appear. Watch VHF ch70 auto
E4-13
FM-8500
EEROM or ALL clear Select EEROM or ALL with the arrow key and press [ENT] key. A display “Now WRITING EEROM” will appear, and after about 15 seconds another display “Turn off the power” will appear. Then, turn off the power. Turn the power on again. To set the initial settings. Refer to section “2.1 Initial settings”. TEST VHF ch70 manual
Note) Before clearing EEROM, print out the contents of EEROM by pressing the [4] key.
Contents of S-RAM and EEROM Item RAM
EEROM
ALL
Purpose Clears all contents of the S-RAMs. (incl. transmitted and received messages, prepared in messages in FILE menu: [SELECT] [7], and [1], [2], [4], [6]. Clears contents of EEROM. *Settings of [SELECT] [ALARM] *Settings of [SELECT] [9] (System setting data) Note) Ship’s ID(“ID”) and Private ON/OFF setting is cleared. Channel preset data (“CH”) and power adjustment data (“Po”) are not restored to default setting when clearing the EEROM. *Settings of [SELECT] [7] (Message in files) Clears all contents of the S-RAMs and EEPROM. (There is not clear ID and Private mode settings in [SELECT] [9] menu.)
E4-14
FM-8500
8. Self test
E4-15
FM-8500
E4-16
FM-8500
FM-8500 Self test flow
PTT TEST
PTT ON
TX Power>15W
H8 CPU has in RAM the diagnostic result for each PTT ON. For NG, V25 CPU is notified.
XMT POWER:NG
END OF PTT TEST
SELF TEST TEST ON
TX ON without PA
NO
PLL Lock?
PLL Lock:NG
YES
AF LOOP BACK TEST OK?
CH70 LOOP BACK TEST OK?
NO
AF LOOP BACK TEST OK?
YES
CH70 RCVR:NG
PTT ON TEST OK?
NO
NO
PTT ON TEST OK? YES
YES
XMT POWER:NG
VHF DSC:GOOD
YES
VHF DSC:NG
NO
CONTROL:NG
In CH70 LOOP-BACK TEST, all other than PA is put in transmission status and DSC signal is transmitted, which is received at CH 70 receiver to see if it is a right signal by analyzing the signal with the control. This test allows collective diagnosis of the transmitter, CH 70 receiver and control. In AF LOOP-BACK TEST, the test described above is performed only with the control by looping the signal back within the control.
END
E4-17
FM-8500
9. Private Channel list
E4-18
FM-8500
E4-19
FM-8500
E4-20
FM-8500
10. Power and Frequency measurement of
VHF Radiotelephone The VHF CH 70 is not transmitted by pressing a PTT switch. To measure the output power of VHF CH 70, follow the below. The radiotelephone must be set to CH 70. The FM-8500 muse be set the protection OFF. Refer to section “2.2 Changing System settings”. Protection OFF TEST
Press [SELECT], [
] key.
INSPECTION TEST < > TONE
Select "TONE", press [ENT] key.
DIS-CH
Tone test < > CR MARK SPACE DOT T1 T2
MARK tone:1700Hz-400Hz SPACE tone:1700Hz+400Hz DOT:1700Hz+400Hz
Don't select T1 and T !!
Select "MARK or Space", press PTT SW. For example, select "Space". Tone test < Space tone > Now doing
Tx ON (Measurment: power and frequency)
Tone test < > CR MARK SPACE DOT T1 T2
156.525MHz (+10ppm)
Release PTT SW.
Press [CANCEL] key several times.
TEST
E4-21
Section E5. FM-8700
1. Connection
*
Receivable Sentence) GLL, RMC, ZDA
Rear panel
DX-8700
E5-1
FM-8700
2. System settings 2.1 Initial Settings This section provides how to set-up the following items. 1. Ship’s ID number 4. Channel system settings 2. DSC block settings 5. Selection of LCD display, Japanese or English 3. VHF block settings 6. Protection (Lock Initial settings) Protection OFF Refer to section “2.2Changing
system settings”.
TEST VHF ch70 manual
(*1)
[SELECT]
[9]
System < Rom version > V P ID DSC RT CH PO L
RT3-Time out timer < OFF > OFF [1] ON [2] Disable or continue after a long transmission. For USA, set to ON, Not effective unless USA mode is enabled. Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key .
Select "ID" press the [ENT] key. Enter own identification [digits] MMSI: - - - - - - - - -
Refer to section “5.Chenging ID and Private mode”.
RT4-TX AF monitor < OFF > OFF [1] ON [2]
Disable or enable monitoring of external equipment; For example, Remote Station RB-700 is monitored. Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key.
Enter own ship's ID and the [ENT] key twice. DSC : Receiver < CH70 > CH70 [1] VHF [2]
RT5-Auto 1W < ON > ON [1] OFF [2]
When two FM-8700s are installed, designate one as Main (CH70) and the other as Sub (VHF). The default setting is "CH70" as mainunit.
ON:Automatic setting of 1W when selecting the low output power channel set by "Channel Preset" operation.
Select "CH70" or "VHF" press the [ENT] key.
Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key .
DSC : remote DMC ON ON [1] OFF [2]
RT6-Dual watch < ON > ON [1] OFF [2]
Select whether DMC-5 is connected or not. (ON:connected) Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key twice.
Disable or enable dual watch. Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key . RT6-Scanning < ON > ON [1] OFF [2]
RT1-Mode : USA/WX < OFF > ON [1] OFF [2]
Disable or enable channel scanning. Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key .
Disable or enable the USA/WX mode. Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key . RT1-Mode : private < OFF > OFF [1] ON [2]
OFF!!
RT7-Auto SQ LOW= 00 HIGH HOLD
Refer to section “5.Changing ID and Private mode”.
Disable or enable the PRIVATE channel mode.
Settings auto SQ function (*better not change these value) LOW:Enter lowest limt of voice frequency which open automatic SQ. Enter value by the following formula. Setting value x 50 = Low Frequency HIGH:Enter highest frequency which opens automatic SQ. Setting value x 50 = Hi Frequency HOLD:Enter SQ hold time in two digits, by follwing the formula. Setting value x 20 msec= Time desired Press the [ENT] key 4 times .
Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key. RT2-Hook work : CH16 < ON > ON [1] OFF [2] Disable or enable watch on CH16 when handset is on hook. Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key. RT2-Hook work : SP < ON > ON [1] OFF [2]
*You had better not change these value.
*
INTL CH:016 < TX SIMP HI > ENABLE= TX[1] RX[2] UN[3]
Disable or enable speaker when handset is on hook. Select "ON" or "OFF" and press the [ENT] key . (continued next page)
(*1)
E5-2
FM-8700
(From previous page)
*INTL Channel mode
*
INTL CH:016 < TX SIMP HI > ENABLE= TX[1] RX[2] UN[3]
The international channel setting display appears.
TX: Transmission and reception available RX:Reception only UN:Transmission and reception prohibited Rotate CHANNEL knob to a select channel to be set. Press TX[1], RX[2], or UN[3] key, and [Enter] key depending on channel. INTL CH:001 < TX DUP HI > TELECOM= SIMP[1] DUP[2] Select communication mode. Select "SIMP" or "DUP" and press the [ENT] key . INTL CH:001 < TX DUP HI > TX POWER= HIGH[1] LOW[2] Select TX power. Select "HIGH" or "LOW" and press the [ENT] key .
To set other INTL channels. Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set.
To select other mode (USA, WX or Private), Press the [CH16] key while pressing the a CHNNEL knob.
*USA Channel mode
*PRIVATE Channel mode
USA CH:016 < TX SIMP HI > ENABLE= TX[1] RX[2] UN[3]
P01/ CH:- - - < - - - - - - - -> PRIV No.SELECT: [] key Press the arrow key to select private channel (P01 to P20) to be set. Press the [ENT] key.
TX: Transmission and reception available RX:Reception only UN:Transmission and reception prohibited Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set. Press TX[1], RX[2], or UN[3] key, and [Enter] key depending on channel. USA CH:001 < TX DUP HI > TELECOM= SIMP[1] DUP[2]
P01/ CH:001 ENABLE= TX[1] RX[2] UN[3] TX: Transmission and reception available RX:Reception only UN:Transmission and reception prohibited Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set. Press TX[1], RX[2], or UN[3] key, and [Enter] key depending on channel. P01/ CH:001 < TX SIMP LOW > TELECOM= SIMP[1] DUP[2]
Select communication mode. Press SIMP[1] or DUP[2] key, and [Enter] key. USA CH:001 < TX DUP HI > TX POWER= HIGH[1] LOW[2]
Select communication mode. Press SIMP[1] or DUP[2] key, and [Enter] key.
Select TX power. Press HIGH[1] or LOW[2] key, and [Enter] key.
P01/ CH:001 < TX SIMP LOW > TX POWER= HIGH[1] LOW[2]
To set other USA channels. Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set.
Select TX power. Press HIGH[1] or LOW[2] key, and [Enter] key.
*WX Channel mode
To set other private channels.
WX CH:001 < RX > ENABLE= RX[1] UNABLE[2]
Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set.
ENABLE:WX Reception UNABLE:WX reception prohibited Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set. Press ENABLE[1] or UNABLE[2] key, and [Enter] key depending on channel.
To set other WX channels. Rotate CHANNEL knob to select a channel to be set.
Press the [CANCEL] key. System < ROM version > V P ID DSC RT CH PO L
(continued on next page)
E5-3
FM-8700
(From previous page)
System < Channel > V P ID DSC RT CH PO L
Note) PO:TX power adjustment Refer to section "6.1 Tx Power adjustment".
Select "L" and press the [ENT] key .
LCD language < English > E[1] J[2] For the Tx/RX massage display in DSC and menu display, Japanese or English is selected. Press E[1] or J[2] key, and [Enter] key. System < Rom version > V P ID DSC RT CH PO L Select "P" and press the [ENT] key . Protection ON
< OFF > OFF
* Important !!
Select "ON" and press the [ENT] key .
System < Channel > V P ID DSC RT CH PO L To return to normal display, press [CANCEL] key several times. Watch VHF ch70 auto
E5-4
FM-8700
2.2 Changing system settings
(Protection ON/OFF)
The set up menu appears by pressing the [SELECT] key at the normal display. Watch VHF ch70 auto [SELECT] Set up menu < M.Position > 1 2 3 4 6 7
Set up menu
9 ALM
To release protection of menu 9, follow the steps below. Watch VHF ch70 auto [SELECT]
[ ]
[9]
System V P ID ---Select "P" and press [ENT] key. * System protected *
Enter cypher code "652111" Protection < ON > ON OFF Select "OFF" and press [ENT] key. System V P ID ---Now you can reset the followings. * RT block * DSC block * Power setting * Channel system * Setting language
The registered MMSI number and Private mode"ON or OFF" is reading only. If you want to change MMSI number and Private mode "ON or OFF", refer to section "5. Changing ID and Private mode". After changing the settings, set the "Protection" menu shown below to "ON" for normal operation.
Importamt !!
TEST VHF ch70 manual [SELECT]
[9]
[>]
[ENT]
Protection ON OFF Select "ON" and press [ENT] key. Press [CANCEL] key several times. Watch VHF ch70 auto
Returns to normal display.
E5-5
FM-8700
3. System settings list [SELECT]
“Setup menu”
The default settings are shown in a screened call of each setting item. Setup menu 1
Manual Position
Menu-1
Menu-2
Setting
L/L and UTC ABLE
2
Auto ack
UNABLE
ROM/RAM
3
Diagnosis (Protected) 652111
Remote loop
Note To cancel the manually entered data, enter 9999 for the UTC.
ABLE No reason Busy Equip disable Unable channel Unable mode ROM RAM EEROM NMEA DMC Rmt station Printer IF Without the [CANCEL] [DIMM] [SELECT] and [ENT] key
Keyboard test Display test Print out test 4
Print out
6
Sound
7
File
AUTO/MANU
EEROM Keyboard click MASSAGE ADDRESS TEL No.
AUTO MANU
AUTO Print out to EEROM content
ON OFF
ON Group ID
E5-6
0 MID X5 - X9
FM-8700
Setup menu
Menu-1
Menu-2
Rom version Protectio n Own-ID number
RT and DSC version
Menu-3
ID (MMSI) Receiver DMC RT1:USA/WX
RT1:private RT2:Hook work CH16 RT2:Hool work SP RT3:Time out RT1-7 9
System
RT4:AF monitor RT5:Auto 1W RT6:Dual watch RT6:Scanning RT7:Auto SQ
Channel
Tx power
INTL, USA,WX, PRIV
CH (DUP/SIMP) HI/L
Own ID VHF[2] ON[1] OFF[2] OFF[1] ON[2] OFF[1] ON[2] ON[1] OFF[2] ON[1] OFF[2] OFF[1] ON[2] OFF[1] ON[2] ON[1] OFF[2] ON[1] OFF[2] ON[1] OFF[2] LOW (06) HIGH (16) HOLD (30) ENABLE CH (TX /RX/UN) TELECOM (SIMP/DUP) TX POWER (HIGH/LOW) CH60 CH88 CH14 CH60 CH88 CH14
English[1] Japanese[2] Ordinary alarm ON/OFF TYPE : 0, 1, 2, 3,4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
LCD Language ALM
Note
Pass word:652111
CH70[1] DSC:RC VR/DMC
Setting
Main VHF:CH70 Sub VHF:VHF
ON:DMC-5 is connected By request By request
To clear EEROM content. (NMI SW ON)
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 06 16 30
By request
Default:750
Power adjustment required.
Default:100
Power adjustment required.
English ON 1
E5-7
To clear EEROM content. (NMI SW ON) When two sets are installed, designate one as Main (CH70) and the other as Sub (VHF).
FM-8700
4. Jumper settings
Handset -HS-6000FZ6 (Carbon MIC) -HS-6000FZ5 (Dynamic MIC) MIC Receptacle Box -RBD-VHF (For Carbon MIC) -RBD-VHF –B (For Dynamic MIC)
E5-8
FM-8700
5. Changing ID (MMSI) and Private mode Procedures 1. Press the NMI switch S1 on the CONTROL board with the power turned on.
2. Turn off the power. 3. Turn on the power again, then this display will appear. Clear < Do not clear > NO RAM EEROM ALL
4. Select EEROM with the arrow key and press [ENT] key. A display “Now WRITING EEROM” will appear, and after about 15 seconds another display “Turn off the power” will appear. Then, turn off the power, 5. Turn on the power again, then this display will appear. TEST VHF ch70 manual
6. Press [SELECT] key first and [9] key next, then this display will appear. System V P ID DSC CH PO L
7. Put the cursor on “ID” by pressing [>] key and press [ENT] key.
Changing ID number
Enter own identication [digits] MMIS: - - - - - - - -
E5-9
FM-8700
8. Input the ID number of the own ship in nine digits, check to be sure about the input number, and press [ENT] key. (When a wrong number is input, press [CANCEL] key and enter the correct number.) System V P ID DSC RT CH PO L
9. Put the cursor on “RT” and press [ENT] key twice. RT1-Mode:private OFF[1] ON[2]
10. After the selection, press [CANCEL] key. System < RT 1-7 > V P ID DSC RT CH PO L
11. Put the cursor on “P”, and press [ENT] key. Protection
ON OFF
12. Select “ON”, and press [ENT] key. (By pressing [ENT] key again, the input ID number can be confirmed. If the number is incorrect, input the correct number, from the first step.) 13. Return to the normal display by pressing [CANCEL] key several times. Watch VHF ch70 auto
The ID number to be input must be the MMSI number that is allocated to the ship. Again, check that the input number is correct.
E5-10
FM-8700
6. Adjustment 6.1 TX Power Adjustment Connect Power meter and Dummy load or Antenna as illustrated below. Handset
FM-8700
50Ω
DX-8700
TX ANT CH60 (DUP/SIMP) CH14 (DUP/SIMP) CH88 (DUP/SIMP)
50Ω
50Ω
50Ω Power meter
ANT :156.325MHz :156.7MHz :157.425MHz
High Power Low Power
50Ω Dummy load or Antenna
:21 - 25W :0.7 - 1.0W
To compensate a power loss in the duplexer, set the maximum power and reduced power in “DUP” and “SIMP” modes on CH14, CH60, CH88.
Must be “Protection OFF”. *Referring to section : 2.2 Changing System settings
(Protection ON/OFF)
1. At the normal display, press [SELECT] and [9] keys in this order. 2. Select “P” by pressing the [>] keys, then press the [ENT] key. 3. Type password :652111. 4. Select “Protection OFF” by pressing the [>] key, then press the [ENT] key. “Protection OFF” 5. Select “PO” by pressing the [>] key, then press the [ENT] key. The following display appears. SIMP power - CH60 SELECT: [MODE] [CH] [H/L] sw
Adjust high power and low power on SIMP (INTL) CH14, CH60 and CH88 as follows. 6. For example to adjust high power on SIMP (INTL) CH60; While pressing the PTT switch, rotate the CHANNEL knob to set high power data. Release the PTT switch when the desired value (power data) appears on the channel display.
E5-11
FM-8700
7. Then, press [HIGH/LOW] key. The following display appears. Adjust low power by doing the same as high power. SIMP power - CH60 SELECT: [MODE] [CH] [H/L] sw
8. Change the channel to SIMP CH14 or CH88 with the CHANNEL knob. Adjust high power and low power by doing the same as CH60. 9. Change the channel to DUP CH60, CH14 or CH88 with the CHANNEL knob. Adjust high power and low power by following the same manner as above. DUP power - CH60 SELECT: [MODE] [CH] [H/L] sw
10. After completion of power adjustment on DUP and SIMP modes, adjust the output power for PRV mode in the same procedure as that for INTL mode. Note that in PRV mode, you can adjust power for each channel. Must be “Protection ON”. *Referring to section : 2.2 Changing System settings (Protection ON/OFF) 11. After completion of power adjustment on all modes, press the [CANCEL] key. 12. Select “P”, then press the [ENT] key. 13. Select “ON”, then press the [ENT] key. “Protection ON” 14. To return to the normal display, press the [CANCEL] key several times.
E5-12
FM-8700
6.2 TX Frequency Adjustment
Rule: +10 ppm
E5-13
FM-8700
7. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM After replacing the ROM on the CONTROL board or if the unit is not working properly, be sure to press the NMI switch on the CONTROL board after turning on the unit, to clear contents of S-RAMs.
Procedures 1. Press the NMI switch S1 on the CONTROL board with the unit turned on. 2. Turn off the power. 3. Turn on the power again, then this display will appear. Clear < Do not clear > NO RAM EEROM ALL
4. Clear to RAM, EEROM or ALL. RAM clear When select to RAM, press the [ENT] key; Turn on the power again, then this display will appear. Watch VHF ch70 auto
E5-14
FM-8700
EEROM or ALL clear Select EEROM or ALL with the arrow key and press [ENT] key. A display “Now WRITING EEROM” will appear, and after about 15 seconds another display “Turn off the power” will appear. Then, turn off the power. Turn the power on again. To set the initial settings. Refer to section “2.1 Initial settings”. TEST VHF ch70 manual
Note) Before clearing EEROM, print out the contents of EEROM by pressing the [4] key.
Contents of S-RAM and EEROM Item RAM
EEROM
ALL
Purpose Clears all contents of the S-RAMs. (incl. transmitted and received messages, prepared in messages in FILE menu: [SELECT] [7], and [1], [2], [4], [6]. Clears contents of EEROM. *Settings of [SELECT] [ALARM] *Settings of [SELECT] [9] (System setting data) Note) Ship’s ID(“ID”) and Private ON/OFF setting is cleared. Channel preset data (“CH”) and power adjustment data (“Po”) are not restored to default setting when clearing the EEROM. *Settings of [SELECT] [7] (Message in files) Clears all contents of the S-RAMs and EEPROM. (There is not clear ID and Private mode settings in [SELECT] [9] menu.)
E5-15
FM-8700
8. Self test
E5-16
FM-8700
E5-17
FM-8700
FM-8700 Self test flow
PTT TEST
PTT ON
H8 CPU has in RAM the diagnostic DUP unit:NG
DUP unit OK ?
result for each PTT ON. For NG, V25 CPU is notified.
TX Power>15W
XMT POWER:NG
END OF PTT TEST
SELF TEST TEST ON
TX ON without PA TX PLL Lock:NG T/R PLL Lock?
NO
RX PLL Lock:NG
YES
CH70 RCVR :NG memorized
AF YES LOOP BACK TEST OK?
CH70 LOOP BACK TEST OK? YES RCVR :NG memorized
NO
AF LOOP BACK TEST OK?
RCV LOOP BACK TEST OK? YES
RCVR:NG
PTT ON TEST OK?
NO
NO
CONTROL:NG
CH70 RCVR:NG
PTT ON TEST OK? YES
YES
NO
In
CH70
LOOP-BACK
TEST
and
RCV
LOOP-BACK TEST, all other than PA is put in transmission status and DSC signal is transmitted,
XMT POWER:NG
which is received at CH 70 receiver and RX board to see if it is a right signal by analyzing the signal VHF DSC:GOOD
VHF DSC:NG
with the control. This test allows collective diagnosis of the transmitter, CH 70, RX receiver
END
and control. In AF LOOP-BACK TEST, the test described above is performed only with the control by looping the signal back within the control.
E5-18
FM-8700
9. Private Channel list
E5-19
FM-8700
E5-20
FM-8700
E5-21
FM-8700
10. Power and Frequency measurement of
VHF Radiotelephone The VHF CH 70 is not transmitted by pressing a PTT switch. To measure the output power of VHF CH 70, follow the below. The radiotelephone must be set to CH 70. The FM-8700 muse be set the protection OFF. Refer to section “2.2 Changing System settings”. Protection OFF TEST
Press [SELECT], [
] key.
INSPECTION TEST < > TONE
Select "TONE", press [ENT] key.
DIS-CH
Tone test < > CR MARK SPACE DOT T1 T2
MARK tone:1700Hz-400Hz SPACE tone:1700Hz+400Hz DOT:1700Hz+400Hz
Don't select T1 and T !!
Select "MARK or Space", press PTT SW. For example, select "Space". Tone test < Space tone > Now doing
Tx ON (Measurment: power and frequency)
Tone test < > CR MARK SPACE DOT T1 T2
156.525MHz (+10ppm)
Release PTT SW.
Press [CANCEL] key several times.
TEST
E5-22
Section F1. DMC-5 1. Connection FM-8500 FM-8700 FM-7500 FM-7000+DSC-5/5V FM-8000+DSC-8VP
MF/HF RT (FS-5000/1562/etc) WR (AA-50) DSC (DSC-5/6/60)
TB-6
TB-1
TB-2
TB-5
TB-4
TB-7
(RS-410N)
DMC
INMARSAT-C (Class 2)
Tx/RX data (C.Loop)
NO.2 VHF +DSC System
Tx/RX data (C.Loop)
NO.1 VHF +DSC System
Tx/RX data (C.Loop)
MF/HF DSC System
DMC-5
EGC RECV
2182 kHz WR
NAVTEX
EGC-5
AA-45B/46B
NX-500
AL-5/5F
TB-9
AF
TB-8
AF
ALARM
TB-3
(RS-410N)
ALARM
TB-10
ALARM (RS-410N)
10-40V DC
FELCOM-10/11/12
AL-5/5F
2. System settings Each port must be set up through the menu. Selecting equipment as follows. 1. Press [SETUP] key. 2. Press [1]:NAVTEX, [2]:2182WR, [4]:VHF DSC, [5]:MF/HF DSC or [6]:SES/EGC key within 2-3 seconds. 3. Select each of content on setup menu by [SELCT] key. 4. Press [ENT] key. Other setup *Alarm tone selection : [SETUP], [7] *Enter Date & time : [SELECT], “TIME”
F1-1
DMC-5
System Settings List The default settings are shown in a screened call of each setting item. Menu NAVTEX [SETUP] Receiver [1] 2182kHz WR
[SETUP] [2]
VHF DSC
[SETUP] [4]
MF/HF DSC
[SETUP] [5]
SES/EGC
[SETUP] [6]
Alarm Tone Selection
[SETUP] [7]
Date & Time
[SELECT] ”TIME”
Setting OFF ON OFF ON Monitor-OFF OFF No.1 No.2 OFF J3E H3E F1B OFF EGC SES+EGC SES(EGC) Type Key click YY-MM-DD-U TC
ON or OFF
Note When installed in NAV bridge, setting may OFF.
OFF
2182kHz Watch keeping is not required from Feb. 1999.
No.1
When VHF No.1out of order, select VHF No.2.
J3E
Select class of emission for distress communications.
SES(EGC)
FELCOM-10/11/12 connected.
0 to 9 (Default:1) ON or OFF YY-MM-DD -UTC
The user may select receiver alarm tone. The UTC time used for Distress alert message.
Note) The UTC time when it was entered with the DMC-5 is given priority more than the DSC-5/6/8VP and FM-8500/8700. Condition of the UTC time setting from DMC-5 to DSC-5/6/8VP, following below. *When the DMC-5 entered the UTC time *When the DMC-5 counted 00:00. *When the DMC-5 or DSC-5 turn on power. *When the DMC-5 changed in NO.1 or No.2 VHF selection setup menu. *When the DMC-5 set from OFF to ON in the MF/HF setup menu.
F1-2
DMC-5
3. Clearing Contents of S-RAM and EEROM After replacing the ROM on the CONTROL board or if the unit is not working properly, be sure to press the NMI switch on the CONTROL board after turning on the unit, to clear contents of S-RAMs
Procedures 1. Press the NMI switch S1 on the CONTROL board with the unit turned on. 2. Since the power is automatically cut off, turn the power on. 3. The screen should look something like this: Clear NO RAM1 RAM2 EEROM
4. Select RAM 1, RAM 2 or EEROM by pressing the [SELECT] key. RAM 1 or RAM 2 clear When Select to RAM 1 or RAM 2, press the [ENT] key; The power is automatically cut off. Turn the power on again manually.
F1-3
DMC-5
EEROM clear When select to EEROM, press the [ENT] key; After about 15 second the power is automatically cut off. Turn the power on again manually. Muse be system settings. (Refer to section “2. System settings”)
Contents of S-RAM and EEROM Item RAM 1 RAM 2 EEROM
Purpose Clears work area only in the S-RAMs. Clears all contents of the S-RAMs (incl. received messages and ship’s position data.) Clears all contents of the S-RAM and EEROM. (Settings of combined equipment, etc. [SETUP] [1] and [7]
F1-4
DMC-5
4. Self test
F1-5
Section G1. FELCOM 10 1. Connection IC-100 FURUNO
Receiver Call Unit
Distress Alaert Unit
IC-301
IC300 or DMC-5
ANT Printer DTE1
DMC
REMOTE A
IC-500 REMOTE B NC
RP
IC-200 NMEA) GLL, RMA, RMB, RMC, VTG, WPL
NMEA/CIF NC
NMEA/CIF DTE2
24VDC
24VDC
EGC Printer (PP-505) or 2nd Terminal
2. System settings 2.1 System setup: [F5] 1. Press [F5] to display the System menu. 2. Press [Enter] or [1] to display the System setup screen.
3. Necessary settings are as below. *System Date *Preferred NCS *SES Operation Mode
(DET installed only one) YY-MM-DD AUTO INMARSAT-C
G1-1
Printer
PP-500 Key Key board CONTROL NC
AC
FELCOM 10
*Nav port *DTE 2 Port Sub -addr. *Message Output Port *Polling Output Port
Auto 001 DTE1 DTE1
2.2 Terminal setup: [F6] 1.Press [F6] to display the Terminal menu.
2. Set the “DET Type” to Main.
2.3 Updating a Distress Alert: [F10] 1. Press [F10] key, and [2] key. The display should look like below. Necessary settings are as below.
*Set the CES ID The default CES ID is a current NCS (Factory setting is 144, AOR-ENCS). Tap the Space Bar to display the LES ID list. Select a suitable CES by the [↓] key followed by the [Enter] key. *Protocol Select “Maritime”. *Nature Set to “Unspecified”.
G1-2
FELCOM 10
3. Jumper wire setting
(CPU Board ROM: U1 Ver 1650041102B and after)
3.1 EGC MSG. Alarm Output ON/OFF setting
G1-3
FELCOM 10
3.2 For Data Format (NMEA/CIF) JP 1 setting NMEA : Put a jumper to NMEA side (GLL, RMA, RMB, RMC, VTG, WPL) CIF : Put a jumper to CIF side
CPU Board
CPU Board
16P0043-2: ROM(U1) 1MB 16P0043-3: ROM(U1) 4MB
Note) U1 (EPROM): Program and Return/Forward ID Installed.
EGC MSG. Alarm Output ON/OFF setting jumper.
G1-4
FELCOM 10
4. System status monitor Press [F8], [1] key to display the System Status Monitor.
System Status Monitor Display
G1-5
FELCOM 10
G1-6
FELCOM 10
5. S-RAM Clear The S-RAM clear is needed when the characters are corrupted, and when the three ROMs on the CONTROL board are replaced. To clear contents of S-RAMs, use the NMI switch on the rear panel as below. Procedure 1. Turn the power on. 2. After characters are displayed on the screen, press the NMI switch.
NMI SW
REMOTE A
REMOTE B
PRINTER
CONTROL
CIF/NMEA
Rear panel view of IC-500 3. After several seconds, the normal display comes on automatically.
G1-7
FELCOM 10
6. Menu Tree
G1-8
FELCOM 10
FQ5-93-025 1993-07
7. FURUNO Information
G1-9
Section G2. FELCOM 11 1. Connection CIF/NMEA
IC-111 FURUNO
24VDC
NC CONTROL
NC REMOTE B
IC-511
Printer
NC
Receiver Call Unit IC-301
5D-FB-CV (30 m) 8D-FB-CV (50 m) 12D-SFA-CV (100 m)
Distress Alert Unit IC300
IC300
DTE1
Key Key boaerd
COM1
Printer
NC
IC-211
IB-581
24VDC NMEA
Printer
PP-510
COM2
BUZZER
Note) CPU2 Ver 105 and after ; Additional BWC and BWR.
24VDC
or
DMC
GLL, RMA, RMB RMC, VTG, WPL
REMOTE A
ANT
or DMC-5
Printer
PP-510
Key Key boaerd
DTE2 Option
24VDC
DATA GPS Rx board
EGC Printer (PP-505) or 2nd Terminal
2. System settings 2.1 System setup: [F5] 1. Press [F5] to display the System menu. 2. Press [Enter] or [1] to display the System setup screen.
3. Necessary settings are as below. *System Date *Preferred NCS *MES Operation *Nav port
(DTE installed only one) YY-MM-DD AUTO INMARSAT-C INT or EXT (Depend on installation) INT: Internal GPS Board EXT: External Equipment
G2-1
FELCOM 11
*DTE 2 Port Sub -addr. *Message Output Port *Polling Output Port
001 DTE1 DTE1
2.2 Terminal: [F6] 1.Press [F6] to display the Terminal menu.
Terminal: IC-511
Terminal: IB-581 2. Set the “DET Type” to Main.
2.3 Updating a Distress Alert: [F10] Press [F10] key, and [1] key. The display should look like below. Necessary settings are as below.
* LES ID The default LED ID is a current NCS (Factory setting is 144, AOR-ENCS). Tap the Space Bar to display the LES ID list. Select a suitable LES by the [↓] key followed by the [Enter] key. *Protocol Set to “Maritime”. *Nature Set to “Unspecified”.
G2-2
FELCOM 11
3. Dip switch setting 1. Remote Alarm setting The FELCOM 11 can be connected to remote units Distress Message Button IC-300 or Distress Message Controller DMC-5. Which generates an audible alarm when a distress alert or urgent message receives. The DIP switch (S2) on the CPU Board function as below. All bits are set to OFF at factory. Distress Urgent CPU Board (16P0108)
S2
ON
CPU CPU
1 2 3 4
OFF
S2
Pin # 3 4
Type of Alarm Distress Urgent
OFF Enabled Enabled
ON Disabled (*1)(*2) Disabled (*1)
*1) To change the setting, captain’s agreement is required. *2) This setting is allowed only when EGC alarm generated from the Terminal Unit can be heard at the conning place.
G2-3
FELCOM 11
4. System status monitor Terminal: IB-581 Ternimal: IC-511
The system Status Monitor is always displayed. Press [F8], [1] or [Enter] key to display the System Status Monitor.
System Status Monitor Display
G2-4
FELCOM 11
G2-5
FELCOM 11
5. FURUNO Information FQ5-96-003 1996-02
G2-6
FELCOM 11
FQ5-95-012 1995-07
G2-7
FELCOM 11
6. MES ID The MES ID number is burnt in EEROM U21 on the CPU Board in the Communication Unit. If the CPU Board must be replaced, be sure to restore the original EEROM. Otherwise, you cannot pass or receive traffic.
7. S-RAM Clear
(IC-511)
The S-RAM clear is needed when the characters are corrupted, and when the three ROMs on the CONTROL board are replaced. To clear contents of S-RAMs, use the NMI switch on the rear panel as below. Procedure 1. Turn the power on. 2. After characters are displayed on the screen, press the NMI switch.
NMI SW
REMOTE A
REMOTE B
PRINTER
CONTROL
CIF/NMEA
Rear panel view of IC-511 3. After several seconds, the normal display comes on automatically.
G2-8
FELCOM 11
8. Menu Tree
G2-9
FELCOM 11
9. How to up date the Terminal (IB-581) program 1. Quit the terminal program. - Press keys, [F1] and [8], successively. or, - select "[8]: Quit" in [F1]: File menu, and press [Enter] key. 2. The prompt, "A:\FELCOM11>", will appear on the screen. 3. Insert the floppy disk containing the terminal program into the FD drive. 4. Change to "B" drive by pressing keys, - [B], [:], and [Enter], successively. The prompt, "B:\>", will appear on the screen. 5. To update the terminal program, - press [I], [B], [I], [N], [S], [T], and [Enter] keys, successively. Reference) When installing terminal program for Russian; (1) Successively press keys, - [I], [B], [R], [I], [N], [S], [T], and [Enter]. (2) Pressing [Alt] key while pressing left [Shift] key, alternates the language for composing messages between English and Russian. 6. Then, the updating will be finished, displaying the prompt "B:\>". 7. Turn off once and on again the terminal unit.
Confirming the program version; The version of the terminal program appears on the screen when starting terminal program.
G2-10
Section G3. FELCOM 12 1. Connection IC-112 FURUNO
5D-FB-CV (30 m) 8D-FB-CV (50 m) 12D-SFA-CV (100 m)
Distress Alert Unit DMC-5 Receiver Call Unit
or
IC-303
IC302
ANT DTE1
or IC302
COM1
Printer
DMC1
NC
IC-212
IB-581
24VDC DTE2
DMC2 Option
BUZZER GLL, RMA, RMB RMC, VTG, WPL Note) CPU2 Ver 106 and after ; Additional BWC and BWR.
GPS Rx board
NMEA
EGC Printer (PP-505) or 2nd Terminal DATA
24VDC
2. System settings 2.1 System: [F8] 1. Press [F8] to display the System menu.
2. Press [2] to display the System setup screen.
G3-1
Printer
PP-510
COM2 Key
Key boaerd
FELCOM 12
3. Necessary settings are as below. *System Date & Time *Preferred NCS *MES Operation Mode *Nav port
(DTE installed only one) YY-MM-DD AUTO INMARSAT-C INT or EXT (Depend on installation) INT: Internal GPS Board EXT: External Equipment
*Active port *Message Output Port *EGC Output Port
DTE 1 DTE1 DTE1
2.2 Updating a Distress Alert: [F8] Press [F8] key, and [1] key. The display should look like below. Necessary settings are as below
* LES ID The default LED ID is a current NCS (Factory setting is 144, AOR-ENCS). Press the [Enter] key to display the LES ID list. Select a suitable LES by the [↓] key followed by the [Enter] key. *Protocol Set to “Maritime”. *Nature Set to “Unspecified”.
G3-2
FELCOM 12
3. Dip switch setting Terminal software:1650116103 and before
CPU 2:1650118104 and before
CPU board
All bits of the DIP switch S1 on the CPU board must be set to “OFF” position. If the switch is set to “ON” position, the received call unit IC-303 and/or the distress message controller DMC-5 cannot release alarm signal when a distress and an urgency (including EGC) message are received. Note that the distress alert unit IC-302 dose not release alarm sound when a distress and an urgency message are received. DIP SW No. 1 2 3 4
Alarm type
Distress Urgency
OFF Always OFF Always OFF Output Output
ON
Remark Factory use Not used
Not output Not output
Terminal software:1650116104 and after CPU 2:1650118106 and after Compliance with IMO Circ.862 (Referring to Furuno Information FQ5-1999-015) The buzzer on the Distress/Urgent receiving unit IC-303 does not sound at the reception of the telex routine message. The alarm sound is released when the DIP switch, S1 #3 on the CPU board is turned on. DIP SW No. 1 2 3 4
OFF Always OFF Always OFF
ON
The IC-303 sounds at the reception of the telex routine message. The IC-303 unit does not sound at the reception of the EGC urgency message.
G3-3
FELCOM 12
4. System status monitor
G3-4
FELCOM 12
G3-5
FELCOM 12
5. MES ID MES ID, Forward ID and Return ID is factory programmed. When replacing the CPU Board (16P0148), remove the EEROM from the old board and put it on the new board.
G3-6
FELCOM 12
6. Menu Tree
G3-7
FELCOM 12
7. How to update the Terminal and CPU-2 program 7.1 Terminal 1. Quit the terminal program. - Press [F2] key while pressing [Alt] and [Fn] keys. 2. After a message "OK to quit system? Yes/No" has appeared, - place the cursor on "Yes" and press [Enter] key. A prompt "A:\FELCOM12>" will appear. 3. Insert the floppy disk containing the terminal program into the FD drive. 4. Change to "B" drive by pressing keys, - [B], [:], and [Enter], successively. The prompt, "B:\>", will appear on the screen. 5. To update the terminal program, - press [I], [B], [I], [N], [S], [T], and [Enter] keys, successively. Reference) When installing terminal program for Russian: (1) Successively press keys, - [I], [B], [R], [I], [N], [S], [T], and [Enter]. (2) Pressing [Alt] key while pressing left [Shift] key, alternates the language for composing messages between English and Russian. 6. Then, the updating will be finished, displaying the prompt "B:\>". 7. Turn off once and on again the terminal unit.
Confirming program version With terminal prgram versin -03 after or later : To confirm the version of the terminal program, - press [F1] key while pressing [Alt] and [Fn] keys.
G3-8
FELCOM 12
7.2 CPU-2 The program for CPU-2 on the CPU board in the communication control unit is stored in U26 (Flash ROM), and its updating is executed from the terminal unit. Updating the program is made as follows; Note) U26 stores the loader program and CPU-2 program. For the program updating, the loader program loads the CPU-2 program . 1. Quit the terminal program. - Press [F2] key while pressing [Alt] and [Fn] keys. 2. After a message "OK to Quit System Yes/No ?" has appeared, - place the cursor on "Yes" and press [Enter] key. Then, the prompt "A:\FELCOM12>" will appear. 3. Insert the floppy disk containing the program for CPU-2 into the FD drive. 4. Change to "B" drive by successively pressing keys, - [B], [:], and [Enter]. Then, the prompt "B:\>" will appear. 5. Successively pressing keys, - [U], [P], [F], [1], [2], and [Enter], will show the following message: "About to update FELCOM12 CPU2 software. Press 'Y' to update the software to 165-0118-lxx. If you wish to cancel, Press 'N' key." 6.
- Pressing [Y] key will show the following message: "Loader Version 6.00 Erase wait: 0 sec Write wait: 0 Wait counter=100 TARGET power ON"
7.
- Turning off once and on again the communication control unit will show the following message: "Execute STEP 1 Execute STEP 2 xxxxxx byte transfer Now Erasing xxx percent completed" Note) xxx will count from 000 to 100.
G3-9
FELCOM 12
8. When xxx has counted up to 100 (about 5 minuts later) the following message will appear and the updating will be finished; "Finish version update." "B:\>" 9. Turn off once and on again the communication control unit and terminal unit.
G3-10
Section H1. FELCOM 80 1. Connection
DOWN CON
Terminal (PC)
DTE1
REF RX
AC OUT
For FAX, PC
PRINTER
Class 2 only
TX
UP CON
ANT CONT TB4
IB-310
TEL1 FAX
ANT AC
IB-180
Printer (PP-510)
No. 1 TEL B-FAX
JUNCTION BOX
FAX
IB-311
IB-280
To connect two or more telephones, use junction box IB-311.Cllass
GYRO DTE2 NMEA Terminal (PC)
PC DATA AC IN
FELCOM 80 HSD Terminal (PC)
HSD Terminal
CTRL
(RS-422 or 232C)
CTRL
REF DOWN CON
RX TX
UP CON
IB-680
RX IF
AC OUT
For FAX, PC
PRINTER
Class 2 only
TX IF ANT CONT
TEL1
TB4
IB-310
Terminal (PC)
DTE1 REF
FAX
ANT AC
IB-180
JUNCTION BOX
Printer (PP-510)
No. 1 TEL B-FAX
FAX
IB-311
IB-280
To connect two or more telephones, use junction box IB-311.Cllass
GYRO DTE2 NMEA PC DATA AC IN
Terminal (PC)
FELCOM 80 + HSD (IB680) Note) Refer to FURUNO Information, FQ 5-1999-014. To connect the HSD modem, Inmarsat communication unit must be modified as below. Modification kit comes with the HSD modem, IB-680. 1. Replacement of rear panel 2. Replacement of ROM on SYS CPU and I/O CPU board (SYS: Ver19 or more I/O:Ver.3 or more) 3. Fixing of the connector plate onto the rear panel and wirings 4. Replacement of FILTER board in DOWN CONV unit
H1-1
FELCOM 80
Multiple Telephone/Facsimiles Install the PHONE I/F board (standard supply) in the Communication Unit and connect it to the V. CODEC board as shown below.
Connection of more than one telephone requires Junction Box IB-311. In this case the TEL1 and FAX1 modular jack on the Communication Unit IB-280 is not used. Max. TEL 4 , FAX 2 units IB-311
Junction Box
IB-280
H1-2
FELCOM 80
2. System settings list Settings item Unit AZ CPU IB-180 Board: DIP SW S2 AD Converter Board IB-280 Tx/Rx IF board:S1/S2
Setting
Note
Antenna hatch direction
Depend on the Antenna installation.
Ship’s Stem (Std.Setting): S2-All OFF
Setting of Gyro
Depend on the Gyro specifications.
Default: AC synchro/360X/100VAC
Depend on the Antenna cable length. PB
Function
TEL
FC622SL1WG
The output level of Tx/Rx IF board. Dialing format
Printer
PP-510
Left Margin
DIP SW-ALL OFF PB
*PFX-50
Dialing format Modem speed: 9600(B-FAX) Modem speed:2400 Monitor Language ECM
FAX
Terminal Unit
PC
Cable length 25m or less:S1/S2 H(L)/L(H) 26m or more:S1/S2 H/H—Default [STO] [#] [*] [STO] PP-510 ROM Ver: 1650098100 System program Ver: 1650084010
9600bps 2400bps
Refer to section “3.6 FAX settings:PFX-50”.
ON or OFF Japanese or English OFF
AAB
IMN + 4Char. + X (4Char.:Ship’s name)
Entering IMN & ID
Assigned IMN & ID
DMG message: Ship’s name
4Char.:Ship’s name
Network Setup
Select sea area
[F4][3][7] Reentering AAB: Press [Alt]+[Ctrl], type “ANSWER” CPU2 DIP SW S2#2 ON or Displaying the commissioning menu by commands **Job number & Pass word** - Job number: FURUNOSERVICE - Password : FELCOM80 [F4][6][3] 1:Abbr.ship’s Name 2: Maritime 3:Undesignated [F4][6][4]
*PFX-50 All Memory Clear When the FAX is turned off for a long period, it dose not function properly, became of abnormality of the FAX’s memory (RAM) contents. 1. Turn the power off. 2. While pressing and holding down [1] [3] and [*] keys together, turn the power on. 3. Preset various settings.
H1-3
FELCOM 80
The default settings are shown in a screened cell of each setting item. Setting item Unit
Function
SW Panel SW1
Setting
Note
OFF: Direct call Automatic call ON: Address call OFF: RS-449
IB-680
SW Panel SW2
Terminal Interface ON: RS-232C
SW Panel SW3 SW Panel SW4 SW Panel SW5
Automatic data rate switching Command format Character format
Date rate SW
Data rate
OFF: NO ON: YES OFF: HDCL ON: BSC OFF: 8 bit/no parity ON: 7 bit/odd parity 64k 56k
No.1 TEL: - Register the TEL number: *51* LES 00 Country code xxxxxxx # - Clear the registered number: *51*# Call start with reception of DTR signal from HSD terminal. Interface with HSD terminal. RS-449:D-SUB 37pin RS-232C: D-SUB 25pin Never use both RS-232C and RS-449 terminal on the HSD modem at the time.
- High level data link control - Binary synchronous communication
56k is for USA ISDN circuit
Reference: IB-680) Registering, Deleting Subscriber Number Register subscriber number as follows with the No.1 telephone. The subscriber number may contain 20 digits (*,# cannot be registered). The number can be confirmed by printing the status display. 1. Pick up the handset of the No.1 telephone and confirm dial tone. 2. Dial subscriber’s No. as follows; *51*
aaa
00
bb
xxxxxxxxx
# subscriber number Country code Automatic Dialing Land Earth Station (LES) Prefix for HSD call
Deleting subscriber number Dial [*] [5] [1] [*] [#].
H1-4
FELCOM 80
3. Setting procedure 3.1 DIP switch setting (Antenna unit: IB-180)
H1-5
FELCOM 80
3.2 Tx IF output level setting (Communication unit: IB-280)
H1-6
FELCOM 80
3.3 Gyro Converter setting (Communication unit: IB-280)
H1-7
FELCOM 80
H1-8
FELCOM 80
H1-9
FELCOM 80
H1-10
FELCOM 80
Function of DIP switches and Jumper wires The function of each DIP switch and jumper wire is as shown in the tables which follow.
H1-11
FELCOM 80
H1-12
FELCOM 80
Modification when using DC Step Type Gyrocompass If DC step type gyrocompass is used, modification of the communication unit is required to prevent the fuse of the gyrocompass from being blown. Modification in the field Disconnect the plug mated to J3 on the LED PANEL board (16P0087) at the back side of the front panel of the communication unit. And change the setting of the slid switch S1 on the LED PANEL board.
H1-13
FELCOM 80
H1-14
FELCOM 80
DIP switch and Jumper wire settings by makes and models of gyrocompass The table below shows how to set the AD Converter board for connection with various makes and models of gyrocompasses.
H1-15
FELCOM 80
3.4 Setting of Telephone Change dialing format from dial to pushbutton as follows. The handset should be on the hanger. 1. Press the [STO] key 2. Press the [#] key. 3. Press the [*] key to display “Pb”. 4. Press the [STO] key again.
3.5 Printer: PP-510 Setting
(Ver 1650098100)
For Left Margin
Field modification 1. Replace ROM in PP-510 (Type: 1650098100) and change the DIP switch setting. 2. Update master system FD to version 10 (Type: 1650084010) and make execution FD. Replacing ROM and changing DIP switch setting 1. Remove the printer cover and the ribbon cassette. 2. Slide the print head to far right-hand side.
3. Slide the DIP switch cover leftward to remove it. 4. Replace ROM. 5. Set the DIP switch #1 - #8 to OFF. 6. Line up the left-hand end of the DIP switch cover with point @ and then slide it rightward to set. 7. Set the ribbon cassette and refasten the printer cover.
Note) Ver 1650098100 before Set the DIP switch #4 and #5 to ON.
H1-16
FELCOM 80
3.6 FAX settings: PFX-50 1. Clearing contents of RAM To clear all contents of RAM, turn the power on while pressing and holding down the [1] [3] and [*] keys together.
2. How to set up FAX The setting changes to the factory default if the machine is not used for about one month or more. Follow the steps below to set up the fax. 1. Turn on the fax while pressing and holding down [1] [3] and [*]. 2. Press [AUTO RCV/YES]. 3. Enter ship’s name by referring character code list in the operator’s manual. 4. Press [AUTO RCV/YES]. 5. Enter the fax number of own station. 6. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] twice. 7. Press [FUNCTION/NO] to change line type from DP to PB. 8. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] twice. 9. Enter Year/month/date and time. For example, type 9902101230 for 12:30, February 1999. 10. Press [AUTO RCV/YES]. After 2 seconds, “TEL/FAX” appears. 11. Press [FUNCTION/NO] three times. 12. Press [YES], [NO], and then [NO]. 13. Press [YES], and then [NO] four times. 14. Press [YES]. 15. Press [YES]. 16. Change receiving mode to FAX by pressing [AUTO RCV/YES] several times.
H1-17
FELCOM 80
3. How to turn off ECM Depending on the fax model of the receiving station, necessary is turning off ECM (Error Correction Mode) of the fax PFX-50. The procedure is; 1. Turn on the fax while pressing and holding down [1] and [3]. 2. Press [FUNCTION/NO] [8] [FUNCTION/NO] [FUNCTION/NO] [FUNCTION/NO] and [AUTO RCV/YES] in this order. Now the screen should show “FUNC0=00010010” Note) Press 00010000 in that order to change modem speed from 9600 bps to 2400 bps, 10: 9600bps, 00: 2400bps. FUNC 0=0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 Modem speed 00: 2400bps
10: 9600bps
3. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] several times until FUNC 18=00000110 appears. 4. Press [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [1] [0] to turn off ECM. The third digit from right is for ECM on and off. Note) FUNC 18=0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 ECM ON/OFF
Line MON ON/OFF
0:OFF
0:OFF
1:ON
1:ON
5. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] and [RESET] in this order.
6. Turn off the unit and turn it on again.
H1-18
FELCOM 80
Reference)
H1-19
FELCOM 80
Setting Modem Speed, Turning Line Monitor ON/OFF B-FAX: 9600bps
Changing dialing format Change dialing format “Pulse” to “Pushbutton”. See page H1-19.
H1-20
FELCOM 80
Changing language from Japanese to English
H1-21
FELCOM 80
3.7 Terminal settings 1. Entering AAB Press [F4], [3] and [7] in this order at normal display. ! !!
ATTENTION:
CAN
NOT
Enter your ship’s answer back code given by Inmarsat, then press the [Enter] key. Normally, answer back code consists of telex IMN given by Inmarsat and four characters your applied to Inmarast for. EX) TELX IMN No. 4characters X 343164830 JFKS X Reentering AAB 1. Press [F4], [3] and [7] in this order at normal display. 2. While pressing and holding down both the [Alt] and [Ctrl] keys, enter cipher code; [A] [N] [S] [W] [E] [R] The AAB stored in the memory is erased.
H1-22
FELCOM 80
2. Entering IMN 1. Turn the Communication Unit off and turn on pin#2 of DIP switch S2. OR Displaying the commissioning menu by commands [F4][6] **Job number & Pass word** - Job number: FURUNOSERVICE - Password : FELCOM81
2. Turn the Communication Unit on. 3. On the Terminal Unit (PC), press [Esc] to display the normal display and then press [F4] and [6] to display the Communication Unit Setup menu. 4. Press [6] and [Enter] key to display the Commissioning menu. 5. Press [6] followed by the [Enter] key. The following display appears.
6. Enter appropriate number followed by the [Enter] key.
7. Press [Back Space] to clear data and enter terminal ID number given by Inmarsat. 8. Press [>] and enter INM followed by the [Enter] key. 9. To enter other INMs, repeat steps 6 to 8. 10. Press [E] and [Enter] to return to the Commissioning menu. Note) The OID/DID number assigned from Inmarsat are; Voice : 01 –0F TELEX : 31 – 3F FAX : 11 – 1F HSD 56k: 42 * DATA : 21 – 2F HDS 64k: 41 * *: In rare cases, 56k HSD: 41 and 64k HSD: 42; 56k HSD: 41 and 64k HSD: 51.
H1-23
FELCOM 80
3. Setting up DMG message (Class 1 only)
4. Setting up Network menu
H1-24
FELCOM 80
4. Self Test 1. By PC
Note ) Self-test results are printed out By No.1 Telephone [*] [9] [0] [#]
H1-25
FELCOM 80
2. Description of Status Monitor Display (on PC)
H1-26
FELCOM 80
H1-27
FELCOM 80
H1-28
FELCOM 80
5. How to update Terminal Program
H1-29
FELCOM 80
Reference) Making System Program Procedure 1. Turn on the PC. (C:\>) 2. Insert the FELCOM 80 system program disk in disk drive of PC. 3. Type “a:install”.
(C:\>a:install)
4. Press the [Enter] key. System program is copied to hard disk. 5. Remove system program disk and insert blank floppy disk. 6. Press [Enter] key. First the disk is formatted. It takes about one minute. After formatting is completed, the MS-DOS and the FELCOM 80 system program are automatically copied to the blank disk. 7. The calender (date) format display appears. Select format desired. 8. To sellect the American format, for example, press [2] and [Enter]. The date appears at the top right corner on the normal display. 9. Specify directory where to store TELLEX message. You may select the default name of “TELEX” by selecting “Yes”, or use a different name selecting “No”. 10. When the display shows c:\> turn off the power.
H1-30
Section H2. FELCOM 81 1. Connection 8D-FB-CV (30m) 12D-SFA-CV (100m)
IB-281
KEY Board
TX/RX RF
Terminal (IB-581)
VDU MAX. 3set
IB-281
IB-301
Class 2 only
PRINTER
IB-350
Printer (PP-510)
TEL1
TEL
TEL6
FAX
DATA
Terminal (PC)
IB-360 JUNCTION BOX
IB-312 GYRO
AD-100
NMEA
MCT-1540-55
CARD READER
24VDC
FELCOM 81
EX) Dial UP Router PC
DATA-1(RS-232C) DATA-1(RS-422)
AC100/200V
IB-681
RX IF
RX IF
TX IF
TX IF
REF
REF
HSD CTRL
HSD CTRL
KEY Board 8D-FB-CV (30m) 12D-SFA-CV (100m)
IB-281
TX/RX RF VDU
MAX. 3set
IB-281
IB-301 IB-350
PRINTER
Terminal (IB-581)
Class 2 only
TEL1
TEL
TEL6
FAX
DATA
Terminal (PC)
IB-360
IB-312 GYRO
JUNCTION BOX
AD-100
NMEA
MCT-1540-55
CARD READER
24VDC
FELCOM 81 + HSD (IB681) Note) To connect the HSD modem, Inmarsat communication unit must be modified. Refer to the IB-681 installation manual.
H2-1
Printer (PP-510)
FELCOM 81
2. System settings list Settings item Unit IB-181
Limit switch
Function Antenna hatch direction
IB-281
RF CONV board:R135
Tx RF signal output level.
TEL
FC622SL1WG FC755D1
Dialing format
*PFX-50
Dialing format Modem speed: 9600 (B FAX) Modem speed:2400 Monitor Language ECM
FAX
AAB
Termin al Unit
IB-581
Entering OID/DID
Setting
Note
Depend on the Antenna installation. Depend on the Antenna cable length. Pb: Pushbutton DIP SW #1 ON PB
Cable length 8DFB-CV 10 to40m:Marked position (default) 40 to 50m:CW MAX. 12DSFA-CA 50 to 100m:CW MAX. [STO] [#] [*] [STO]
9600bps 2400bps
Refer to section “3.4 FAX settings:PFX-50”.
ON or OFF Japanese or English OFF IMN 4Char. X
Assigned OID/DID
DMG message: Ship’s name
Ship’s name :4Char.
Network Setup
Select sea area
[F4][3][8] Reentering AAB:[Alt]+[Ctrl] type “ANSWER” CPU2 DIP SW S2#2 ON or Displaying the commissioning menu by commands **Job number & Pass word** - Job number: FURUNOSERVICE - Password : FELCOM81 [F4][6][3] 1:Abbr.ship’s Name 2: Maritime 3:Undesignated [F4][6][4]
*PFX-50 All Memory Clear When the FAX is turned off for a long period, it dose not function properly, became of abnormality of the FAX’s memory (RAM) contents. 1. Turn the power off. 2. While pressing and holding down [1] [3] and [*] keys together, turn the power on. 3. Preset various settings.
H2-2
FELCOM 81
The default settings are shown in a screened cell of each setting item. Setting item Unit SW Panel DIP SW#1
Function
Setting
OFF: Direct call Automatic call ON: Address call OFF: RS-449
IB-681
SW Panel DIP SW#2
Terminal Interface ON: RS-232C
SW Panel DIP SW#3 SW Panel DIP SW#4 SW Panel DIP SW#5
Automatic data rate switching Command format Character format
Date rate SW
Data rate
OFF: NO ON: YES OFF: HDCL ON: BSC OFF: 8 bit/no parity ON: 7 bit/odd parity 64k 56k
Note No.1 TEL: - Register the TEL number: *51* LES 00 Country code xxxxxxx # - Clear the registered number: *51*# Call start with reception of DTR signal from HSD terminal. Interface with HSD terminal. RS-449:D-SUB 37pin RS-232C: D-SUB 25pin Never use both RS-232C and RS-449 terminal on the HSD modem at the time.
- High level data link control - Binary synchronous communication
56k is for USA ISDN circuit
Reference: IB-681) Registering, Deleting Subscriber Number Register subscriber number as follows with the No.1 telephone. The subscriber number may contain 20 digits (*,# cannot be registered). The number can be confirmed by printing the status display. 1. Pick up the handset of the No.1 telephone and confirm dial tone. 2. Dial subscriber’s No. as follows; *51* aaa 00 bb xxxxxxxxx # subscriber number Country code Automatic Dialing Land Earth Station (LES) Prefix for HSD call
Deleting subscriber number Dial [*] [5] [1] [*] [#].
H2-3
FELCOM 81
3. Setting procedure 3.1 Adjustment of limit switch
(Antenna unit: IB-181)
3.2 Tx RF output Level setting
(Communication unit: IB-281)
The longer the antenna cable the more the TX RF signal is attenuated. Adjust potentiometer R135 on the RF CONV Board according to antenna cable length as follows:
The IB-281, right side view
H2-4
FELCOM 81
3.3 Setting of Telephone 1. FC622SL1WG Change dialing format from dial to pushbutton as follows. The handset should be on the hanger. 1. Press the [STO] key 2. Press the [#] key. 3. Press the [*] key to display “Pb”. Press the [STO] key again.
3. FC755D1 Change dialing format from dial to pushbutton as follows. 1. Insert tip of mechanical pencil under plastic cover to remove cover, and then remove memo paper.
2. Use the tip of the mechanical pencil to set DIP switch. Bell OFF
PB
S
ON DIP SW #1: ON
1
2
DP
L
3
3. Restore memo paper and plastic cover.
H2-5
4
OFF
FELCOM 81
3.4 FAX settings: PFX-50 1. Clearing contents of RAM To clear all contents of RAM, turn the power on while pressing and holding down the [1] [3] and [*] keys together.
2. How to set up FAX The setting changes to the factory default if the machine is not used for about one month or more. Follow the steps below to set up the fax. 1. Turn on the fax while pressing and holding down [1] [3] and [*]. 2. Press [AUTO RCV/YES]. 3. Enter ship’s name by referring character code list in the operator’s manual. 4. Press [AUTO RCV/YES]. 5. Enter the fax number of own station. 6. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] twice. 7. Press [FUNCTION/NO] to change line type from DP to PB. 8. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] twice. 9. Enter Year/month/date and time. For example, type 9902101230 for 12:30, February 1999. 10. Press [AUTO RCV/YES]. After 2 seconds, “TEL/FAX” appears. 11. Press [FUNCTION/NO] three times. 12. Press [YES], [NO], and then [NO]. 13. Press [YES], and then [NO] four times. 14. Press [YES]. 15. Press [YES]. 16. Change receiving mode to FAX by pressing [AUTO RCV/YES] several times.
H2-6
FELCOM 81
3. How to turn off ECM Depending on the fax model of the receiving station, necessary is turning off ECM (Error Correction Mode) of the fax PFX-50. The procedure is; 1. Turn on the fax while pressing and holding down [1] and [3]. 2. Press [FUNCTION/NO] [8] [FUNCTION/NO] [FUNCTION/NO] [FUNCTION/NO] and [AUTO RCV/YES] in this order. Now the screen should show “FUNC0=00010010” Note) Press 00010000 in that order to change modem speed from 9600 bps to 2400 bps, 10: 9600bps, 00: 2400bps. FUNC 0=0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 Modem speed 00: 2400bps
10: 9600bps
3. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] several times until FUNC 18=00000110 appears. 4. Press [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [1] [0] to turn off ECM. The third digit from right is for ECM on and off. Note) FUNC 18=0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 ECM ON/OFF
Line MON ON/OFF
0:OFF
0:OFF
1:ON
1:ON
5. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] and [RESET] in this order.
6. Turn off the unit and turn it on again.
H2-7
FELCOM 81
Reference)
H2-8
FELCOM 81
Setting Modem Speed, Turning Line Monitor ON/OFF B-FAX: 9600bps
Changing dialing format Change dialing format “Pulse” to “Pushbutton”. See page H2-8.
H2-9
FELCOM 81
Changing language from Japanese to English
H2-10
FELCOM 81
3.5 Terminal settings 1. Entering AAB Press [F4], [3] and [8] in this order at normal display. ! !!
ATTENTION:
CAN
NOT
Enter your ship’s answer back code given by Inmarsat, the press the [Enter] key. Normally, answer back code consists of telex IMN given by Inmarsat and four characters your applied to Inmarast for. EX) TELX IMN No. 4characters X 343164830 JFKS X Note) Reentering AAB 1. Press [F4], [3] and [8] in this order at normal display. 2. While pressing and holding down both the [Alt] and [Ctrl] keys, enter cipher code; [A] [N] [S] [W] [E] [R] The AAB stored in the memory is erased. 2. OID/DID Settings OID,DID settings are entered through the commissioning menu on the Communication Unit Setup menu. The commissioning menu can be displayed in two ways: by entering a command or changing the setting of a DIP switch. Case-1) Displaying the commissioning menu by commands 1. At the standby display, press [F4] [6] to display the Communication Unit Setup menu. 2. Type FURUNOSERVEICE as the Job No.: [F][U][R][U][N][O][S][E][R][V][I][C][E]. Press [Enter] key. 3. Type FELCOM81 as the password:[F][E][L][C][O][M][8][1]. Press the [Enter] key. 4. Go to the Communication Unit Setup menu and press [6] and the [Enter] key to display the commissioning menu. Go to item case-2)-3 in next page.
H2-11
FELCOM 81
Case-2) Displaying the commissioning menu by changing DIP switch setting 1. Turn off the communication unit. Turn on S1#2 on the CPU2 Board. 2. Turn on the communication unit. 3. OID/DIS setting
9: HSD 56k 64k
TEL
SYS CPU –13 or above
Note) The OID/DID numbers assigned from Inmarsat are; Voice : 01 –0F TELEX : 31 – 3F FAX : 11 – 1F HSD 56k: 42* DATA : 21 – 2F HDS 64k: 41* *: In rare cases, 56k HSD:41 and 64k HSD: 42; 56k HSD:41 and 64k HSD: 51
H2-12
FELCOM 81
How to set OID/DID for HSD After the modification of the communication unit for the HSD, the OID/DID for the HSD communication must be set by using the following procedure. 1. Press [F4] [6] to display the Communication Unit Setup menu. 2. Type “FURUNOSERVICE” as the Job No. 3. Press [Enter] key. 4. Type “FELCOM81” as the password. 5. Press [Enter]. 6. Press [6] [Enter] to display the commissioning menu. 7. Press [6] [Enter] to display the OID/DID registration menu. 8. Press [9] for HSD ID registration. 9. Enter the ID(s) assigned by the organization for the HSD64 and/or HSD56 communication. 10. Set the telephone terminal number to be used for HSD call. In the example
below, No.3 telephone is used for HSD call. If provided, the DTMF (Dial Tone Multi Frequency) signal from the HSD terminal can be connected to the telephone terminal on the communication unit IB-281. In this case, the telephone number to be used must be entered on the HSD ID line, but the OID/DID setting for the telephone is not required. If the DTMF signal is not connected to the communication unit and is not provided, no telephone number is entered on the HSD ID line and the No.1 telephone is used for the HSD calling. In the example below, the OIDs/DIDs for the HSD56 and the HSD64 are 41 and 51 respectively. The DTMF signal from the HSD terminal is connected to the No.3 telephone terminal, that is, the calling from the HSD terminal is made by using the No.3 telephone line. Note that no ID is entered on the No.3 TEL/FAX line.
H2-13
FELCOM 81
[OID/DID Registration] TEL FAX 1: 01 -7: Data 2: 02 -8: Telex 3: --9: HSD (64k) 4: --(56k) 5: --E: Exit
H2-14
ID 21 31 51 41
123456789 TEL3
FELCOM 81
3. Setting up DMG message (Class 1 only)
4. Setting up Network Setup menu
H2-15
FELCOM 81
4. Self Test 4.1 IB-581
H2-16
FELCOM 81
4.2 Description of Status Monitor Display
H2-17
FELCOM 81
H2-18
FELCOM 81
H2-19
FELCOM 81
5. How to update the Terminal program 1. Quit the terminal program. - Press [F2] key while pressing [Alt] and [Fn] keys. 2. After a message "OK to quit system? Yes/No" has appeared, - place the cursor on "Yes" and press [Enter] key. A prompt "A:\>" will appear. 3. Insert the floppy disk containing the terminal program into the FD drive. 4. Change to "B" drive by pressing keys, - [B], [:], and [Enter], successively. The prompt, "B:\>", will appear on the screen. 5. To update the terminal program, - press [I], [N], [S], [T], [A], [L], [L] and [Enter] keys, successively. 6. Then, the updating will be finished, displaying the prompt "B:\>". 7. Turn off once and on again the terminal unit.
Confirming program version To confirm the version of the terminal program, - press [F1] key while pressing [Alt] and [Fn] keys.
H2-20
FELCOM 81
Reference) How to use HSD Checker Using MES loop back service, the function of HSD modem can be checked by following the steps below. This test requires the HSD Checker (no code number).
1. Turn on the FELCOM 80/81 and the HSD modem IB-680/681.
2. Confirm that the READY (SYNC&READY) lamp on the front panel of the IB-280/281 comes on.
3. Connect the HSD checker to the “RS-422” or “RS-232C” terminal.
4. Set the DIP switches on the checker. For example, to check the RS422 port, set the
RTS and DTR switched to the lower position, and others to the upper position.
DIP Switches
Figure 1) Front panel of HSD checker 5. Set the DIP switches on the front panel of the IB-680/681 for RS-422 direct-call. -SW1 (Automatic call) Set to OFF :Direct call
ON :Address call
-SW2 (Terminal I/F)
ON :RS-232C
Set to OFF :RS-442
(Depend on connected port.) -SW3 to SW 8
Set to OFF
H2-21
FELCOM 81
6. Register the telephone number for the loop back service. For example;
Register the telephone number
Parth : *51* 222 0061 29 3334699# Burum: *51* 012 0031 10 2947020# You can check register the telephone number ; Press * 9 6 # on the No.1 telephone.
7. Set the DTR switch on the checker to the upper position to commence the call. TX and SYNC LEDs on the HSD modem come on. If TX LED does not light, check DIP switch setting. If the SYNC LED does not come on, the receiver circuit may be defective. CR11 to CR18
DTR switch Figure 2) Front panel of HSD checker
8. LEDs, CR11 to CR18 light irregularly for about 10 seconds. Then, some LEDs come on according to the setting of the sending data pattern switch.
H2-22
FELCOM 81
9. Change the sending data pattern switch setting. If the on/off pattern of the LEDs
CR11 to CR18 changes according to the sending data pattern switch setting, the HSD modem is normal. The sending data pattern switches from left to right do not correspond to the LEDs CR11 to CR18. The synchronization of both patterns depends on the timing.
Sending data pattern switches
Figure 3) Front panel of HSD checker
In the example of Figure 4 ; Sending data pattern: ON/ON/OFF/ON/ON/OFF/ON/ON Receiving data pattern: OFF/OFF/OFF/OFF/ON/OFF/OFF/ON (normal) – left figure ON/OFF/OFF/OFF/ON/OFF/OFF/OFF (abnormal) – right figure
Correct receiving pattern
Wrong receiving pattern
Figure 4) Sending data pattern and receiving data pattern
10. Set the DTR switch to lower position to terminate the call.
11. Clear the registered telephone number: Press * 5 1 * # on the No.1 telephone.
H2-23
Section H3. FELCOM 82 1. Connection One compact communication unit allows us to use full Inmarsat B services: telephone, fax, telex, 9.6k data (MSD), and HSD communications. The FELCOM 82 works from AC power supply, 110 VAC or 220 VAC. There are two models of FELCOM 82: FELCOM 82A (class 1) and FELCOM 82B (class 2). The FELCOM 82A consists of an antenna unit, a communication unit, a handset, a junction box, a printer, a telex terminal unit, and distress alert buttons. The FELCOM 82B does not have a telex terminal unit. The optional multi-communication unit increases the number of telephone and/or facsimile machine that may be connected from 3 sets to 10 sets. A telephone, a facsimile machine, a multi communication unit (PBX), an incoming indicator, and a credit card call adapter are also supplied optionally. The telephone distress alert button may be located at either the IB-362, or at the handset hanger, which utilizes a built in distress alert button. The system requi
IB-182 Antenna unit
8D-FB-CV:30/50m 12D-SFA-CV:100m
Handset & Hanset hanger
Class-1 ANT
IB-882 IB-882/362(Tel DIS)
100/220VAC
HANDSET
VDU
IB-582
24V
Terminal unit
IB-781 Tel or FAX
No.3-1
Credit call adapter & Card Reader No.1 Tel or FAX
MJ-2S
No.2 Tel or FAX
Tel or FAX
No.3-2
MJ-2S
No.3 Tel or FAX
No.3-3
MJ-2S
Tel or FAX
No.3-4
MJ-2S
Tel or FAX
No.3-5
MJ-2S
Tel or FAX
No.3-6
MJ-2S
Tel or FAX
No.3-7
Multi communication unit IB-782
Tel or FAX
MJ-2S
MJ-2S
Gyro
PRINTER
MJ-2S 24V
Class-2
PP-510 Printer
JUNCTION
MJ-2S
IB-313 MJ-2S
Junction box
MSD (9.6k data)
PC (For MSD)
To TEL3 port
Incoming Indicator IB-372
HSD (56/64k)
HSD I/F
PC (For HSD)
EX) KlasHpopper PCMCIA-400/PCI-400
TLX DIS ALT Button IB-352 TEL DIS Button IB-362
AC IN
IB-282 Communication unit
NAV
Tel or FAX
100/220VAC
Gyro
Can not be used when IB-882/362 is used.
Tel or FAX
No.3-8
MJ-2S
Keyboard
AC IN
H3-1
100/220VAC
FELCOM 82
2. System settings 2.1 Heading alignment The system detects the heading direction at every power-up by using the limit switch in the antenna unit. The switch is factory-adjusted so that the antenna is installed with the access hatch located in the stern. When the antenna unit is installed with a directional offset of 90, 180 or 270 degrees, following adjustment is necessary. 1. Mark the four screw locations on the disk. 2. Loosen the four screws fixing the disk. 3. Rotate the disk according to the access hatch position. For example, if the hatch is located on the starboard side, rotate the disk 90 degrees counter clockwise. 4. Tighten the screws. 5. Confirm that the limit switch hits when the antenna points toward the ship’s bow.
Protrusion Limit switch
Disk
Screws fixing the disk, 4pcs.
H3-2
FELCOM 82
2.2 Telephone setting 2.2.1 Changing dialing system The telephone FC755D1 is factory-set to pulse telephone system, so it must be changed to push-button (PB) dialing system by using the steps below. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Use the tip of a pen or other pointed object to remove the plastic cover. Remove the memo sheet. Set #1 of DIP switch to ON. (#2 to #4 remains unchanged; OFF position) Replace the sheet and the cover. Line type Sidetone Bell off PB
S ON OFF
DP
L
2.2.2 Activating echo cancel In voice communications, when a land subscriber speeches into the microphone, he/she may hear own voice like an echo from the loudspeaker on the handset. The echo canceller eliminates the echo from the handset of the land subscriber. The echo cancel function is set on the Echo Cancel menu as follows. Opening the Echo Cancel menu needs a password. 1. Press [FUNC] [7] [4] to open “Echo Cancel” menu. If the password is requested, press [FUNC] [6] [3], and type 5963, followed by [Enter]. Then type [7] [4]. 2. Type the numeric key corresponding to the line to be set. 3. Press [2] to turn on the echo cancel function.
H3-3
FELCOM 82
2.2.3 T/Rx Volume level setting The system provides T/Rx volume (Codec Level) setting function for the voice communication. This function is set on the “Codec Level” menu as follows. 1. Press [FUNC] [*] [2] [6] [3] [3] [2]. “Codec Level” appears as follow.
Codec Level Codec IN: 20 Codec OUT: 80 Enter:[Ent] Quit:[Quit]
2. Set Codec IN level and Codec OUT level to a desired value. Codec IN adjusts Tx level and Codec OUT Rx level. The adjustable range is 10 to 90. 3. Press [Enter] key.
2.3 Fax setting (PFX-50) At installation and when the machine is not used for one month or more, the fax machine must be set up again. 2.3.1 Changing dialing parameters To change dialing parameters, 1. Turn on the fax while pressing and holding down [1] [3] and [*]. (This step is to clear the memory.) 2. Press [AUTO RCV/YES]. 3. Enter ship's name by referring character code list in the operator's manual. 4. Press [AUTO RCV/YES]. 5. Enter the fax number of own station. 6. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] twice. 7. Press [FUNCTION/NO], then, change line type from DP to PB (tone dialing). 8. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] twice. 9. Enter Year/month/date and time. For example, type 0102101230 for 12:30, February 10, 2001. 10. Press [AUTO RCV/YES]. 11. After "01-02-10 TEL" appears, press [AUTO RCV/YES] to change the display to "01-02-10 FAX. "
H3-4
FELCOM 82
2.3.2 Turning on ECM When sending a large number of pages and large images, turn on Error Correction Mode or ECM. Otherwise, a communications error will occur. When the ECM is set to ON, “EC” is displayed on the display and when it is set to OFF, “G3” appears. To turn on ECM; 1. Turn on the fax machine while pressing and holding down [1] and [3]. 2. Press [FUNCTION/NO] [8] [FUNCTION/NO] [FUNCTION/NO] [FUNCTION/NO] [AUTO RCV/YES] in this order. Now the screen should show FUNC0=000100010. 3. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] several times until FUNC 18=00000110 appears. 4. Press [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [1] [0] to turn off ECM. The third digit from right is for ECM on and off. 5. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] and [RESET] in this order. 6. Turn off the unit and turn it on again. 2.3.3 Sending fax via voice line To send fax via voice line, change the modem speed from 9600 to 2400 by following steps below. 1. Turn on the fax while pressing and holding down [1] and [3]. 2. Press [FUNCTION/NO] [8] [FUNCTION/NO] [FUNCTION/NO] [FUNCTION/NO] [AUTO RCV/YES] in this order. Now the screen should show FUNC0=000100010. 3. Press [0] [0] [0] [1] [0] [0] [0] [0]. 00010010: 9600 bps, 00010000: 2400 bps 4. Press [AUTO RCV/YES] and [RESET] in this order. 5. Turn off the unit and turn it on again.
H3-5
FELCOM 82
2.4 Gyro setting The communication unit has a built-in gyro I/F board, 64P1106, identical to the one used in Furuno large radars. The board must be set up according to the type of the gyro connected.
Default setting -Type -Frequency -Rotor Voltage -Stator Voltage -Gear Ratio -Supplied Power
: AC synchro : 50/60 Hz : 60 VAC to 135 VAC : 60 VAC to 135 VAC : 360X : 30 VAC to 135 VAC
GYRO I/F Board (64P1106)
2.4.1 Switch and Jumper Setting The default settings are shown in shaded cell of each setting item. (Turn off the unit to change the settings.) 1) Gyro type Gyro Type
SW1 #4
SW1 #5
SW1 #6
JP1
AC synchro DC synchro DC step Full-wave pulsating current Half-wave pulsating current
OFF OFF ON OFF ON
OFF OFF OFF ON ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
#1, #2, #3 #2, #3, #4 #4, #5, #6 #4, #5, #6 #4, #5, #6
2) Frequency Frequency
SW1 #7
SW1 #8
Remarks
50/60 Hz 400 Hz 500 Hz DC
OFF ON OFF ON
OFF OFF ON ON
AC synchro pulsating current AC synchro pulsating current AC synchro pulsating current DC synchro, DC step
H3-6
FELCOM 82
3) Rotor voltage (between R1 and R2) Rotor voltage
SW2 #1
JP3
20 to 45 VAC 30 to 70 VAC 40 to 90 VAC 60 to 135 VAC
ON OFF ON OFF
#2 #2 #1 #1
Remarks
4) Stator voltage (between S1 and S2) Stator voltage
SW2 #2
SW2 #3
JP3
20 to 45 VAC 20 to 60 VDC 30 to 70 VAC 40 to 100 VDC 40 to 90 VAC 60 to 135 VAC
ON
OFF
#2
OFF
OFF
#2
ON OFF
OFF OFF
#1 #1
SW1 #1 OFF ON OFF ON
SW1 #2 OFF OFF ON ON
SW1 #3 OFF OFF OFF OFF
JP4 #2
JP5 #2
Remarks
#1
#1
Remarks
5) Ratio Ratio 360x 180x 90x 36x
Remarks
6) Supply voltage Supply voltage 20 to 45 VAC 20 to 60 VDC 30 to 135 VAC 40 to 100 VDC
7) NMEA data output interval SW2, #4 selects the output interval either 2 sec. or 1 sec.; ON: 2 sec. and OFF: 1 sec. 8) AD10 data output interval Select to 25 ms by changing the jumper block on JP6 and JP7 corresponding to the output port. Do not use 200 ms.
H3-7
FELCOM 82
H3-8
FELCOM 82
2.4.2 Heading set up If the gyro reading does not match the one displayed on the handset or terminal unit, complete the following procedure with the handset. 1. Press [FUNC] [5] [2] in this order. The “52 Gyro” menu is displayed. 52Gyro Gyro:000 Hold:OFF Enter:[Ent]
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Press the down arrow key to move the cursor onto “Hold.” Press the left arrow key to turn on Hold function. Press up arrow key to move the cursor onto “Gyro.” Enter the gyro reading using numeric keys. Press down arrow key to move the cursor onto “Hold.” When the gyro indication is equal to the gyro reading, press the right arrow key, followed by [Enter] key. 8. Use the [FUNC] key to close the menu. 9. Confirm that the gyro indication on the handset follows the change of the ship's heading.
H3-9
FELCOM 82
2.5 Setup NAV data input circuit Depending on the input signal, nav data input circuit must be modified as below.
J19 J17
R228
U126
R227
8
NAV DATA
390
U133 U133
100
NMEA IN CR56
9
NMEA-2.0(IEC-61162) : RS-422 NMEA-1.5 : C.Loop
J19 short (Default) J19 open
J19
H3-10
FELCOM 82
2.6 Entering answer back code (only for class-1) The answerback code required by telex communication is registered onto the terminal unit, IB-582. The answerback code is 9-digit IMN (Inmarsat Mobile Number) plus 4-letter telex answerback applied to the Inmarsat. To register the answerback code, 1. Press [F4] [3] [8] in this order. Answerback Code
Cursor
--------------------------------------------!! ATTENTION: CAN NOT REENTER !!
2. Enter the answerback code. For example, IMN is 343164810 and 4-letter answerback is JFKS, type; 343164810 (space) JFKS (space) X “X” must be always added for ship earth station. 3. Press [Enter] key.
Reentering answerback code When you enter a wrong answerback code, type ANSWER while pressing and holding down [Alt] and [Fn] to erase it.
H3-11
FELCOM 82
2.7 OID/DID setting Originating and Destination Identifications (OID/DID), assigned by the authority, must be programmed onto the EEPROM, U91 on the CPU board in the field. If not, calls cannot be accepted throughout the Inmarsat B network. The network can identify the system onboard a ship, using factory-programmed Forward/Return IDs, but it cannot identify the end terminal and service type. In other words, the FELCOM 82 must be able to determine which port should ring when a call comes in, and also, whether the call is a voice call, a fax call, an HSD call, etc. in addition, it must know which ID number is utilized on an outgoing call. HEX ID numbers must be programmed into the FELCOM 82 so that the proper port /mode is identified. The OID/DID is used by the LES to identify the desired end terminal and the route between SES (Ship Earth Station). The OID/DID is “HEX” values” detailed below. Voice: 01 to 0F Fax: 11 to 1F Data: 21 to 2F Telex: 31 to 3F 56k HSD 41 (or 42 depending on the authority) 64k HSD 42 (41, or 51 depending on the authority) For example, if the SES installed to provide 3 telephones, 1 facsimile, 1 9.6k data, 1 telex, and 64k HSD, OID/DIDs for these should be: Handset: 01 Telephone-1: 02 Telephone-2: 03 Fax machine: 11 9.6k data (PC): 21 Telex machine: 31 64k data: 42 The following explains how to enter OID/DIDs when you do not receive OID/DIDs, but IMNs from the authority. For example, a given vessel applies for and receives 8 ID numbers. Of these numbers, 3 are voice, 1 is fax, one is Telex, one is MSD, one is HSD/56 and one is HSD/64. If the ID's received from INMARSAT are; 399999990 voice 399999991 voice 2 399999992 voice 3 399999993 FAX 399999994 telex 399999995 9600 data 399999996 HSD/56 399999997 HSD/64
H3-12
FELCOM 82
The OID / DID settings should be: Handset port, voice: 01 Tel-1 port, voice: 02 Tel-2 port voice: 03 Tel-3 port FAX: 11 PC 9600: 21 Telex machine: 31 HSD (56k) 41 (51or 42 depending on the authority) HSD (64k): 42 (41 or 51 depending on the authority) In this scenario, a person calling the vessel from a shore phone would call 399999990, and the handset would ring. If they dialed 399999991, the phone that was plugged into port two would ring. If someone wanted to send a FAX to the vessel, they would dial 399999992, and port number 3 (FAX) would then ring. The fax machine would be plugged into port three, and would then answer the call and receive the fax.
2.7.1 Preprogramming OID/DID from terminal unit To preprogram OID/DID; 1. Press [F4] [6] in this order to call “Comm. Unit Setup” menu. 2. Type FURUNOSERVICE on the JOB No. line and press [Enter] key. 3. Type a password, FELCOM82 and press [Enter] key. Note that the password you typed does not appear on the display. Now, you can select “5:Commissioning.” Communication Unit Setup FELCOM82 InmarsatB MES [Communication UNIT IB-282] Copyright (C) FURUNO Electiric Co., Ltd, 2000 (Type “HELP” or “?” for help) [Main Menu] 1:Ocean Region 4:Test 2:DMG Setup 3:Network Setup Enter JOB No.: FURUNOSERVICE Password: FELCOM82 [Main Menu] 1:Ocean Region 2:DMG Setup 3:Network Setup Enter JOB No.:
Not displayed 4:Test 5.Commissioning
H3-13
FELCOM 82
4. Press [5], followed by [Enter] key. 5. Press [6], followed by [Enter] key to call “OID/DID Registration” menu. Communication Unit Setup 2:Ship Position 3:Commitioning Request Switch 4:Telephony Baseband Port Switch 5:Frequency Measurement Switch 6:OID/DID Registration E:Exit Enter JOB No.:6 OID/DID Registration TEL FAX 1:HSET _ _ 2:TEL1 _ _ 3:TEL2 _ _ 4:TEL3 _ _ E:Exit Enter No.:
ID 5:DATA _ 6:TELEX _ ________ 7:HSD(64k) _ (54k) _
6. Press numeric key corresponding to that on which line you enter the OID/DID, followed by [Enter] key. For example, to enter FAX OID/DID for TEL3 line, press [4], followed by [Enter] key.
1:HSET 2:TEL1 3:TEL2 4:TEL3
TEL 01 02 03 _
FAX _ _ _ 11
ID 5:DATA 21 6:TELEX 31 343199710 7:HSD(64k) 42 HSET (54k) 41
7. Type OID/DID, followed by [Enter] key. Note) 1. TEL1 to TEL3 lines are used for either telephone or fax. 2. TELEX OID/DID must be entered together with the telex number. 3. To use the handset on the fax machine for voice communication, a) Enter TEL and FAX OID/DIDs on the same line. For example, the PFX-50 is connected to the TEL3 line, enter 02 and 11 on the TEL3 line. Now the handset on the fax machine can be used as telephone. b) Change the receive mode to TEL. c) Prefix dialing is unnecessary. 4. In item number seven, a phone port may be selected to initiate a manually dialed HSD call. For example, if TEL2 is selected, TEL2 may then be used to DIAL an HSD call. 8. Press [Esc] to close the menu.
H3-14
FELCOM 82
2.7.2 Programming OID/DID from handset To preprogram the OID/DID, 1. Press [FUNC] [5] [9] to call “59 OID/DID” menu. If the password is requested, press [FUNC] [6] [3], type 5963 as a password, and press [Enter]. Then, press [5] [9]. 63 Change Mode User-!Administrator Enter Passwd: Enter: [Enter]
2. Select the desired line. For example, to enter TEL OID/DID onto the TEL1 line, select TELFAX1. 59 OID/DID
59 OID/DID
1 TELFAX1 2 TELFAX2 3 TELFAX3 4 HANDSET Select:[Ent]
5 TELEX 6 MSD 7 HSD 8 PBX Select:[Ent]
H3-15
[1]
59 OID/DID TEL FAX1 NUM OID DID TEL: _ _ / _ _ IMN:__________ FAX: _ _ / _ _ IMN: Enter:[Ent] Quit:[Quit]
FELCOM 82
3. Enter OID/DID and INM. For example, to enter TEL OID/DID of 02 on the TELFAX1 line, press 0202. Press the down arrow key to move the cursor onto the INM line. Type IMN number followed by [Ent] key. a) [Mode] key alternates between numeric and alphabetic entries. b) Wrong entry can be corrected by moving the cursor over it and type new number. c) Press [Ent] key to enter the procedure. 59OID/DID TEL FAX1 NUM OID DID TEL: _ _ / _ _ IMN: __________ FAX: _ _ / _ _ IMN: ___________ Enter:[Ent] Quit:[Quit]
59OID/DID HANDSET NUM OID DID TEL: _ _ / _ _ IMN: __________
59OID/DID TELEX NUM OID DID TLX: _ _ / _ _ IMN: __________
Enter:[Ent] Quit:[Quit]
Enter:[Ent] Quit:[Quit]
TELFAX OID/DID
HANDSET OID/DID
59OID/DID MSD NUM OID DID TEL: _ _ / _ _ IMN: __________
Enter:[Ent] Quit:[Quit]
MDS(9.6k) OID/DID
59OID/DID HSD NUM OID DID 64k: _ _ / _ _ IMN: __________ 56k: _ _ / _ _ IMN: __________ Enter:[Ent] Quit:[Quit]
HSD OID/DID
4. Press [FUNC] key. 5.
Set the password if it is not set yet.
H3-16
TELX OID/DID
FELCOM 82
2.7.3 When IB-782 (PBX) is installed: The IB-782 is connected to TEL 3 port and their OIDs/DIDs are set as below. IB-782 Multi communication unit No.3-1
MJ-2S TEL3-1
Tel or FAX
No.3-2
TEL3-2
Tel or FAX
No.3-3
No.3-8
100/220VAC
LINE
TEL2
TEL3
IB-313 Junction BOX
TEL3-5 MJ-2S TEL3-6 MJ-2S TEL3-7
Tel or FAX
Tel or FAX
JUNCTION
MJ-2S
MJ-2S
Tel or FAX
No.3-7
TEL1
TEL3-4
Tel or FAX
No.3-6
MJ-2S
TEL3-3 MJ-2S
Tel or FAX
No.3-5
No.2 Tel or FAX
MJ-2S
Tel or FAX
No.3-4
No.1 Tel or FAX
MJ-2S
MJ-2S TEL3-8
AC IN
1. Press [FUNC] [5] [9] in this order to call “59 OID/DID”. 59 OID/DID
59 OID/DID
1 TELFAX1 2 TELFAX2 3 TELFAX3
5 TELEX 6 MSD 7 HSD
4 HANDSET Select:[Ent]
8 PBX Select:[Ent]
2. Press [8] to select PBX Mode ON/OFF. 59 OID/DID PBX Mode:OFF ON/OFF
Enter:[Ent] Quit:[Quit]
3. Press [8] to select PBX Mode ON/OFF. 59 OID/DID PBX Mode:OFF ON/OFF
Enter:[Ent] Quit:[Quit]
H3-17
IB-282 Communication unit
FELCOM 82
4. Press the left arrow key to turn ON the PBX Mode. DID (Direct in dial) should be OFF. Press [ENT] to return to Main menu. 59 OID/DID
Main Menu
PBX Mode:ON ON/OFF DID Mode:OFF ON/OFF Enter:[Ent] Quit:[Quit]
1 2 3 4 Display Select:[Ent]
[Ent]
5. Press [5] [9] to call “59 OID/DID”. 59 OID/DID
59 OID/DID 5 TELEX 6 MSD 7 HSD 8 PBX
1 TELFAX1 2 TELFAX2 3 TELFAX3-PBX 4 HANDSET
Select:[Ent]
Select:[Ent]
6. Press [3] to open “3 TELFAX3-PBX” menu. 59 OID/DID EXT:01 NUM OID DID TEL: _ _ / IMN: ___________ FAX: _ _ / IMN: ___________ Enter:[Ent] Quit:[Quit]
7. Enter the port number of the PBX to which the telephone is connected: 01 to 08. Enter OID/DID and IMN.
H3-18
FELCOM 82
2.8 HSD set up This procedure is done from the Administration mode. See “2.8 About password” for how to choose the Administration mode. Press [FUNC Quit] and [8] to select the HSD menu. The HSD menu appears as follows. 1. Dest. No
6. Cammand
2. Call TEL
7. Character
3. Data Rate
8. Ignore DTR
4. Dial Method
9. Print HSD
5. Auto Rate
Destination no. For a direct call key in subscriber’s complete ISDN number, beginning with LES number. Maximum 20 digits may be used. Prefix dialing cannot be used. Call TEL (TEL-1, 2, 3, HANDSET) Chooses the handset or telephone to use for HSD calling. The default setting is Handset. Data Rate (64 k / 56 k) Choose the data rate from 64k and 56k. The default setting is 64k. Confirm data rate of subscriber before setting. Dial Method
(Direct / Address)
Choose the dial method from Direct (DTR) and Address (V.25bis). The default setting is Direct. -Direct means direct call. When the HSD Terminal turns on communications begins with party registered on the HSD menu. This call is also referred to “Hot Dial.” -Address means address call. Calling begins after specifying subscriber (CRN command) at the HSD Terminal. This call is also referred to “V.25bis Dial.” Auto Rate (ON / OFF) Auto Rate determines whether or not to receive an HSD call whose data rate is different from that set on the HSD menu. The default is OFF which prevents receiving. Use the OFF setting for an HSD Terminal which cannot automatically adjust its synchro clock to match data rate. Command Format (HDLC / BSC) Set the V.25bis command format for address calls sent from the HSD Terminal to the FELCOM 82. Select HDLC (default setting) or BSC depending on specifications of the HSD Terminal.
H3-19
FELCOM 82
Character Format (8 bit None / 7 bit Odd) Choose the character format for address calls sent from the HSD Terminal to the FELCOM 82. Select 8bit (default setting) or 7bit depending on specifications of the HSD Terminal. Ignore DTR (Normal / Ignore) When an HSD call is received, the FELCOM 82 responds to the call without checking “DTR” signal from the terminal units. When “Norma” is selected, the FELCOM 82 check the DTR signal before the response.
2.9 About password The system provides two handset menus: User and Administrator. The administrator menu needs a 4-digit password. The system is delivered with the password set to 0000. When the password is 0000, it has no effect and all menus can be called by anyone. See Chapter 8 menu tree for the difference between the user and administrator menus.
2.9.1 Setting password. To set a password; 1. Press [FUNC] [6] [7] to call “67 Password” menu on the handset. 67 Password Old : - - - New: - - - Conf: - - - Enter:[Ent]
2. Type 0000 on the “Old” line. Asterisks appear in place of the password. 3. Move the cursor onto the “New” line by using the down arrow key. 4. Type the new 4 digit password. 5. Move the cursor onto the “Conf” line by using a down arrow key. 6. Type new password again and press [Enter] key. 7. The message “Password is changed.” is displayed and the Main menu appears 3 seconds later.
H3-20
FELCOM 82
2.9.2 5963 When servicing, you will not use the user password. A special number 5963 unlocks the handset menu. 1. Press [FUNC] [6] [3] to call “63 Change Mode” menu. 63 Change Mode User-!Admin Enter Passwd: - - - Enter: [Enter]
2. Enter 5963 as a password, and press [Enter]. Now you can enter the administrator menu through the displayed main menu. Once you escape from the main menu, the next main menu is of the user mode.
2.9.3 Factory reset of password menu If the user forgets the password, complete the following procedure and the password will return to 0000. Other menu settings will remain unchanged. 1. Press [FUNC] [6] [3] in this order, using the handset. 63 Change Mode User-!Admin Enter Passwd: - - - -
Enter: [Enter]
2. Enter 5963, followed by [Enter] key. 3. While the main menu is on the screen, press [6] [7] to call “67 Password” menu. 67Password Old : - - - New: - - - Conf: - - - -
Enter:[Ent]
4. 5. 6. 7.
Enter 5963 onto the “Old” line. ([Enter] key not pressed) Move the cursor to the “New” line and enter 0000. Move the cursor to the “Conf” line and enter 0000. Press [Enter] key. After "password is changed" is shown, the main menu appears 3 seconds later. 8. Make sure that the user enters a new password. If the menu remains unlocked, all menus are accessible and system settings may be inadvertently changed.
H3-21
FELCOM 82
2.10 Returning settings to factory defaults Clear the RAM to set the menu to factory-defaults. 2.10.1 By using terminal unit To clear RAM contents; 1. Press [F4] [6] to call Communication Setup menu. 2. Type CLR (space) RAM on the “Enter JOB No.” line and press [Enter] key. 3. Type DENPA4 on the “Password” line and press [Enter] key. 4. Wait for a while so that the status display is redrawn. 2.10.2 By using handset To clear RAM contents; 1. Press [FUNC], [6], and [9] in this order to call “Initialize” menu. 69 Initialize All data & logs Are cleared. ARE YOU SURE? Clear:[82] Quit:[Quit]
If you cannot get into “Initialize,” press [FUNC] [6] and [3] to call “Change Mode” menu. Type the password or 5963 followed by [Enter] key if you cannot find the password. The menu changes to Main Menu when you enter password or 5963. While the Main Menu on the screen, type [6] [9] to call “Initialize” menu. 63 Change Mode User-!Admin Enter Passwd: - - - Enter: [Enter]
2. Press [8] and [2] in this order to clear the memory and wait until “Now Initializing” disappears.
H3-22
FELCOM 82
3. Self-test 3.1 Using handset You can get into the test menu only while in the administration mode. If the system is locked, enter the password 5963 to change the mode, and follow the steps below to access the test menu. 1. Press [FUNC] [6] [8] in this order to show the Test menu. 68 Test 1 Version 2 Memory 3 Distress Select:[Ent]
2. Press [2] to carry out memory test. 3. Press [Enter] to begin the test. During the test, “Testing ….” appears. The test result appears as follows. To change the page, press up or down arrow key. 68 Test !! Memory Test MAIN OK TERM OK DEMOD OK Quit: [Quit]
68 Test
!→ ←"
!" Memory Test SYNC OK DECODE OK HANDSET OK Quit: [Quit]
4. If necessary, press [HOLD Print] key to print out the test result. The following message is printed. ------------------
68 Memory Test
----- TEST TESULT ----MAIN OK TERM OK HANDSET OK ANTENNA OK
GLL>RMA; Invalid data is not received. Input data - NAV DATA (NMEA/NONE) On the terminal unit, NMEA or NONE appears. On the handset, NAV blinks when no NAV data or manual position data is input and nothing appears when data is input correctly. - GYRO (OK/NONE/HOLD) On the terminal unit, OK or NONE appears. On the handset, GYRO blinks when no gyro data is input and nothing appears when data is input correctly. During the HOLD, GYRO appears on the handset. TX/RX level - Tx EIRP Level (33/29/25) Indicates Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) from the antenna. The output of the HPA is sent to the SYS CPU via the PCU to calculate EIRP level. The NCS (LES in case of TLX) assigns the EIRP according to the spot beam to be used. Each call from the ship includes azimuth and elevation data of the antenna.
Antenna
HPA LNA Chassis Tx RF
U1
Duplexer
Q5 DET
Power CONT
Power Control
LAN
EIRP 33dBW 29dBw 25dBW
EIRP MON
FSK
PCU
- Tx RF Level (12 to 38) The output of the RF CON board, +7 dBm to +11 dBm is picked up and sent to the SYS CPU. The figure below shows TX RF level (dBm) versus TX RF level indication. The reading is 12 to 38 normally. The error messages #0160 and #0162 are related to the RF CONV circuit.
H3-31
FELCOM 82
RF CON U44
Tx RF Q12
Tx IF 56MHz
+9dBm DET Tx Local
Tx RF Level
40
30 TX RF LEVEL Indcation 20
10
0
5
10
15
20dBm
TX RF output level (dBm) Reference level: 9+2dBm
- Rx C/N (40 or more) The input signal to the SYNC DSP is picked up and sent to the SYS CPU for the calculation of Carrier per Noise (C/N). When the receiver circuit is normal, C/N is 40 or more.
U49
RF CON
Rx IF 10.7MHz
U51
A/D
U29(AD6620AS)
BPSK/QPSK Demodulator
U30
DEMOD DSP
U34
SYNC DSP
U39
DECODE DSP C/N data
CPU
H3-32
FELCOM 82
On the handset, three vertical bars (short, medium, and long) right to the antenna symbol indicate the C/N data or signal quality. The number of the bar versus C/N value is; CESH (HSD)
CESD/CESV (FIU/Data/Voice)
NCSC
(Telex) 59 or more: 3 bars
53 or more: 3 bars
48 or
more: 3 bars 56 or more: 2 bars
50 or more: 2 bars
44 or more: 2 bars
53 or more: 1 bar
47 or more: 1 bar
40 or more: 1 bar
52 or less: no bar
46 or less: no bar
39 or less: no bar
The following figures show the change of C/N when the azimuth and elevation angles are changed from the antenna position where the strongest signal is detected.
C/N LEVEL Indcation
C/N LEVEL Indcation
60
60
40
40 NG
NG
NG
20
NG
20
-20
-10
0
+10
-20
+20
-10
0
AZ Degree
+10
+20
EL Degree
- Rx IF AGC Level (150 or more) AGC level used in the receiver circuit on the RF CON board is detected and sent to the SYS CPU. If it is 150 or more, the circuit is normal.
Rx HSD Circuit Rx IF U3
U8
U13
U16
U20
10.7MHz
Rx Non HSD Circuit
U21
2/2
U21
1/2
U17
(10.7MHz)
AGC ADJ R33
AGC Level
RF CON
H3-33
FELCOM 82
Synthesizer - Rx SYN (OK/NG) The local oscillator for the receiver consists of VCOs of 730 MHz and 815 MHz bands and PLL ICs. When either PLL unlocks, the SYS CPU generates NG signal. RF CON DATA
CR8
CONT
VCO-1
U23 PLL IC
Rx RF 1525-1545MHz
FL5
815M band
1535.7 -1555.7MHz
Rx UNLOCK Ref. 21.12MHz
U4,11 DATA CONT
CR9
VCO-2 730M band
U15 PLL IC
FL7 Rx IF 10.7MHz
Ref. 21.12MHz
- Tx SYN (OK/NG) TX local oscillator, consisting of PLL and VCO oscillates between 1682.4 MHz to 1702.56 MHz. When the PLL unlocks, the SYS CPU generates NG signal.
1682.4 -1702.56MHz
RF CON DATA
CR7
Tx UNLOCK
CONT
U30 PLL IC
Ref. 21.12MHz
Tx IF 56MHz+120kHz
U35 VCO U44
Tx RF 1626.5-1646.5MHz
Antenna controls - Antenna Status (REMOTE/FAULT) When the SYS CPU communicates with the PCU in the antenna unit normally, REMOTE is indicated. If not, FAULT comes on. At power-up, FAULT appears until the antenna initialization is complete.
H3-34
FELCOM 82
- El AXIS (OK/NG) When the elevation axis control circuit is abnormal, NG comes on. - AZ AXIS (OK/NG) When the azimuth control circuit is abnormal, NG comes on. - Cross El AXIS (OK/NG) When the cross-elevation axis control circuit is abnormal, NG comes on. TX/RX channels - Rx Channel Receiving channel in use is displayed. Inmarsat B system uses CH6000 (1525 MHz) to CH14000 (1545 MHz). Default setting is CH06000 (1525 MHz). At power up, when the elevation angle is changed, and when the ocean region is changed, 1) MES searches the strongest spot beam in signal level. 2) After the completion of the channel scanning, the registration of the ocean region is made on the NCS common channel. Thus the NCS knows the area where MES locates. - Tx Channel Transmission channel in use is displayed. Inmarsat B system uses CH6000 (1626.5 MHz) to CH14000 (1646.5 MHz). Default setting is CH10000 (1636.5 MHz). At every call request, MES sends AZ and EL data to NCS. The spot-beam identities are advised to SES via the NCSC Bulletin Board to allow identification of the appropriate spot-beam for signaling purposes. If appropriate spot-beam signaling chancels are not available, the SES will select a global-beam channel.
H3-35
FELCOM 82
3.6 Using two-digit code service (Loopback test) Some LESs in the Inmarsat networks support automatic line test service for telephone and telex. The following describes how to use this function.
3.6.1 Telephone test Using two-digit code telephone service (Code 91), the telephone communication of the system can be tested. 1. Dial the LES followed by the service code of 91. For example, to call Goonhilly, press [0][0][2][9][1][Enter]. 2. You should obtain the tone signal from the LES for 15 seconds. (Tone signal) 3. Wait for 15 seconds after stopping the tone signal. (Silence) 4. Talk into the handset microphone. Your voice will be heard from the handset receiver with a delay. The test will automatically terminate after 30 seconds. (Loop back test)
3.6.2 Telex test Using two-digit code telex service (Code 91), the telex communication of the system can be tested. 1. Call the LES with the service code of 91. ([F3][2], enter LES and service code) The system should receive the following message transmitted from the LES.
01-03-03:10 YMP 003 3413xxxxx ABCD X GA+ 91+ THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPED OVER THE LAZY DOG’S 1234567890 THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPED OVER THE LAZY DOG’S 1234567890 THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPED OVER THE LAZY DOG’S 1234567890 THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPED OVER THE LAZY DOG’S 1234567890
H3-36
FELCOM 82
3.7 9.6k Data test This section describes how to test 9.6k data (MSD) function. The COM port on the PC is connected to the MSD port on the FELCOM 82 communication unit. 3.7.1 Using AT command To check communication between the PC and the communication unit; 1. Double click on the Modem icon in the Control panel window. 2. Select “standard 9600 bps modem.” 3. Select communications port, or COM port to be used for 9.6k data communication. 4. Start HyperTerminal from the Windows 95/98 start menu. 5. In the HyperTerminal window, type AT, followed by the [Return] key. The FELCOM should reply with “OK.” If it does not, check the cable and try again. If there is still no response, check the COM Properties window. Bits per second: 9600 Data bits: 8 Parity: None Stop bits: 1 Flow control: Hardware
6. Type AT&H, followed by [Enter] key. The command list should be displayed.
3.7.2 Connection to Internet provider If a number of the Internet Service Provider is available, try to access to an Internet web site. To do so, 1. Complete the Dial-up Networking setting; Standard 9600bps modem and TCP/IC protocol. 2. Make sure that FELCOM 82 is in stand-by condition. 3. Call Service Provider
H3-37
FELCOM 82
3.8 HSD test This section describes how to test HSD function. 3.8.1 How to use HSD checker Using MES loop back service, the function of HSD can be checked by following the steps below. This test requires the HSD checker (no code number) which operates from 110 Vac and 220 Vac power sources without modification. 1. Connect the RS-449 connector of the HSD checker to the HSD port. 2. Set the DIP switches on the checker for RS-422 signal: set the RTS and DTR switches to OFF position, and S1 to S5 to ON position.
CR11 CR12 CR13 CR14 CR15 CR16 CR17 CR18
RTS
Received Data Pattern OFF
ON
CR9 CR10 CR8
ON
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
Sending Data Pattern
S9
DTR
TxD
CR7
RI
CR6
CR5
CR4
DCD DSR CTS
CR3
CR2
CR1
RxD RxCLK TxCLK
RS422
ON
S8 OFF
OFF
RTS
DTR
S7
S6
RS232C S5
S4
S3
S2
S1
Front panel of HSD checker
3. Turn on the FELCOM 82 and wait until the system acquires NCS common channel. 4. Using the handset, make settings in HSD menu as below. To call HSD menu, press [FUNC] [8]. 1) Dest. No.: 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8)
Parth : 222 0061 29 3334699# or Burum : 012 0031 10 2947020# Call TEL: HANDSET Data Rate: 64k Dial Method: DIRECT Auto Rate: OFF Command: HDLC Character: 8 bit/None Ignore DTR Normal
H3-38
FELCOM 82
5. Set S6 on the checker to the upper position to commence the call. CR11 CR12 CR13 CR14 CR15 CR16 CR17 CR18
OFF
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
CR7
DTR
RI
RTS
Received Data Pattern
ON
CR9 CR10 CR8
S9
S8
Sending Data Pattern
ON
ON
OFF RTS
DTR
S7
S6
TxD
CR6
CR5
CR4
DCD DSR CTS
CR3
CR2
CR1
RxD RxCLK TxCLK
RS422
OFF
RS232C S5
S4
S3
S2
S1
6. Wait for about 10 seconds until on/off pattern of LEDs CR11 to CR18 becomes steady. 7. Change the sending data pattern switch setting, S8 to S15.
CR11 CR12 CR13 CR14 CR15 CR16 CR17 CR18
OFF
ON S14
S13 S12 S11 S10 Sending Data Pattern
CR7
DTR
RI
RTS
Received Data Pattern
S15
CR9 CR10 CR8
S9
S8
ON
ON
OFF RTS
DTR
S7
S6
TxD
CR6
CR5
CR4
DCD DSR CTS
CR3
CR2
CR1
RxD RxCLK TxCLK
RS422
OFF
RS232C S5
S4
S3
S2
S1
If the on/off pattern of the LEDs CR11 to CR18 changes according to the sending data pattern switch setting, the HSD works normal. The sending data pattern switches S15 to S8 do not correspond to the LEDs CR11 to CR18 respectively. The synchronization of both patterns depends on the timing. In the example below; Sending data pattern : ON /ON /OFF /ON /ON /OFF/ON /ON Receiving data pattern: Left figure : OFF/OFF/OFF/OFF/ON/OFF/OFF/ON (normal) Right figure : ON /OFF/OFF/OFF/ON/OFF/OFF/OFF (abnormal) CR11 CR12 CR13 CR14 CR15 CR16 CR17 CR18
CR11 CR12 CR13 CR14 CR15 CR16 CR17 CR18
Received Data Pattern
Received Data Pattern OFF
OFF
ON
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S9
S8
ON
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S9
S8
Sending Data Pattern
Sending Data Pattern
Correct receiving pattern Wrong receiving pattern Sending data pattern and receiving data pattern 8. Set the DTR switch (S6) to OFF position to terminate the call. 9. Change HSD settings for the HSD terminal onboard a ship.
H3-39
FELCOM 82
3.8.2 Connection to Internet service If a number of the Internet service provider is available, access to an Internet web site. 1. Complete the Dial-up Networking setting; HSD modem and TCP/IC protocol. 2. Make sure that FELCOM 82 is in stand-by condition. 3. Call Service Provider
3.9 LED status The LED status is tabulated in this section. 3.9.1 RF CON Board (16P0181) Parts No. Color CR5 GRN
Status Item Blink FSK RX (Looks Monitor like ON)
CR6
GRN
On
TX ON
CR7
RED
Off
TX PLL unlock
CR8
RED
Off
RX PLL1 unlock (815 MHz)
CR9
RED
Off
RX PLL2 unlock (730 MHz)
SNY UNLOCK IND CR7: TX CR8: RX1 CR9: RX2
Remarks This LES is used to check the communication between the antenna and the comm. units. The brightness of the LED depends on FSK data from the antenna unit. This LED is on during TX and off during RX. This LED is on for a while at power up. After the CPU board assigns the channel to be use, LED goes off. The LED should not be on continuously. This LED is on for a while at power up. After the CPU board assigns the channel to be use, LED goes off. The LED should not be on continuously. This LED is on for a while at power up. After the CPU board assigns the channel to be use, LED goes off. The LED should not be on continuously.
CR5: FSK Rx Motor CR6: TX ON
H3-40
FELCOM 82
3.9.2 SW REG Board (16P0180) Parts No.
Color
Status
Item
CR22
RED
Off
Input error
CR33
RED
Off
Over current
CR22: INPUT ER
H3-41
Remarks When input voltage is out of tolerance, the LED illuminates. 1) 100 V spec.: 70 to 80 V or less and 140 to 145 V or above. 2) 220 V spec.: 142 to 165 V or less and 280 to 290 V or above. The LED lights when input over current circuits activates.
CR33: Over CUR * Current through primary winding of main-inverter * Current through primary winding of sub-inverter * +12V line
FELCOM 82
3.9.3 CPU Board (16P0182)
LED DEMOD, SYNC, DECODE, SYS, TERM
SYS F-ROM 165-0145-xxx FPGA
SYS CPU
BATT
JP6 S6:DECODE Reset J32
S5:SYNC Reset S4:DEMOD Reset
S7:FPGA Reset S8:TERM Reset TERM F-ROM 165-0146-xxx
DECODE DSP
TERM DSP
SYNC DSP
DECODE F-ROM 165-0144-xxx
SYNC
S2(SYS dip SW)
J1
DEMOD F-ROM 165-0142-xxx
S1 J26
SYS
DECODE SYNC
H3-42
CR1 CR2 CR3 CR4 CR5 CR6 CR7 CR8 CR9
CR10 CR11 CR12 CR14 CR16 CR18 CR20 CR22 CR23 CR24
CR26 CR27 CR28 CR29 CR30 CR31 CR32 CR33 CR34 CR35 CR36 CR37 CR38 CR39 CR40 CR41
TERM
SYNC F-ROM 165-0143-xxx
CR13 CR15 CR17 CR19 CR21
S3
DEMOD DSP
DEMOD
FELCOM 82
DEMOD Parts No. CR1 CR2 CR3 CR4 CR5 CR6 CR7 CR8 CR9
Check Item
Remarks
Input level of AD converter Status of DEMOD DSP
When the AD converter U49 is in saturation or when TP54 is 2 Vpp or more, the LED comes on. On/off: Waiting signal; off/on: Fast Fourier Transforming; on/on: Tracking signal
Communication mode assigned by SYS CPU to DEMOD DSP DEMOD DSP status
On/off/off: BPSK; on/on/off: Voice; off/on/off: 9.6k FIU; and off/off/on: HSD
Selection of input signal to AD converter
When DEMOD DSP runs, CR7 blinks. Not used On: At communication other than HSD Off: At HSD communication (Input to AD converter is 1.5 times higher in level than other communications.)
SYNC Parts No. CR10 CR11 CR13 CR15 CR17 CR19 CR21
Item Status of SYNC DSP
Communication mode assigned by SYS CPU to SYNC DSP DEMOD DSP status Frame sync signal
Remarks On/off: Waiting Frame Bit and Unique Word Off/on: Acquiring FB twice or losing FB twice On/on: Synchronized On/off/off: BPSK; on/on/off: Voice; off/on/off: 9.6k FIU; and off/off/on: HSD
When SYNC DSP runs, CR7 blinks. After frame synchronization, CR21 toggles on and off every time frame bit signal is received.
DECODE Parts No. CR12 CR14 CR16 CR18
Item Communication mode assigned by SYS CPU to SYNC DSP DECODE reset
Remarks On/off/off: BPSK; on/on/off: Voice; off/on/off: 9.6k FIU; and off/off/on: HSD
Every time DECODE DSP is reset, CR18 toggles on and off.
H3-43
FELCOM 82
CR20
Frame reception
CR22 CR23 CR24
Decoding
CR20 toggles on and off when one frame is received and the data is decoded. CR22 turns on during data decoding. Not used Not used
SYS Parts No. CR26 CR27 CR28 CR29 CR30
Item Alarm Status of SYS CPU Sys CPU idling System status Sync of RX sig.
CR31 CR32 CR33
Remarks When the SYS CPU detects an alarm, CR26 lights. Blinking every second Blinking On; During communication On: When the system synchronizes with the signal. Off: When the system does not synchronize. Not used Not used Not used
TERM Parts No.
Item
CR34 CR35
Not used TERM Status
Off/off: idling; off/on: Codec is in operation; on/off: Ship-to-shore fax; on/off: shore-to-ship fax
CODEC Status
During voice communication; With the coder activating, CR37 is on. With the decoder activating, CR38 is on. With the echo canceller activating, CR39 is on.
CR36 CR37 CR38 CR39 CR40 CR41
Remarks
Not used TERM DSP
When the TERM DSP runs, CR41 blinks.
H3-44
FELCOM 82
3.9.4 PCU Board Parts No. CR25
Color RED
Status On
Item
Remarks
FSK RX Monitor
This LES is used to check the communication between the antenna and the comm. units. The brightness of the LED depends on FSK data from the comm. unit.
Table 7.8.8 D25 FSK
Use this hole to check LED status.
3.10 How to check angular rate sensor Flip the angular rate sensor while the antenna unit is turned on, if the antenna changes the angle by a large amount, the sensor may be defective.
3.11 How to check rotary joint To check the rotary joint, carry out forced transmission, and then rotate the antenna by a hand slowly. If the EIRP reading drops during the rotation, the rotary joint may be defective.
H3-45
FELCOM 82
3.12 Error Messages at the Terminal Unit The tables which follow show the error messages which may appear on the terminal unit. 3.12.1 Call failure error messages Call failure error messages Error Messages Call failed, request data invalid. (4561) Call failed, insufficient digits in service address. (4562) Call failed, invalid service address. (4563) Call failed, invalid credit card data. (4564) Call failed, credit card type not acceptable at this LES. (5522) Call failed, credit card not accepted. (5539) Call failed, long interruption in reception at MES. (4962) Call failed, LES time-out (no assignment). (5569) Call failed, LES time-out (invalid assignment). (5585) Call failed, LES time-out (no service address). (5570) Call failed, LES time-out (no scrambling vector). (5571) Call failed, LES time-out (no credit card data). (5573) Call failed, LES time-out (no return carrier identifier). (5574) Call failed, LES time-out (no MES connect). (5575) Call failed, LES time-out (no answer). (7969) Call failed, long interruption in reception at LES. (5729) Call failed, LES time-out (no MES SCPC carrier). (5826) Call failed, LES time-out (no MES telex carrier). (5825) Call failed, LES time-out (no telex answerback). (5576) Call failed, MES time-out (no scrambling vector ack). (4801) Call failed, MES time-out (no credit card accepted message). (4802) Call failed, no service and no scrambling vector. (5572) Call failed, MES time-out (no terrestrial answer). (4803) Call failed, MES time-out (no ship terminal answer). (4129) Call failed, service not authorised at this LES. (5538) Call failed, service not provided at this LES. (5505) Call failed, service temporarily not available at this LES. (5521) Call failed, no distress service avail. in this OR. (0040) Call failed, call request failure by LES. (0052)
(Continued on next page)
H3-46
Reason • Wrong LES or subscriber number. • Wrong card number in case of credit card.
Remedy
Check Redial.
Unstable reception (MES not synchronized with satellite.)
Unstable communications (LES cannot receive reply from ship.)
Change satellite or LES.
Unstable communications (MES cannot receive reply from LES.)
LES does not offer requested Change LES. service.
FELCOM 82
Call failure error message (con’t) Error Message Call failed, LES congested (no channel unit). (5713) Call failed, terrestrial circuits congested. (5201) Call failed, LES congested (no channel and no circuit). (5202) Call failed, LES congested (no channel). (5457) Call failed, LES congested (no time-slot). (5458) Call failed, terrestrial party busy. (7953) Call failed, terrestrial circuit failure. (8033) Call failed, terrestrial party cleared before MES connection.(8034) Call failed, set-up between LES and terrestrial circuits failed. (7265) Call failed, MES not authorised at this LES. (5537) Call failed, Distress call in progress. (0062) Call failed, MES busy. (0060) Call failed, MES terminal not enabled. (0061) Call failed, antenna circuit abnormality. (0032) Call failed, no channel assignment received from LES. (0033) Call failed, invalid power level assignment. (0034) Call failed, RX DEMOD circuit abnormality. (0035) Call failed, TX MOD circuit abnormality. (0036) Call failed, TX-RF circuit abnormality. (0038) Call failed, Selectively cleared by LES. (0039) Call failed, MES unable to sync. to NCSA in time. (0041) Call failed. (0042)
Reason
Remedy
• Line is busy. • Line trouble.
Try again a little while later.
Ship’s answerback code not properly entered. Call of higher priority in progress. MES not ready for communications. MES not ready for communications.
Checking OID/DID Try again a little while later. Try again a little while later. Setting: Incoming only OFF
Equipment trouble*
* = Another error message accompanies these messages and is printed out. Trouble can be determined from the printout.
Note 1: Number in parentheses is error message number. Note 2: Wait 30 seconds before calling again.
H3-47
FELCOM 82
3.12.2 Antenna trouble error message Antenna trouble error message Error Message
Meaning
OR Change failed. (0100)
Satellite selected from Satellite menu not acquired.
Sky Scan failed. (0108)
Satellite not found although all areas searched.
OR Search failed. (0103)
Couldn’t search for satellite.
OR Search disabled. (0105)
During the satellite search, SCAN function is set to OFF by a SCAN command and the search operation is terminated.
Cause Satellite is tracked based on ship’s position. Equipment trouble or object in transmission path of satellite
Remedy • Select correct satellite. • Check navigator. Check to RF connectors in Antenna unit. LNA defective.
During the sky-scan, SCAN function is set to Sky Scan disabled.(0110) OFF by the command and the scan is terminated. During the step-tracking, the step-track function is Step-track halted. (0113) set to OFF by the command and the tracking is terminated.
Step-track out of bounds. (0114)
In auto ocean region selection mode, this message appears at the boundary between two ocean regions, when the elevation angle decreases 5 degrees or less and a satellite higher elevation angle is selected.
• Select correct satellite. • Check navigator.
Printer trouble
Printer trouble error message Error Message
Cause
CAUTION: Main Unit Printer error: off-line. (0169) CAUTION: Main Unit Printer error: out of paper. (0170)
H3-48
Printer error
Remedy Check connection, paper, etc.
FELCOM 82
3.12.3 Communication unit trouble (internal) Communication unit trouble error messages Error Message ALARM: ADE Non-carrier EIRP abnormality. (0139) ALARM: ADE EIRP power too low. (0140) ALARM: ADE EIRP power too high. (0141) ALARM: ADE EIRP burst too long. (0142) ALARM: ADE RF abnormality - No TX power detected. (0143) ALARM: TX Synthesizer unlock. (0145) ALARM: RX Synthesizer unlock. (0146) ALARM: Cross EL axis control error. (0147) ALARM: Az axis control error. (0148) ALARM: El axis control error. (0149) ALARM: 28V power abnormality. (0154) ALARM: RF-CONV circuit abnormality, TX-RF level insufficient.(0160) ALARM: RF-CONV circuit abnormality, Unexpected TX-RF level detected. (0162) ALARM: TX-RF circuit abnormality, TX power insufficient. (0164) ALARM: TX-RF circuit abnormality, TX power too strong. (0165) ALARM: TX circuit abnormality, unexpected TX power detected. Please power off the FELCOM82!! (0166) ALARM: Telephone Distress Box Cable abnormality. (0167)
ALARM: Telex Distress Alert Box Cable abnormality. (0168) ALARM: FAN FAILURE (0174)
(Continued on next page)
H3-49
Cause PCU detects EIRP abnormality. HPA output at Tx is below ratings. Output power too high at Tx. PCU detects abnormal Tx burst width. PCU cannot detect HPA output power.
Defective parts
HPA chassis
HPA chassis RF CON
Unlock signal detected.
RF CON
Cross EL axis control trouble AZ axis control trouble EL axis control trouble +28 V not output. RF CONV Board trouble, Low TX level is found during the Tx. RF CONV Board trouble, High TX level is found when not Tx. EIRP is lower than one specified by the LES. EIRP is higher than one specified by the LES. EIRP trouble detected for period more than 3 sec. at standby. Cable for telephone distress button may be damaged or disconnected. Cable for telex distress button may be damaged or disconnected. Trouble with fan for power supply
PCU, Sensors, motors, belts SW REG
CPU RF CON
HPA chassis RF CON CPU HPA chassis
Cable connection
SW REG
FELCOM 82
Communication unit trouble error messages (con’t) Error
Cause
Defective parts
ALARM: SYSCPU error detected. (0176) ALARM: HANDSET error detected. (0177) ALARM: DEMOD-CPU error detected. (0178) ALARM: SYNCCPU-CPU error detected. (0179) ALARM: DECODER-CPU error detected. (0180) ALARM: TERM-CPU error detected. (0181)
CPU error
CPU
ALARM: ANTENNA error detected. (0182)
Antenna Error
PCU
H3-50
FELCOM 82
4. Program Update The table below lists programs for FELCOM 82 and its update commands.
Note that RAM clear must be made after the program for SYSTEM is upgraded. Program DEMOD SYNC DECODE SYSTEM TERM HANDSET
Program No. 165-0142-xxx 165-0143-xxx 165-0144-xxx 165-0145-xxx 165-0146-xxx 165-0152-xxx
Command UPDEM UPSYNC UPDEC UPSYS UPTERM UPHAND
Parts No. storing program Flash ROM U3 on CPU board Flash ROM U9 on CPU board Flash ROM U16 on CPU board Flash ROM U95 on CPU board Flash ROM U46 on CPU board CPU U2 on HS CONT board
TERMINAL (IB-582)
165-0150-xxx
INSTALL
U12 on CPU board
The program number can be read by using the following keystrokes. IB-582: [F4] [6] [4] Handset: [FUNC] [6] [8] [1] The terminal program number can be read by pressing [F1] white pressing and holding down [Alt] and [Fn].
The command to select the drive is as below. Terminal Unit IB-581 IB-582
Drive Designators A B A C
Disk Drive Flash ROM Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Flash ROM
Table 4.1.2 To terminate FELCOM 82 system program and get into DOS system, press [Fn], [Alt], and [F2] simultaneously. This procedure is the same as one for FELCOM 12, FELCOM 81, and DP-6.
H3-51
FELCOM 82
4.1 Connection If the system does not have the terminal unit or the system is class-2, connect COM1 port of the terminal unit (IB-581 or IB-582), or RS-232C port of a PC to the communication unit IB-282 as illustrated. Either VDU port or J1 port is used for updating the program. When the VDU port is hard of access, remove the front panel and use the J1. Communication speed is 57.6 kbps with VDU and 38.4 kbps with J1. The type of the interconnection cable is 16S0068 with a connector fitted to both ends.
57.6kbp
VDU
RS-232C 9P D-sub connect COM 1
or
or J1
RS232C
38.4kbps
•IB-581/582:COM1 Port •PC:RS-232C Port J1 on CPU board
Front view, front cover removed
H3-52
FELCOM 82
4.2 Upgrading SYSTEM, DEMOD, SYNC, DECODE, and TERM programs 4.2.1 Using IB-581 or IB-582 To upgrade SYSTEM, DEMOD, SYNC, DECODE, and TERM programs; 1. For example, using IB-582 Press [Fn], [Alt], and [F2] simultaneously to terminate FELCOM 82 system program. “OK to quite system?” appears. Move the cursor to “Yes” and press [Enter] key. Prompt C:¥> appears. 2. Inset the floppy disk having new software into the drive. 3. Type A: and press [Enter] key. Prompt changes to A:¥>. 4. Type update command. For example, to upgrade SYSTEM program, type UPSYS and press [Enter] key. The following data appears in turn. A: ¥>uppg load.bin syscpu.bin 0 0 200 1 Program upload utility Version 6.25 Copyright(c) FURUNO ELECTRIC CO.,LTD.1997,1998,1999(T.K) uppg infile1 infile2 p1 p3 p2 p4 p5 p1:Deletion waiting time. p2:Waiting time to write. p3:Password output interval. p4:ID number. p5:Port number.(1,2...) Erase Wait:0sec Wait:o Wait counter=200 Port no.=1 TARGET POWER ON.
5. Turn on the IB-282, if it is off. The program upgrading proceeds while the indication “xxx percent completed” on the terminal unit. 6. Wait until the message “Finish version up” appears. 7. Turn off the IB-282. 8. Turn on the IB-282 to check the program revision level. 9. After updating the SYSTEM program, clear RAM contents.
H3-53
FELCOM 82
4.2.2 Using PC To upgrade the system program by using a PC, follow the steps below. 1. Run the DOS on the PC. 2. Inset the floppy disk having new software into the drive. 3. Type A: and press [Enter] key. Prompt changes to A:¥>. 4. Type update command. For example, to upgrade SYSTEM program, type UPSYS and press [Enter] key. The following data appears in turn. A: ¥>uppg load.bin syscpu.bin 0 0 200 1 Program upload utility Version 6.25 Copyright(c) FURUNO ELECTRIC CO.,LTD.1997,1998,1999(T.K) uppg infile1 infile2 p1 p3 p2 p4 p5 p1:Deletion waiting time. p2:Waiting time to write. p3:Password output interval. p4:ID number. p5:Port number.(1,2...) Erase Wait:0sec Wait:o Wait counter=200 Port no.=1 TARGET POWER ON.
5. Turn on the IB-282, if it is off. The program upgrading proceeds while the indication “xxx percent completed” on the terminal unit. 6. Wait until the message “Finish version up” appears. 7. Turn off the IB-282. 8. Turn on the IB-282 to check the program revision level. 9. After updating the SYSTEM program, clear RAM contents.
4.2.3 After upgrading SYSTEM (RAM clear) After upgrading SYSTEM program, clear RAM contents by using the terminal unit or the handset. The contents in the memory are listed in chapter 1. 1) By using terminal unit To clear RAM contents; 1. Press [F4] [6] to call Communication Setup menu. 2. Type CLR (space) RAM on the “Enter JOB No.” line and press [Enter] key. 3. Type DENPA4 on the “Password” line and press [Enter] key. 4. Wait for a while so that the status display is redrawn.
H3-54
FELCOM 82
2) By using handset To clear RAM contents; 1. Press [FUNC], [6], and [9] in this order to call “Initialize” menu. 69 Initialize All data & logs Are cleared. ARE YOU SURE? Clear:[82] Quit:[Quit]
If you cannot get into “Initialize,” press [FUNC] [6] and [3] to call “Change Mode” menu. Type the password or 5963 followed by [Enter] key if you cannot find the password. The menu changes to Main Menu when you enter password or 5963. While the Main Menu on the screen, type [6] [9] to call “Initialize” menu. 63 Change Mode User-!Admin Enter Passwd: - - - Enter: [Enter]
2. Press [8] and [2] in this order to clear the memory and wait until “Now Initializing” disappears.
4.3 Upgrading handset program 4.3.1 Using IB-581 or IB-582 To upgrade the handset program; 1. Unplug the handset. 2. For example, using IB-582 Press [Fn], [Alt], and [F2] simultaneously to terminate FELCOM 82 system program.“OK to quite system?” appears. Move the cursor to Yes and press [Enter] key. Prompt C:¥> appears. 3. Inset the floppy disk having new handset program, 165-0152-xxx into the drive. 4. Type A: and press [Enter] key. Prompt changes to A:¥>. 5. Type UPHAND and press [Enter] key. The following data appears in turn.
H3-55
FELCOM 82
A: ¥>uppg load.bin syscpu.bin 0 0 200 1 Program upload utility Version 6.21 Copyright(c) FURUNO ELECTRIC CO.,LTD.1997,1998,1999(T.K) uppg infile1 infile2 p1 p3 p2 p4 p5 p1:Deletion waiting time. p2:Waiting time to write. p3:Password output interval. p4:ID number. p5:Port number.(1,2...) Erase Wait:0sec Wait:o Wait counter=200 Port no.=1 TARGET POWER ON.
6. Plug the handset when “TARGET POWER ON” appears on the IB-582 (581). 7. The program upgrading proceeds while the indication “xxx percent completed” on the screen. If upgrading does not commence, press [C] key while holding down [Ctrl] key for the prompt of A:¥>, and then proceed from step 1. 8. Wait until the message “Finish version up” appears. 9. Turn off the IB-282 and IB-582 (581). 10. Turn on the IB-282 to check the program revision level.
4.3.2 Using PC To upgrade the program by using a PC, follow the steps below. 1. Unplug the handset. 2. Run the DOS on the PC. 3. Inset the floppy disk having new handset program into the drive. 4. Type A: and press [Enter] key. Prompt changes to A:¥>. 5. Type UPHAND and press [Enter] key. The following data appears in turn. A: ¥>uppg load.bin syscpu.bin 0 0 200 1 Program upload utility Version 6.21 Copyright(c) FURUNO ELECTRIC CO.,LTD.1997,1998,1999(T.K) uppg infile1 infile2 p1 p3 p2 p4 p5 p1:Deletion waiting time. p2:Waiting time to write. p3:Password output interval. p4:ID number. p5:Port number.(1,2...)
H3-56
FELCOM 82
Erase Wait:0sec Wait:o Wait counter=200 Port no.=1 TARGET POWER ON.
6. Plug the handset when “TARGET POWER ON” appears. 7. The program upgrading proceeds while the indication “xxx percent completed” on the screen. If not, press [C] key while holding down [Ctrl] key for the prompt of A:¥>, and then proceed from step 1. 8. Wait until the message “Finish version up” appears. 9. Turn off the IB-282 and a PC. 10. Turn on the IB-282 to check the program revision level.
4.4 Upgrading terminal program To upgrade terminal program; 1. Press [Fn], [Alt], and [F2] simultaneously to terminate FELCOM B system program. “OK to quite system?” appears. Move the cursor to Yes and press [Enter] key. Prompt C:¥> sappears. 2. Inset the floppy disk having new terminal software into the drive. 3. Type A: and press [Enter] key. Prompt changes to A:¥>. 4. Type INSTALL and press [Enter] key. 5. The program upgrading proceeds and DOS prompt display comes after upgrading is completed. 6. Turn off the unit and turn it on again. to 7. Press [F1] while pressing and holding down [Alt] and [Fn] to read the program version level.
H3-57
FELCOM 82
5. Menu tree 5.1 Menu on handset The italic letters show items in the user menu, and the underlines show factory defaults. FUNC Quit Key
1 2 User Menu 3 4 Display 1 Monitor 2 Comm. Log 3 Time&Charge
1 List by LES 2 List by PID 3 Data Clear
4 System Log 5 Print All 6 Print Setup 7 Print MES 8 Print TELFAX 9 Print MSD* 0 Print HSD* *: Needs OID/DID 5 Setup
1 Satellite
1 AOR-E 2 POR 3 IOR 4 AOR-W 5 Sat5 6 Sat6 7 Sat7 8 Sat8 0 AUTO
2 Gyro
Gyro [000~359] Hold [ON/OFF]
3 Antenna
Azimuth [000~359] Elevation [00~90] Heading [000~359] AutoTrack [ON/OFF]
4 Position
LAT [00.00 N] LON [000.00 E]
5 Area
1 WMO* 2 IMO* 3 ICAO* 4 NAVAREA [No.1, No.2]
6 Backup NCS* 7 Distress LES
(To next page)
H3-58
*: For future use 1 AORE 2 POR 3 IOR 4 AORW 5 Sat5 (Not Used) 6 Sat6 (Not Used) 7 Sat7 (Not Used) 8 Sat8 (Not Used)
FELCOM 82
(From Previous Page) 8 DMG
1 Name 2 Maritime [Yes, No] 3 Nature 1 Fire/Explos 2 Flooding 3 Collision 4 Grounding 5 Listing 6 Sinking 7 Disable & Adr 8 Undesignate 9 Abandoning 4 Course (000~359) 5 Speed (00~99)
9 OID/DID
6 MES
0 RcvAlarm
1 Disable 2 Enable
1 Handset
1 BackLight [0~3, 3 ] 2 IdleLight [0, 1 ] 3 LCDBright [0~9, 5 ] 4 BuzzerVol [0~9, 7 ] 5 KeyClick [OFF, ON ] 1 Simple 2 Detailed
2 Menu Style
3 Change Mode 4 Date&Time
1 Date&Time 2 Date Form
1 YYYY-MM-DD 2 MMM-DD-YYYY 3 DD-MMM-YYYY 3 Time Zone [-13:30~+13:30, +00:00 ]
5 Charge Info 6 Personal ID
1 PID [Disable, Enable] 2 PID Entry 3 List/Edit
7 Password 8 Test
1 Version 2 Memory 3 Distress Test
9 Initialize 0 ForcedClear (To Next Page)
H3-59
FELCOM 82
(From Previous Page) 7 TELFAX
1 Time Limit
1 TEL1 2 TEL2 3 TEL3
1 OFF 2 Limit Time [01~99] 3 Answer Only
2 Credit Call
1 TELFAX1 [OFF, ON] 2 TELFAX2 [OFF, ON] 3 TELFAX3 [OFF, ON]
3 Prefix Code 4 Echo Cancel
1 TEL1 [OFF, ON] 2 TEL2 [OFF, ON] 3 TEL3 [OFF, ON] 4 HANDSET [OFF, ON]
5 Print TELFAX
8 HSD
1 Dest. No 2 Call TEL
1 TEL1 2 TEL2 3 TEL3 4 HANDSET
3 Data Rate
1 64k (64Kbps) 2 56k (56Kbps)
4 Dial Method
1 DIRECT 2 ADDRESS
5 Auto Rate
1 OFF 2 ON
6 Command
1 HDLC 2 BSC
7 Character
1 8bit/None 2 7bit/Odd
8 Ignore DTR
1 Normal 2 Ignore
9 Print HSD
ABBR Find * Key
1 Entry 2 Edit* 3 Remove* 4 HSD Call**
H3-60
* : Not displayed when no abbreviated dialing numbers are registered. ** : Not displayed unless HSD OID/DID is registered and HANDSET is selected in the Call TEL menu.
FELCOM 82
5.2 Menu on terminal unit (Class1) F1 Key (File) 1. New Text [ALT + N] 2. Open Text [ALT +O]
Load Merge
3. Close Text [ALT + Q] 4. Save Text [ALT + S] 5. Delete File [ALT + D] 6. Rename File 7. Print File [ALT + P] 8. Clear Comm Memory 9. Format Disk
F2 Key (Edit) 1. Undo [ALT + X] 2. Cut [DEL] 3. Copy [ALT + C] 4. Paste [INS] 5. Select All [ALT + A] 6. Search [ALT + F]
Forward Backward
7. Replace [ALT + R]
Forward Backward
8. Goto Top [HOME] 9. Goto Bottom [END] A. Goto Line [ALT + L] B. Change Text [ALT + V]
H3-61
Query All
FELCOM 82
F3 Key(Telex) 1. Auto Telex [ALT + T]
1. Station Name 2. LES Access Code 3. File to Send
2. Call LES
1. LES Access Code 2. Priority
SEND CANCEL
1. Routine
SEND CANCEL
2. Safety 3. Urgent 3. Service Code 3. Call Station 4. Transmit File 5. Program Telex
1. Station Name 2. LES Access Code 3. File to Send 4. Program Mode
ENTRY DELETE 1. One Time 2. Interval 3. Schedule
6. Confidential Msg 7. Communication Log 8. Change Window [ALT + W]
F4 Key (Setup) 1. Station List
1. Stn. Name 2. Telex No. 3. Answerback 4. Remarks
2. LES List
1. LES Access Code 2. LES Name 3. Remarks
3. Terminal Setup
1. Date 2. Time 3. Date Display Form
4. Screen Saver
1. Mode ON 2. Mode OFF
5. Comm Time Display
1. Display ON 2. Display OFF
6. Incoming Call Alarm
1. Alarm ON 2. Alarm OFF
7. Special Char
1. Default 2. Norway 3. Sweden 4. UK 5. Spare 1 (Not Used) 6. Spare 2 (Not Used)
8. Answerback Code (To Next Page)
1. YY-MM-DD 2. MMM-DD-YY 3. DD-MMM-YY
H3-62
Section I1. Remote Station 1. Over view Connection of Remote Unit A radiotelephone is connected to a remote unit, such as remote terminal, DSC, and NBDP in Furuno MIF format of which TX/RX data lines are heard-wear selectable for current loop or RS-232C signal.
REM-A
REMOTE REMOTE TX/RX Control data RS-232C
DSC/NBDP
RS-232C
FS-xxxx
Maximum four remote units can be connected by using a distributor DB-500 as shown in Figure below. FS-1562 REM-A RS-232C [REM1]
DB-500
REM-A
REM-A
REM-B
[REM2] RS-232C
DSC-6/60
REM-B
[REM3] C.Loop
RB-500
REM-A
[REM4] C.Loop
[REM5] RS-232C
RB-500
DP-5/6
Each port on the DB-500 can support Current loop and RS-232C signals according to the type of the REMOTE board fitted in the DB-500: REMOTE A board for RS-232C and REMOTE B board for Current loop. Each port has own REMOTE board. The remote unit ports on the DB-500 have priority; REM-2 > REM 3 > REM-4 > REM 5 There are two types of the DB-500. DB-500: Standard type REMOTE-1 (IN) ----- C.Loop (REM B) REMOTE-2 (OUT) ----- C.Loop (REM B) REMOTE-3 (OUT) ----- C.Loop (REM B) DB-500-RS type REMOTE-1(IN) ----- RS-232C(REM A) REMOTE-2(OUT) ----- RS-232C (REM A) REMOTE-3(OUT) ----- C.Loop (REM B) REMOTE-4(OUT) ----- C.Loop (REM B) REMOTE-5(OUT) ----- RS-232C (REM A)
I1-1
REMOTE
Note) Option Parts Name REMOTE A (05P0457) REMOTE B (05P0458) TB board
Type OP05-39 OP05-40 05P0496
Code Number 005-920-310 005-920-320 005-840-750
Additional Port Kit
OP05-44
000-056-823
Remarks For RS-232C signal For Current loop signal -Two REMOTE B, - One TB - Two cable glands
There are two types of the remote terminal: RB-500 for SSB and RB-700 for VHF. The ROM in the RB-500 must be 05501-60-100 (option) for RC-808 and 05501-47-103 (standard) for SSB. The VHF remote terminal having the highest priority must be installed where a ship is normally operated. The FM-8500 and FM-8700 itself has the highest priority because of having a built-in DSC.
I1-2
REMOTE
1.1 Remote port specifications Equipment
Port
Specification (Default)
Option
FS-75/2550
Remote
RS-232C
C.Loop
FS-1562
Remote
RS-232C
C.Loop
REM-1
RS-232C RS-232C
None
RS-232C
C.Loop
REM-3
RS-232C
None
CIF/NMEA
CIF(C.Loop)
None
REMOTE RS-232C RS-232C XMIT
RS-232C No RS-232C RS-232C
None RS-232C None None
RCVER
RS-232C
None
CIF/NMEA
NMEA
CIF
DMC(REM-A) VHF(REM-B) NBDP(REM-C) MF/HF RT(REM-D) MF/HF RX(REM-E)
C.Loop C.Loop RS-232C
None None None
RS-232C
None
RS-232C
None
PRINTER
Centronics
None
PP-500
Printer
Centronics
None
PP-510
Printer
Centronics
None
PP-505
IN/OUT (J2)
RS-232C
C.Loop
REM-2 FS-5000/8000
RV-117G RV-118G RV-128G FT-253/803 (Controllr:CU5521)
DSC-5/5A/5R
I1-3
Note Select to the REMOTE-A or B board. -RS-232C:REMOTE A(05P0457) -C.Loop:REMOTE B(05P0458) Select to the REMOTE-A or B board. -RS-232C:REMOTE A(05P0457) -C.Loop:REMOTE B(05P0458) Connect to TB3 Connect to TB4 Select to Jumper setting in AF board (AF Board suffix number33 and after) Select to Jumper setting in AF board and System setting (9933:MIF/TBUS/CIF/NMEA) Install to I/F Board:05P0261
Select to Jumper setting on CONT board and System setting (COMM)
Complies with Centronics interface Complies with Centronics interface Complies with Centronics interface C.Loop: Install to OP16-14.
REMOTE
Equipment
DSC-6/6A
DSC-8V/8VP
AA-50/50R FM-7000
FM-7500
FM-8000
FM-8500
FM-8700
Port
Specification (Default)
Option
Note
CIF/NMEA
NMEA
CIF
Select to Jumper setting in CONT board and System setting (9:System)
DMC(REM-A) NBDP(REM-C) MF/HF RT(REM-D) MF/HF RX(REM-E)
C.Loop RS-232C
None None
RS-232C
None
RS-232C
None
PRINTER
Centronics
None
CIF/NMEA
NMEA
CIF
DMC(REM-A) VHF(REM-B)
C.Loop C.Loop
None None
PRINTER
Centronics
None
Complies with Centronics interface
DSC MF/HF TR REMOTE 1 REMOTE 2 REMOTE DMC CIF/NMEA
RS-232C RS-232C C.Loop C.Loop C.Loop C.Loop NMEA
None None None None None None CIF
DSC port RB-700 port RB-700 port
PRINTER
Centronics
None
REMOTE 1 REMOTE 2 REMOTE DMC NMEA
C.Loop C.Loop C.Loop C.Loop NMEA
None None None None None
PRINTER
C.Loop
None
REMOTE DMC NMEA
C.Loop C.Loop NMEA
None None None
PRINTER
C.Loop
None
I1-4
Complies with Centronics interface Select to Jumper setting in CONT board and System setting (9:System)
Complies with Centronics interface DSC port RB-700 port RB-700 port
MIF Serial data (Install to IF-8500; Change to parallel) RB-700 port
MIF Serial data (Install to IF-8500; Change to parallel)
REMOTE
Equipment
DP-5
DP-6/10
Port
Specification (Default)
Option
REMOTE A
RS-232C
None
REMOTE B
RS-232C
None
CIF/NMEA
NMEA
None
PRINTER
Centronics
None
CONTROL REMOTE A REMOTE B IEC-1162 (NMEA) PRINTER
RS-232C RS-232C RS-232C
None None None
IEC-1162
None
Centronics
None
MF.HF DSC No.1 VHF No.2 VHF SES EGC NAVTEX 2182kHz WR
C.Loop C.Loop C.Loop RS-410N RS-410N RS-410N
None None None None None None None
NMEA/CIF
NMEA
ALM BZ
RS-410N
ANT
active
TB-1
C.Loop
(Connected IB-581)
DMC-5
NX-500
RB-700
C.Loop
None
DB-120 (05P0606)
IN OUT OUT NMEA REMOTE 1(IN) REMOTE 2(OUT) REMOTE 3(OUT)
RS-232C RS-232C RS-232C NMEA C.Loop C.Loop C.Loop
REMOTE 4(OUT)
Option
REMOTE 5(OUT)
Option
None None None None RS-232C RS-232C RS-232C C.Loop or RS-232C C.Loop or RS-232C
I1-5
Complies with Centronics interface
Contact signal AF signal Select to NMEA or CIF (TB Board S1)
None
TB-1
Refer to page I1-1.
Connected RT (Standard connection) Connected DSC (Standard connection) Select to Jumper setting in CONT board and Terminal setting. Complies with Centronics interface Not use Connected the Radiotelephone Connected the DSC
Select to WIRE or ACT (TB Board S2)
RB-500
DB-500 (Standard type)
Note
For RT(FS-xxxx) ROM No. 0550147103 For XMIT(FT-503/803) ROM No. 0550160100
Select to the REMOTE-A or B board. - RS-232C:REMOTE A(05P0457) - C.Loop:REMOTE B(05P0458)
REMOTE
Equipment
Port
FELCOM 10 (IC-200)
DTE 1 DTE 2 DMC RP
Specification (Default) RS-232C RS-232C RS-410N RS-410N
NMEA/CIF
NMEA
CIF
REMOTE A
RS-232C
None
PRINTER
RS-232C
None
REMOTE B CONTROL PRINTER CIF/NMEA DTE 1 DTE 2 DATA DMC BUZZER NMEA REMOTE A
RS-232C RS-232C RS-232C NMEA RS-232C RS-232C RS-232C RS-410N RS-410N NMEA RS-232C
None None None CIF None None None None None None None
PRINTER
RS-232C
None
REMOTE B CONTROL CIF/NMEA COM 1 COM 2
RS-232C RS-232C NMEA RS-232C RS-232C
None None CIF None None
PRINTER
RS-232C
None
DTE 1 DTE 2 DATA DMC 1 DMC 2 BUZZER COM 1 COM 2
RS-232C RS-232C RS-232C RS-410N RS-410N RS-410N RS-232C RS-232C
None None None None None None None None
PRINTER
RS-232C
None
Printer
RS-232C
None
232C ALARM CIF/NMEA
RS-232C RS-410N NMEA
None None CIF
FELCOM 10 (IC-500)
FELCOM 11 (IC-211)
FELCOM 11 (IC-511)
FELCOM 11 (IB-581)
FELCOM 12 (IC-212)
FELCOM 12 (IB-581)
EGC-5
I1-6
Option
Note
None None None None Select to Jumper setting on CONT board. Connected IC-200. Complies with Centronics interface Not used
Connected IC-211. Complies with Centronics interface Not used Connected IC-211. Not used Complies with Centronics interface
Connected IC-212. Not used Complies with Centronics interface Complies with Centronics interface
Select to system setting.
REMOTE
Equipment
FELCOM 80
FELCOM 81
IB-681
IB-680
DTE 1 DTE 2 PC DATA
Specification (Default) RS-232C RS-232C RS-232C
PRINTER
RS-232C
None
ANT CONT NMEA GYRO TEL DISTRESS TLX DISTRESS RX BUZZER VDU DATA CARD READER RF (Antenna control) NAV AD CON TEL DISTRESS TLX DISTRESS RX BUZZER HSD DATA 1 HSD DATA 2 HSD CTRL HSD DATA 1 HSD DATA 2 HSD CTRL
RS-422 NMEA or CIF GYRO RS-410N RS-410N RS-410N RS-232C RS-232C RS-232C
None None None None None None None None None
FSK
None
NMEA
None None None None None None None None None None None
Port
RS-410N RS-410N RS-410N RS-232C RS-422 RS-232C RS-232C RS-422 RS-232C
I1-7
Option
Note
None None None Complies with Centronics interface Automatic change NMEA or CIF. IB-360 IB-350 IC-301
For AD-100 For IB-360 For IB-350 For IC-301 Selected SW2 setting
Selected SW2 setting
REMOTE
2. RB-700 : C.Loop 2.1 Priority settings 1. Priority setting on FM-7000/7500 Determine priority of the RB-700 according to mounting location and vessel regulations.
PANEL board on VHF radiotelephone FM-7000/FM-7500 1. Priority setting on FM-8500 and FM-8700 Priority cannot be set on FM-8500 and FM-8700. 2. Priority setting on FM-8000 Priority order for FM-8000 is set on the system setting. System Channel 12 ---- Setting No. 1 (ON)
I1-8
REMOTE
2.2 Jumper settings Jumper settings shown below should be made at installation.
Note) Do not change the Jumper settings of JP2 and JP3.
Parts location of JP4 and JP5 on Main board (Parts side)
Parts location of JP1 and JP6 on MAIN board (Soldering side)
I1-9
REMOTE
2.3 Confirmation of jumper settings To confirm jumper settings of JP1 and JP6, turn on the power while pressing and holding down the [ENT] key.
To confirm the jumper settings of JP4 and JP5, turn on the power while pressing and holding down the [SHIFT] key.
2.4 Speaker and handset volume Speaker Adjust R18 with the VOLUME control on the front panel set at maximum for desired speaker volume. Handset Adjust R9 to select desired handset speaker volume.
I1-10
REMOTE
3. RB-500 : C.Loop 3.1 Jumper settings Jumper settings shown below should be made at installation.
Note) Do not change the Jumper settings of JP2 and JP3.
Parts location of JP4 and JP5 on Main board (Parts side)
Parts location of JP1 and JP6 on MAIN board (Soldering side)
I1-11
REMOTE
3.2 Confirmation of jumper settings To confirm jumper settings of JP1 and JP6, turn on the power while pressing and holding down the [ENT] key.
To confirm jumper settings of JP4 and JP5, turn on the power while pressing and holding down the [HOOK] key.
3.3 Speaker and handset volume Speaker Adjust R18 with the VOLUME control on the front panel set at maximum for desired speaker volume. Handset Adjust R9 to select desired handset speaker volume.
I1-12
REMOTE
3.4 Connection 1. Connection to FS-5000/8000 The different modification is required depending on the suffix number of AF board. For suffix No.-22 and before The FS-5000/8000 radiotelephone outputs +18V for the RB-500 which operates on +12V. Therefore, reduce +18V to +12V by adding a resistor as shown below. Note that this modification is not required if the RB-500 is connected to the FS-5000/8000 via the DB-500. Modification Remove L4 on the MAIN board (05P0483) and install a resistor at the same place. Change system setting 9933 to “0”(MIF) on the FS-5000/8000. [STO] 9933 [ENT] “0”(MIF) [ENT] MAIN Board Breaker L4
For suffix No.-33 and after The AF board having suffix No.-33 and after is delivered from August 1993. Note that when FS-5000/8000 is connected to DB-500 in RS-232C format, this modification is not required. C.Loop or RS-232C format can be selected by changing a jumper wire setting on the AF board having suffix No. –33 and after.
Jumper wire short open
AF Board (05P0356-33)
I1-13
Signal format C.Loop RS-232C
REMOTE
2. Connection to FS-1562, FS-1552, FS-1502 and FS-1503 For the FS-1562; The REMOTE-A (RS-232C) board on the TX/RX board is replaced with the REMOTE-B(C.Loop) board (05P0458: 005-517-500). REMOTE A (RS-232C) board: 05P0457 005517480 REMOTE B (C.Loop) board : 05P0458 005517500 For the FS-1552 and FS-1502; Install the optional board: REMOTE-B (C.Loop). The REMOTE-B kit, consists of the REMOTE-B board and the connector assembly. REMOTE A (RS-232C) Kit : OP05-39 005920310 REMOTE B (C.Loop) Kit : OP05-40 005920320 For the FS-1503; Install the optional board: REMOTE-B (C.Loop). The REMOTE-B kit, consists of the REMOTE-B board and the connector assembly. REMOTE A (RS-232C) Kit : OP05-82 005939810 REMOTE B (C.Loop) Kit : OP05-83 005939820 Note) If more than two RB-500s are installed, connect them via the Distributor DB-500.
I1-14
REMOTE
4. DB-500 4.1 Connection There are two types of connections: MF/HF and VHF. MF/HF connection
VHF connection
Block diagram
I1-15
REMOTE
4.2 FS-5000/8000
I1-16
REMOTE
I1-17
REMOTE
4.3 RB-500/700 Connection Connect Remote Station RB-500 (RB-700) to the DB-500 as shown below. 1. When connecting two remote stations (Standard)
I1-18
REMOTE
2. When connecting three or four remote stations (Option)
I1-19
REMOTE
4.4 FS-1562 and DSC/DP Connection
I1-20
REMOTE
4.5 Interconnection diagrams 1. FS-5000/8000+DB-500+RB-500
When using current loop between FS-5000/8000 and DB-500. For AF board having suffix number-33 and after. 2.
I1-21
REMOTE
FS-1562+DB-500+RB-500
I1-22
REMOTE
3. FM-xxxx+DB-500+RB-700
I1-23
REMOTE
5. Jumper settings on MAIN Board
I1-24
Section J1. NX-500
1. Connection
Whip Antenna (1 m or 2.6 m)
PRE-AMP Unit (NX-5)
ANT
10.8-40 VDC
NX-500
NMEA/CIF AF IN AF OUT ALM BZ ALM BZ
SAR MSG.
Jumper wire Remove the jumper wire when an external unit (AF signal) is connected.
External Connector kit (Option)
[EXT] Connector Plug pin number 1. NAV data in (R-H) 2. NAV data in (R-C) 3. 4. 5 NC 6. ALARM 1 7. ALARM 2 8. NAV RCV SIG OUT 9. NAV SIG IN (NAV COM) 10. 0V
J1-1
NX-500
2. Slide switch settings Name of PCB
Symbol
Factory Setting
S1
NMEA
S2
ACT
TB
Function [Data Format Selection] Format of input data should be selected; NMEA or CIF [Preamp Selection] WIRE: Preamp Unit not installed ACT: Preamp Unit installed
TB Board
J1-2
NX-500
3. System settings
Note) Categories A: Navigational warnings, B: Meteorological warnings, D: Search and note) Rescue Information and L: Navigational warning additional to letter A cannot be rejected from printout, in accordance with international regulations. Note) Main CPU Ver 4.00 and after :from 2000/12.
J1-3
NX-500
4. FURUNO Information FQ5-93-006 (93/02) The service menu functions to change the specifications of the NX-500 to comply it with the regulations of vessel’s country of registration. The settings should not be changed without due reason.
J1-4
NX-500
J1-5
NX-500
5. Self test Turn the power on while pressing and holding the [ACCEPT] key.
J1-6
NX-500
J1-7
(Feb. 1999)
6. Station List
NX-500
J1-8
NX-500
J1-9
Section K1. IB-581 AR-B1374
CPU card
1. How to Quit Programs When updating the program of each terminal unit, quit the program, and then switch to the screen in which the PC-DOS prompt such as "A:¥-----" is displayed. The table below summarizes how to quit the terminal program for each terminal.
DP-6
Terminal unit Main unit
Changing to PCDOS
Display
How to confirm program version
[Alt]+[Fn]=>[F2]
A:¥DP10¥ TERMINAL>
[F6]=>Self test
A:¥ FELCOM11> A:¥ FELCOM12> A:¥>
Confirm at program starting Ver03: [Alt]+[Fn]=[F1] [Alt]+[Fn]=[F1]
Note)With the version Ver-15 or earlier
[Fn]+[F2]
FELCOM 11
[F1] =>[8]
FELCOM 12
[Alt]+[Fn]=>[F2]=>YES=>[Enter]
FELCOM 81
[Alt]+[Fn]=>[F2]=>YES=>[Enter]
Installation command B:¥>install B:¥>nbdpinst [F1]=>nbdp.exe B:¥>ibinst B:¥>ibinst B:¥>ibinst
For example, to quit the terminal program of FELCOM-12: - Press [F2] key while pressing [Alt] and [Fn] keys. - A message, "OK to quit system Yes/No", will appear. Then, move the cursor to "Y", and press [Enter] key. - Then, the prompt, "A:¥FELCOM12>", will appear on the screen. To update the terminal program, B-drive (B:¥>) is used. To change from A-drive to B drive, - press [B],[:], and [Enter] keys successively. Then, the prompt, "B:¥>", will appear on the screen. Type “installation command”, then press [Enter] key. (See above table; installation command.)
Note) Drives of IB-581 are: A drive : Flash ROMs of IB-581 B drive : Floppy disk
K1-1
IB-581
2. Changing the Terminal Software 2.1 Overview This chapter describes how to change the terminal software to use the IB-581 for other models. When changing IB-581 of DP-6 to the terminal of FELCOM-12, for example, you need to replace the terminal program. To replace the software, delete all the files except the system files of PC-DOS: IBMDOS.COM *, IBMBIO.COM *, COMMAND.COM, and FORMAT.COM, and install the program to be.
2.2 A method to change the terminal program by formatting A-drive Command “FORMAT A: /S” or A-drive format and copy of system files is used to format the A-drive. - Press [F],[O],[R],[M],[A],[T],[Space],[A],[: ],[Space],[/], and [S] keys successively. If you do not type “/S”, A: drive will be formatted all, this mean PC-DOS will be disappeared, never forget type “/S”. If you made format A: drive all or lost PC-DOS, see “chapter 3 Install PC-DOS”. For example) 1. Quit the terminal program of FELCOM-81. - Press [F2] key while pressing [Alt] and [Fn] keys. Select “Yes” and press [Enter] key. When the program has been quitted, the prompt "A:¥>" will appear on the screen. 2. To format the A-drive and copy the system files at the same time. - Press [F],[O],[R],[M],[A],[T],[Space],[A],[:],[Space],[/],[S] and [Enter] keys successively. Be sure to type a switch function "/S". This switch is a command to format the A-drive and copy the system files at the same time. 3. Check the root directory of A-drive. - Press [D], [I], [R], and [Enter] keys successively. COMMAND.COM Note) You cannot find "IBMDOS.COM" and "IBMBIO.COM", because these are hidden files. 4. Change to the B-drive by pressing keys, - Press [B], [:], and [Enter], successively. The prompt "B:¥>" will appear on the screen.
K1-2
IB-581
5. Install the terminal program by using "INSTALL.BAT" file contained in the program. Press the keys successively according to the terminal to be changed to as follows: FELCOM-11 - [I],[B],[I],[N],[S],[T] and [Enter] FELCOM-12 - [I],[B],[I],[N],[S],[T] and [Enter] FELCOM-81 - [I],[N],[S],[T],[A],[L],[L] and [Enter] DP-6 - [I],[N],[S],[T],[A],[L],[L] and [Enter] Programs will be installed automatically. With some terminal programs, follow the installation instructions that will be shown on the display. 6. When the program has been installed, the prompt "B:¥>" will appear. Then turn off power.
K1-3
IB-581
3. Installing PC-DOS 3.1 Overview The system files and terminal program of PC-DOS 6.3 is installed in A-drive: flash ROMs (MEM-1, 2) on the CPU Card (AR-B1374) of IB-581. If the A-drive has been formatted or the system files have been destructed in an operational error, and PC-DOS, therefore, does not start, reinstall the PC-DOS system files, and then install the terminal program.
3.2 Outline of the Procedure Backup PC-DOS
Refer to page K1-7. Installing PC-DOS Refer to page K1-8.
Backup system files of another IB-581.
FD drive-A: 1.44 MB, 3 1/2 FD drive-B: not installed
Change BIOS settings.
A:\>FORMAT B: /S
Refer to page K1-10. Copy "FORMAT. COM" file. A:\>COPY FORMAT.COM B:
Change FDD flat cable: A-drive. Change DIP SW of CPU Card: SW1- # 5, 6 on.
Refer to page K1-11. Note) System Files: IBMDOS.COM IBMBIO.COM Set FD with System Files and FORMAT.COM in FDD. COMMAND.COM and FORMAT.COM Start up PC-DOS from FD. Power ON
Format C-drive and copy System Files.
A:\>FORMAT C: /S
C-drive: Flash ROMs Restore BIOS settings.
FD drive-A: Not install FD drive-B: 1.44 MB, 3 1/2
Restore: Change FDD flat cable: B-drive. Change DIP SW of CPU Card: SW1- # 5, 6 off.
Note) You cannot find "IBMDOS.COM" and "IBMBIO.COM of the system files by "DIR" command, because they are hidden files.
Install Terminal Program. Refer to page K1-1.
End
K1-4
IB-581
3.3 Until PC-DOS Starts Major displays that appear until PC-DOS starts up are shown below. The displays depend on the version of CPU Card. The following displays are for Ver. 3.0 of CPU card. Power ON
CHIPS 65535 VGA 32kB BIOS Version 2.0.2 DECOMPILATION OR DISASSEMBLY PROHIBITED Copyright (c)1994 Chips and Technologes Inc,. All Rights Reserved American Megatrends AMIBIOS (c) 1995 American Megatrends Inc,. (Ver 3.2 set-2)
Hit , If you want to run SETUP
CPU Cared Ver2.2 will appear.
1024kB OK WAIT... AR-B1374 SSD BIOS Version 3.1 (c)1997 Acrosser Technology Co,. LTD ROM Drive Unit A RAM Drive Unit B ROM Memory Type SRAM Memory Type SYSTEM Boot Drive
=Drive :A =None =29C040A(512k ~8) =None =ROM/Flash Disk
ROM Disk Maximum RAM Disk Space Firmware Segment Base Port Address
Hit ,if you want to setup FLASH Disk
CPU Card Ver-3.0 .
=1536k =0000k =C800H =0210H
Call to setup FLASH Disk menu. (See next page)
AMIBIOS System Configuration (C) 1985-1995,American Megatrends Inc., Main Processor Math Processor Floppy Drive A: Floppy Drive B: AMIBIOS Date Processor Clock
:i386SX :None :None :1.44 MB 31/2 h :07/15/95 :33MHz
Base Memory Size Ext.Memory Size Display Type Serial Port(s) Parallel Port(s)
:640kB :128kB :VGA/EGA :3F8,2F8 :378
OR CPU Card Ver-2.2 . AMIBIOS System Configuration (C) 1985-1992,American Megatrends Inc., Main Processor :80386SX Numeric Processor :None Floppy Drive A: :None Floppy Drive B: :1.44 MB,31/2 h Display Type :VGA/PGA/EGA AMIBIOS Date :11/11/92
Base Memory Size Ext.Memory Size Hard Disk C:Type Hard Disk D:Type Serial Port(s) Parallel Port(s)
Starting PC DOS...
Starting terminal program
K1-5
:640kB :128kB :None :None :3F8,2F8 :378
IB-581
Note) Rewriting the memory If you press [F1] key when a message "Hit , if you want to setup FLASH Disk." appears before PC-DOS starts up after power-on, a memory settings display will appear. If you "Save" the settings by pressing [F4] key, the terminal program will be deleted and will not start. Then, a message "Boot Failure Insert BOOT diskette in A: Press any key when ready" will appear. In this case, it is necessary to PC-DOS system files and terminal program in A-drive. Explain to customer that you do not touch keyboard after the power switch ON until terminal software starting up completed. Power ON
"Hit , if you want to setup FLASH Disk"
If press [F1] key, apper as follow.
note) FLASH type=29C040A(512k x 8) Total chip(s)=02 Disk size=1024 kbyte(s) ESC:Exit F4:Save :Select PgUp/PgDn:Modify
If press [ESC] key,
If press [F4] key,
"Write to FLASH disk(Y/N)" will appear on the screen.
Press [N],[Enter] keys. If you press [Y],[Enter] key :
AMIBIOS System Configuration (C) 1985-1995, American Megatrends Inc,.
"Starting PC DOS..."
Starting terminal program
Main Processor Math Processor Floppy Drive A: Floppy Drive B: AMIBIOS Date Processor Clock
:i386SX :None ::None :1.44MB 31/2 :07/15/95 :33MH
Base Memory Size Ext.Memory Size Display Type Serial Port(s) Parallele Port(s)
:640kB :128kB :VGA/EGA :3F8.2F8 :378
The displays depend upon CPU Card Version. (The above is for Ver. 3.0.)
PC DOS will not starting.
Note) This is the memory configuration of IB-581. Do not change this.
If power is turned on, PC-DOS will not start keeping the display below. "Boot Failure Insert BOOT diskette in A: Press any key when ready."
K1-6
IB-581
3.4 Backup the System Files (PC-DOS: Ver. 6.3) If A-drive (Flash ROMs) has been formatted or the system files have been destructed in an operational error, and PC-DOS, therefore, does not start, start the PC-DOS with the floppy disk that contains the system files. The necessary system files are as follows: IBMDOS.COM IBMBIO.COM COMMAND.COM FORMAT.COM (a file to be added) Note) "IBMDOS.COM" and "IBMBIO.COM" are hidden files which you cannot find by using "DIR" command. The following procedure shows how to copy the system files and "FORMAT.COM" file from normally operating IB-581 to FD. Procedure 1. Quit the terminal program. For example, with NBDP terminal, - press [F2] key while pressing [Fn] and [Alt] keys. For how to quit each the terminal program, refer to "page K1-1". 2. Change to the root directory of A-drive. The prompt “A:¥>” will appear on the screen. If this prompt does not appear, - press keys, [C], [D], [Space], [¥], and [Enter], successively. Or, - press [C], [D], [.], [.] keys until the display "A:¥>" appears. 3. Insert the FD to write the system files into the FD drive. 4. To format the FD and copy the system files at the same time, - successively press keys [F], [O], [R], [M], [A], [T], [Space], [B], [:], [Space], [/], [S], and [Enter]. 5. Press keys according to the displayed operational instructions. “Insert new diskette for drive B: and press ENTER when ready..” - Press [Enter] key. “Checking existing disk format. Saving ---- Volume label (11characters,ENTER for none)?” - Press [Enter] key. “Volume Serial Number is 3C53-16D5 Format another(Y/N)?” - Press [N] and [Enter] keys successively. 6. After a prompt “A:¥>” appears on the screen, change to B-drive by pressing keys, - [B],[:], and [Enter], successively. And check the contents of the FD. - Press [D], [I], [R], and [Enter] keys successively. The "COMMAND.COM" file must be shown.
K1-7
IB-581
7. Change to A-drive by pressing keys, - [A],[:],and [Enter], successively. The "A:¥>" prompt will appear on the screen. 8. Next, to copy "FORMAT.COM" file, - successively press keys [C], [O], [P], [Y], [Space], [F], [O], [R], [M], [A], [T], [.], [C], [O],[M], [Space], [B], [:], and [Enter]. 9. Change to B-drive by pressing keys, - [B],[:], and [Enter], successively. The prompt "B:¥>" will appear on the screen. 10. By pressing keys - [D], [I], [R], and [Enter], confirm that the two files, "COMMAND.COM" and "FORMAT.COM", are shown in the contents of the FD.
3.5 Changing BIOS (Basic Input Output System) settings To start PC-DOS from FD, change BIOS settings as follows: Procedure 1. - Turn on power, and continue to press [DEL] key until a display in step 2 appears. Note) Or, with CPU Card Ver. 2.2, turn on power, and when a display "Hit , If you want to run SETUP." appears, press [DEL] key. 2. The following display "AMIBIOS SETUP PROGRAM - BIOS SET UTILITIES" will appear. The display depends upon the CPU Card Version. AMIBIOS SETUP - BIOS SETUP UTILITIES (c)1995 American Megatrends, Inc.All Rights Reserved
AMIBIOS SETUP PROGRAM - BIOS SET UTILITIES (c)1992 American Megatrends Inc.,All Rights Reserved STANDARD CMOS SETUPP ADVANCED CMOS SETUP AUTO CONGIGURATION WITH BIOS DEFAULTS AUTO CONFIGURATION WITH POWER-ON DEFAULTS CHANGE PASSWORD AUTO DETECT HARD DISK HARD DISK UTILITY (Version WRITE TO CMOS AND EXIT DO NOT WRITE TO CMOS AND EXIT
2.2)
Standard CMOS SetupP Advanced CMOS Setup Advanced Chipset Setup Change User Password Change Supervisor Password Auto Configuration with Optimal Settings Auto Configuration with Fail Safe Settings Save Settings and Exit Exit Without Saving
3. Confirm that the cursor is on "STANDARD CMOS SETUP", - and press [Enter] key once or twice. (The cursor position can be shifted with [up] and [down] keys.)
K1-8
(Version 3.0)
IB-581
4. The following "STANDARD CMOS SETUP" menu will be displayed. The display depends upon the CPU Card Version. AMIBIOS SETUP PROGRAM-BIOS SET UTILITIES (c)1992 American Megatrends Inc.,AllRites Reserved Date(mn/date/year) Time(hour/min/sec)
:Mon,Sep,21 1998 :09:41:10
Hard Disk C:Type Hard Disk D:Type Floppy Drive A: Floppy Drive B: Primary Display Keyboard
:Not Installed :Not Installed :Not Installed :1.44MB,31/2 :VGA/PGA/EGA :Installed
AMIBIOS SETUP PROGRAM - BIOS SET UTILITIES (c)1995 American Megatrends, Inc.All Rights Reserved
Base Memory :640kB Ext.Memory :128kB Cyln Herd WPcom LZone Sect Size
Date(mm/dd/yyyy) Time(hh/mm/ss)
:Thu Sep 24,1998 :13:20:20
Floppy Drive A Floppy Drive B
:Not Installed :1.44 MB 31/2 Type
calender
(Version 2.2)
Pri Master Pri Slave
LBA Blk PIO 32Bit Size Cyln Head WPcom Sec Mode Mode Mode Mode :Not Installed (Version :Not Installed
Boot Sector Virus Protection Disabled
5. Put the cursor on "Floppy Drive A:" with [up] and [down] keys, and change the contents from "Not Installed" to "1.44 MB, 3 1/2" by pressing [up] or [down] key while pressing [Fn] key. 6. Similarly, put the cursor on "Floppy Drive B:" with [up] and [down] keys, and change the contents from "1.44 MB, 3 1/2" to "Not Installed" by pressing [up] or [down] key while pressing [Fn] key. 7. Save the changed BIOS settings as follows: - With CPU Ver. 2.2, - press [Esc] and [F10] keys successively. Then, a display "Write to CMOS and Exit (Y/N)? N" will appear. - So, press [Y] and [Enter] keys successively. - With CPU Ver. 3.0, A display "Save Current settings and exit (Y/N)? Y" will appear. - So, press [Enter] key. 8. After a display "AMIBIOS System Configuration" has appeared, PC-DOS will start. A date and time input display will appear, but it is not necessary to input date and time. "Current date is XX", - pressing key [Enter]. "Current Time is XX" , - pressing key [Enter]. 9. After turning off power, the BIOS settings have been changed.
K1-9
3.0)
IB-581
3.6 Changing DIP SW and Internal Connector Change DIP SW of CPU Card and connector wiring for FD drive in the IB-581. Changing DIP SW of CPU Card Remove the casing of IB-581, and turn on DIP SW "#5" and "#6" of CPU Card. DIP SW "#8" is already on.
DIP SW
FIL
FD DRIVE
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
POWER PACK VGA CARD
# 5, # 6 ON
note) DIP SW "8" is already on. CPU CARD
SIMM
Changing Internal Connector Change the connection of the flat cable connected between the CPU Card and the FD drive at FD side. This connector change switches the FD drive from B-drive to A-drive. Connect this connector to FD drive.
5inch FDD
Note) Be cautions about the connector inserting direction.
A Drive
3.5inch FDD
FIL
FD DRIVE
5inch FDD 3.5inch FDD
VGA CARD POWER PACK
Originally connected connector CPU CARD
SIMM
K1-10
B Drive
IB-581
3.7 Installing System Files After preparing the FD that contains the system files backuped in page K1-7 (including "FORMAT.COM" file), changing BIOS settings, DIP SW of CPU Card, and the internal connector, write the system files in the Flash ROMs as follows. 1. Set the FD containing the system files (including "FORMAT.COM" file) in the FD drive. 2.
- Turn on power, and continue to press [ESC] key. Continue to press [ESC] key until a display "Starting PC DOS..." appears. Then, PCDOS will start from the FD system files.
3. Continue to operate according to the displayed operational instructions. A date and time input display will appear, but it is not necessary to input date and time. "Current date is XX", - Pressing key [Enter]. "Current Time is XX" , - Pressing key [Enter]. 4. The prompt "A:¥>" will appear on the screen. 5. To format the C-drive(Flash ROMs) and copy the system files at the same time. (See note) - Press [F],[O],[R],[M],[A],[T],[Space],[C],[:],[Space],[/],[S],[Enter] keys succssively. Note) The drive name of the Flash ROMs disk depends upon whether PC-DOS is installed in the Flash ROMs disk, or not. The name is "A-drive" if PC-DOS is installed, and "C-drive" if not. 6. A display "Insert new diskette for C-drive and press ENTER when ready..." will appear. - Then, press [Enter] key. 7. Continue to operate according to the displayed operational instructions. “Proceed with Format(Y/N) ?” - Press [Y],[Enter] keys. “Volume label (11 characters, ENTER for none)?” - Press [Enter] key. “Format another (Y/N) ?” - Press [N],[Enter] keys.
K1-11
IB-581
8. The prompt "A:¥>" will appear on the screen. 9. Check to be sure that the system file have been written in the Flash ROMs(C-drive). - Change to the C-drive by pressing keys [C],[:], and [Enter], successively. The prompt "C:¥>" will appear on the screen. 10. Press keys [D], [I], [R], and [Enter] successively to confirm that "COMMAND.COM" files are included in C-drive. 11. Once turn off power, and restore the changed items to their original settings, referring to the procedures described in "page K1-8 3.5 Changing BIOS settings" and "page K1-10 3.6 Changing DIP SW and Internal Connector". BIOS settings - Floppy Drive A: 1.44 MB, 3 1/2 Restore to "Not installed". - Floppy Drive B: Not installed Restore to "1.44 MB, 3 1/2". Changing DIP SW settings and the connector connection - # 5, # 6 ON Restore to "# 5, # 6 OFF". Restore the connection of FD drive connector. - A Drive Restore to "B-drive". 12. Turn on power, and continue to operate according to the operational instructions displayed. A date and time input display will appear, but it is not necessary to input date and time. "Current date is XX", - Pressing key [Enter]. "Current Time is XX" , - Pressing key [Enter]. 13. The prompt "A:¥>" will appear on the screen. 14. Press keys [D], [I], [R], and [Enter] successively to confirm that "COMMAND.COM" files are included in A-drive. 15. Install the terminal software according to "page K1-1".
K1-12
IB-581
4. How to erase password In BIOS setting, entry of a password may be requested. (The password is set through “Change User Password” and/or “Change Supervisor Password.” If so, erase the password by following the steps below.
1. Remove the CPU card with all connectors connected. 2. Turn on the unit. Be careful not to short on the CPU card. 3. Short between leads of C17 at the soldering side of the CPU card. (Any change is observed on the screen.) [C17] Land
IC IC IC
IC
4. Turn off the unit. 5. Fix the CPU card. 6. Turn on the unit and confirm the BIOS Settings.
K1-13
IC
IB-581
AR-B1378-F2 (New type CPU card)
CPU card
5. AR-B1378-F2 The CPU card AR-B1374 used in the terminal unit IB-581, HSD Modem IB-680/681, and NBDP DP-6 is no longer produced. The new card is compatible with old one when it is used for IB-680/681 and DP-6. For IB-581, replace the old card and T. BOARD with new ones at a time. The code number and type of new T. BOARD are; Type:16P0167 Code No.: 004-444-100 The type of new CPU card is listed below. New CPU Card AR-B1378 F2 AR-B1378 FH AR-B1378 FH AR-B1378 FC
Model IB-581 IB-680 IB-681 DP-6
Code No.
Compatibility with old card
Specification
004444070 004442980 004442980 005939230
With VGA Without VGA Without VGA Without VGA
No Yes Yes Yes
Factory-modified sets (approximately) Model IB-581
Serial No.
FELCOM 12 DP-6 FELCOM 81
Production
7976 and after 7658 and after Not decided yet
In April 1999
The differences between new and old CPU cards used for the IB-581 are; Type
Old Identification
New Type
Identification
CPU Card
AR-B1374
With VGA board piggyback-mounted
AR-B1378 F2
Single board
T. BOARD
16P0141
Less parts
16P0167
More parts
K1-14
IB-581
5.1 How to install PC-DOS
K1-15
IB-581
5.2 Changing BIOS settings
K1-16
IB-581
K1-17
Section K2. IB-582 This chapter mainly describes about the CPU card in the terminal unit IB-582. The CPU card is NOVA-300-M2-FO/DOS embedded 386SX SBC of which CPU is ALI6117 (includes 386SX CPU).
1. DOS installation When the message “Non-system disk or disk error Press a key to reboot” appears, DOS must be installed by using the procedure below.
Note: 1) On IB-582, drive A is floppy disk and drive C is flash ROM. 2) Use DOS program being copied from other IB-582 only.
1.1 How to copy DOS program To copy DOS program from the IB-582 which works normally; 1. Press [F2] while pressing and holding down [Fn] and [Alt] simultaneously to terminate the Inmarsat-B system program. 2. Select drive C. (Make sure that prompt C:\ on the screen.) 3. Insert a new floppy disk into the drive. 4. Type FORMART A:/S, followed by [Enter] key. The disk is formatted and system file is copied onto the disk. 5. Type COPY FORMAT.COM A:, followed by [Enter] key. The FORMAT.COM file is copied onto the disk. 6. Type A: and press [Enter] key to change the drive from C to A. 7. Type DIR, followed by [Enter] key. The following file names are displayed. COMMAND.COM FORMAT.COM
K2-1
IB-582
1.2 DOS installation To install DOS; 1. Turn on the unit while pressing and holding down [DEL] key. When the prompt “Enter CURRENT Password:” appears, refer to 2. Erasing password. 2. Keep [DEL] key holding down until the AMIBIOS HIFLEX SETUP UTILITY menu is displayed. AMIBIOS HIFLEX SETUP UTILITY – VERSION 1.16 (C)1996 American Megatrends, Inc. All Right Reserved Standard CMOS Setup Advanced CMOS Setup Advanced Chipset Setup Power Management Setup Peripheral Setup Auto-Detect Hard Disks Change User Password Change Supervisor Password Change Language Setting Auto Configuration with Optional Settings Auto Configuration with Fail Safe Settings Save Settings and Exit Exit Without Saving
Standard CMOS setup for Changing time, date, harddisk type, etc ESC: Exit ||: Sel F2/F3:Color F10:Save & Exit
3. Select “Advanced CMOS Setup” and press [Enter] key. 4. Press the up or down arrow key while pressing and holding down [Fn] key to change the setting as below. 1. Quick Boot: from Enabled to Disabled. 2. Boot UP Sequence: from C:, A:, CDROM to A:, C:, CDROM. 5. To save the procedure, press [Esc] and [F10] in this order. “Save Current setting and exit (Y/N)? Y” is displayed. 6. Press [Enter] key. 7. Make sure that “Non-System disk or disk error Press a key to reboot” is displayed. 8. Insert the floppy disk which stores DOS program into the drive.
K2-2
IB-582
9. Follow the instruction message on the screen until A:\> appears. If you accept the displayed data, press [Enter] key. Current data is Sat x –xx-xxxx Enter new data (mm-dd-yyyy): Current time is xx:xx:xx.xx Enter new time: Datalight ROM^DOS Version 6.22 Copyright © 1989-1999 Datalight, Inc. A:\>
10. To copy files on the floppy disk (drive A) to the flash ROM (drive C), type FORMAT C:/S, followed by [Enter] key. 11. Press [Y], followed by [Enter] key while the message below is on the screen. Warning ! All data on hard disk drive C: will be lost !! Are you SURE you want to format this drive (Y/N) ? Y
12. Wait until the format is completed. 13. Change the drive from A to C. (Type C:, followed by [Enter].) 14. Type DIR, followed by [Enter] key to make sure that COMMAND.COM file exists in the flash ROM. 15. Change the drive from C to A. 16. Type COPY FORMAT.COM C:, followed by [Enter] key to copy the file to the flash ROM. 17. Change the drive from A to C and type DIR, followed by [Enter] key to make sure that the flash ROM has COMMAND.COM and FORMAT.COM files. 18. Remove the floppy disk and insert the floppy disk having FELCOM 82 terminal software. 19. Change the drive to A. 20. Type INSTALL, followed by [Enter] key. 21. After the program is installed, turn off the unit and remove the disk. 22. Follow steps 1 to 3 above and change the settings as below. (1) Quick Boot: from Disabled to Enabled (2) Boot UP Sequence: from A:, C:, CDROM to C:, A:, CDROM.
K2-3
IB-582
2. Erasing password If someone sets Supervisor Password and forgot it, AMI BIOS setup program cannot run. (Supervisor Password setting is unnecessary for IB-582.) In this case, clearing CMOS setup must be carried out. To do so; Note; After clearing CMOS setup, BIOS setup must be made. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Turn off the unit. Change jumper setting JP31 from #2-#3 to #3-#4. Wait for 5 seconds. Change jumper setting JP31 from #3-#4 to #2-#3. Turn on the unit while pressing and holding down [DEL] key. Release [DEL] key when the following message comes on. CMOS Checksum Bad RUN SETUP Press F1 to Resume 7. Press [F1] key to call AMI BIOS setup menu. 8. Referring to 3. BIOS default, change settings on the following setup menus. - Standard CMOS Setup - Advanced COMS Setup - Advanced Chipset Setup - Power Management Setup - Peripheral Setup 9. Select “Save Settings and Exit” in the AMI BIOS setup menu.
K2-4
IB-582
3. BIOS default BIOS defaults of the CPU card are; Standard CMOS Setup
Advanced CMOS Setup
K2-5
IB-582
Advanced Chipset Setup
Power Management Setup
IRQ 03 Event (CM2) | IRQ 15 Event (Reserved) Monitor HDD Monitor VGA
Disable | Disable Disable Disable
K2-6
IB-582
Peripheral Setup
K2-7
IB-582
IB-582
4. Layout and hardware settings The figure below shows the location of the major parts on the CPU card and the location of the jumper blocks. POWER LED
-12V
NOVA-300 V1.1
+12V
Always on
+5V
JP18 M6117C Includes 386SX CPU
CN8
RAM(1M) 424260-60
CN7
JP19
(Power LED & keylock)
JP31 (RAM Clear)
CN3 (Speaker)
4
RAM(1M) 424260-60
BATT CR1/2AA
1
CN21
CN15
JP23
(Reset button)
JP3
CN16 (Mouse)
HM86508 IQ
CN14 (Serial Port)
JP21
JP20
W83877TF AMIBIOS 386SX
CN12(Parallel Port)
JP1/2
JP26
(LED1) (IDE LED)
CN6 (IrDA Port)
LCD/CRT Controller
SIMM
JP25
CN11
CN5(FDD)
JP16
Disk on chip (F-ROM) C Drive
CN17 (Serial Port)
JP9 JP29 JP10 JP24
FDC37C669
CN4(IDE Port)
CN20(LCD)
CN9 CN10
BZ
K2-8 K2-8
CN18 (Keyboard)
CN2 (Serial Port)
(External Power)
JP8 CN1 (Serial Port)
Appendix
AP1. Cable specifications 1.1 Cable Specifications
AP1-1
Appendix
AP1-2
Appendix
AP1-3
Appendix
AP1-4
Appendix
AP1-5
Appendix
1.2 How to calculate voltage drop in power cable The unit is designed to work from specified power supply voltage +/-10 %. The resistance at power supply connector and terminal can not be neglected in the equipment. The power cable must be selected properly so that voltage drop is 3 to 5 %. The maximum current in the power cable must be used for the calculation. In the following examples, how to select the cable gauge is explained.
* Voltage drop in cable e=(K x I x r x L) / 1000 * Cable length L=(1000 x e ) / (K x I x r) K=coefficient (single phase and DC: 2 three phases : / 3 ) I=current (A) r=resistance : ohm/km L=cable length (m) Example) * FM-8500 I=Tx current : 7 A r=DPYC-5.5sq : 3.36 ohm/km L=(1000 x 0.72) / (2 x 7 x 3.36) =15.3 m
* Battery cable I=Current : 50 A r=DPYC-38sq : 0.483 ohm/km L=(1000 x 1.2) / (2 x 50 x 0.483) =24.8 m
e=0.72 V Cable drop : 3 % K=2
e=1.2 V Cable drop : 5 % K=2
* PR-850A AC cable (AC 220 V single phase line) I=Current : 7 A e=11 V Cable drop : 5 % r=DPYC-8 sq : 2.33 ohm/km K=2 L=(1000 x 11) / (2 x 7 x 2.33) =337 m
AP1-6
Appendix
K=2 (single phase and DC) 5.5sq = 3.36 ohm/km
Cable length 40 m
30
5A
10A
15A
20A
20
10
0
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0 V
Voltage drop in cable
14 sq = 1.31 ohm/km
Cable length 40 m
5A
10A
15A
30A
20A
40A
30
20
10
0
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0 V
Voltage drop in cable
AP1-7
Appendix
22 sq = 0.859 ohm/km
Cable length 40 m
20A
10A 5A
15A 30A 40A
30
60A
20
10
0
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0 V
Voltage drop in cable
38 sq = 0.483 ohm/km
Cable length 40 m
10A
20A
30A
40A
50A 60A
120A 30
20
10
0
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0 V
Voltage drop in cable
AP1-8
Appendix
1.3 Coaxial Cable Specifications
AP1-9
Appendix
Type of Coaxial cable and loss in 1600 MHz Loss (dB) Type
10m
20m
30m
40m
50m
60m
70m
80m
90m
100m
3D-2V
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
64
72
80
5D-2V
4.4
8.8
13.2
17.6
22
26.4
30.8
35.2
39.6
44
8D-2V
3.3
6.6
9.9
13.2
16.5
19.8
23.1
26.4
29.7
33
10D-2V
2.7
5.4
8.1
10.8
13.5
16.2
18.9
21.6
24.3
27
5D-FB
2.6
5.2
7.8
10.5
13
15.6
18.2
20.8
23.4
26
8D-FB
1.8
3.6
5.4
7.2
9
10.8
12.6
14.4
16.2
18
10D-FB
1.5
3
4.5
6
7.5
9
10.5
12
13.5
15
RG-174/U
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
108
120
RG-58A/U
7.9
15.8
23.7
31.6
39.5
47.4
55.3
63.2
71.1
79
RG-213/U
3.9
7.8
11.7
15.6
19.5
23.4
27.3
31.2
35.1
39
RG-55A/U
6.1
12.2
18.3
24.4
30.5
36.6
42.7
48.8
54.9
61
RG-5B/U
4.4
8.8
13.2
17.6
22
26.4
30.8
35.2
39.6
44
RG-214/U
3.7
7.4
11.1
14.8
18.5
22.2
25.9
29.6
33.3
37
RG-217/U
2.9
5.8
8.7
11.6
14.5
17.4
20.3
23.2
26.1
29
RG-222/U
19
38
57
76
95
114
133
152
171
190
AP1-10
Appendix
1.4 How to attach the antenna cable connector 1. N-P 5DFB/8DFB
AP1-11
Appendix
2. N-P 12DSFA
AP1-12
Appendix
1.5 Installation of Pre-amp unit and coaxial cable 1. Mounting of Antenna (FAX-5, 2.6 m whip antenna) Fix the FAX-5 (pre-amp unit) to the mounting mast (35-90 mm) with hose clamps. Screw the whip antenna into the FAX-5. Coat connection point with putty to waterproof. 2. Switching to coaxial cable with armor To switch to coaxial cable with armor (RG-10/UY); 1. Attach a coaxial connector (MP-3) about 40-60 cm from the bottom of the FAX-5. 2. Remove 15-25 cm of the sheath of the cable RG-l0/UY and attach connector MP-7 to the cable. 3. Attach relay connector M-A-JJ between connectors MP-3 and MP-7. 4. Cover connectors with self-vulcanizing tape followed by vinyl tape to waterproof.
AP1-13
Appendix
AP2. Power consumption 2.1 Power consumption list Equipment
Model
FS-8000
FS-5000
MF/HF RT
FS-2500
Power consumption Tx (W) Rx (W) AC:4.8kVA DC:2.8kW Max. AC:2.4kVA DC1.4kW Max. AC:1.9kVA DC:1.1kW Max.
FS-1562-15 FS-1562-25 FS-75 FS-2550
VHF RT
MF/HF DSC
VHF DSC DMC Remote station Distributor MF/HF WR
FM-7000 FM-7500 FM-8000 +DSC-8V FM-8500 FM-8700 DSC-5 DSC-5A DSC-6 DSC-6A DSC-60 DSC-5 DSC-5V DSC-8V DSC-8VP DMC-5 RB-500 RB-700 DB-500 AA-50
150W 170W
10W 25W
Current Drain Rx (A) 3A
24V DC
36A
3A
24V DC (AC fail)
60A
3A
24V DC
26A
3A
24V DC (AC fail)
45A
3A
24V DC
(SSB peak)
(SSB peak)
(SSB peak)
26A
3A
20A 40A
2A 2A
25A
2A
20A 40A
2A 2A
25A
2A
6.0A 10A
0.5A 2.1A
24V DC (AC fail) 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC (AC fail) 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC (AC fail) 12V DC 24V DC
5.5A
0.9A
24V DC
6.3A 7.1A
0.4A 1.0A
24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 15V DC 24V DC 24V DC
15W 0.6A 15W 0.6A 15W 0.6A 15W 0.6A 24W 1.0A 15W 0.6A 15W 0.6A Connected with FM-800 15W 0.6A 10W 0.4A 12W 1A 12W 1A 3A 10W 0.4A
AP2-1
Note
Tx (A) 120A
12V DC 24V DC 24V DC
Appendix
Equipment
Model DP-5
NBDP
Power consumption Tx (W) Rx (W) 40W
DP-6
FELCOM 10
Current Drain Tx (A)
20W
0.8A
18W
0.8A
144W
24W
6A
41W 200W INMARSAT C
FELCOM 11
FELCOM 12 Printer
PP-500 PP-510 FELCOM 80
FELCOM 81
30W
Transmitter
Receiver EMG lamp
PFX-50 NX-500 EGC-5 PP-505
8.3A
1.2A
41W Max.
1.7A Max.
18W
0.7A
120W
25W
5A
1A
18W
0.7A
33VA 36W 400VA Max.
1.5A 100VAC:0.3 220VAC:0.2
270W Max.
11.2A Max.
254W Max.
10.6A 100VAC:0.3 220VAC:0.2
IB-681 FAX NAVTEX EGC EGC Printer
1A 1.7A
IB-680 INMARSAT B
Rx (A) 1.7A
50W 15W
FT-1208 FT-808 FT-508 FT-258 FT-158 RV118G/128G RV-117G 24V 20W lamp
20A 20A 20A 20A 20A
3A 3A 3A 3A 3A
0.8A
AP2-2
24V DC 24V DC (DP-6) 24V DC (IB-581) 24V DC (IC-100/200) 24V DC (IC-500) 24V DC (IC-111/211) 24V DC (IC-511) 24V DC (IB-518) 24V DC (IC-112/212) 24V DC (IB-581) 100/220V AC 24V DC 100/220V AC 100/220V AC 24V DC (Class 1) 24V DC (Class 2) 100/220V AC 100V AC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC
0.6A 2.1A 0.6A
15W
Note
24V DC
(Output power more than 60W)
3A
24V DC
1.3A
24V DC 24V DC
Appendix
2.2 Reserve Sources of Energy (By class NK) 1. The capacity of the reserve source of energy is to be determined in accordance with the following formula with specified load conditions to the required radio installations fed from the reserve sources. C=K x I where C: Required capacity (AH) K: Capacity conversion factor (H) (corresponding to ambient temperature of +50C and end voltage of 1.8 V) I : Total consumption current (A) 2. The capacity conversion factor K is to be determined in accordance with the following: (1) For lead accumulator batteries of a clud or pasted vent type, K = 3.2 in the case of a 1 hour discharging rate and K = 7.2 in the case of a 6 hour discharging rates, respectively. For lead accumulator batteries of a sealed type, K= 2.0 and K= 7.1 in the case of 1 hour and 6 hour discharging rates, respectively. (2) For lead accumulator batteries of other types and alkali accumulator batteries, K may be determined by referring to the value recommended by the manufacturer.
AP2-3
Appendix
2.3 Sample of Battery calculation table
AP2-4
Appendix
2.4 Specifications of Rectifier and Battery charger PR-850A 1. GENERAL (1) Rated Input Voltage (2) Input Frequency (3) Input Current (4) Rated Output Voltage (5) Rated Output Current (6) Peak Output Current (7) Ripple Voltage (8) Insulation Resistance 2. Environmental Condition (1) Ambient Temperature (2) Relative Humidity
PR-300 1. GENERAL (1) Rated Input Voltage (2) Input Frequency (3) Input Current (4) Rush Current (5) Rated Output Voltage (6) Rated Output Current (7) Peak Output Current
100/110/120/200/220/240 VAC +/-10% 50/60 Hz 15A or less (Input :100V AC / Output 30A) 30A or less (Input :100V AC / Output 60A) 24VDC +/-10% (with rated Output Current 30 to 60A) 30A continuous 60A output within 1mim. (Input AC) 40A output within 1mim. (Input DC) 200 m Vp-p or less (Load :0 to 30A) 500VDC 10M ohms or more between AC input and chassis -20 OC to +55 OC 95 % max.
100/110/200/220 VAC +/-10% 47 to 63 Hz 4.1A or less (Input 100V AC / Output 7.5A) 80A or less 24VDC +/- 3% (with rated output current 7.5A) 7.5A 20A (with rated output current :15A 250msec, duty 50%)
AP2-5
Appendix
(8) Ripple Voltage (9) Insulation Resistance 2. Environmental Condition (1) Ambient Temperature (2) Relative Humidity
BC-6158 : Battery charger 1. Applicable Battery 2. Power Supply 3. Output for battery 4. Charge/discharge Meter 5. Control Panel 6. Environmental Conditions Ambient Temperature Relative Humidity
100 mVp-p or less 500VDC 50M ohms or more between AC input and chassis -20 OC to +55 OC 95 % max.
200AH Normal Ship Battery 100/110/200/220VAC, single phase, 50/60Hz, l.5kVA max. 28VDC, 30A (full charging) Provided on the radio console panel Provided on the radio console panel -20 OC to +55 OC 95% max. at +40 OC
AP2-6
Appendix
AP3. NMEA 3.1 List of NMEA sentences Equipment MF/HF RT
VHF RT
Model FS-5000 FS-8000 FM-7500 FM-8500 FM-8700
MF/HF DSC VHF DSC
DSC-5/5A DSC-6/6A DSC-60 DSC-5/5V DSC-8V/8VP DP-5
NBDP DP-6 FELCOM 10 FELCOM 11 INMARSAT C FELCOM 12
FELCOM 80 INMARSAT B FELCOM 81 EGC
EGC-5
NAVTEX
NX-500
Priority of talkers) Priority of sentences) Position Speed HDG (Magnetic) HDG (True) Depth of water
Receiving sentences GLL RMA
RMC
ZDA
Note
GGA(Ver21)
GLL RMA RMC GLL RMA RMC ZDA(Ver03) GGA(Ver10) GLL RMC ZDA RMA(Ver04) GGA(Ver04) GLL RMA RMC GLL RMA RMC GGA RMA RMC GLL ZDA GLL RMA RMC GLL RMA RMC GLL RMA RMC VTG MTW VHW TRF GLL RMA RMC VTG MTW VHW TRF ZDA(Ver17) GLL RMA RMB RMC VTG GLL RMA RMB RMC VTG MTW DBT VDR GLL GGA VTG RMC ZDA GLL RMA RMB RMC VTG MTW DBT VDR BWC(Ver06) BWR(Ver06) RMC
CIF or NMEA NMEA NMEA CIF or NMEA CIF or NMEA NMEA CIF or NMEA CIF or NMEA DBT DBT WPL WPL
CIF or NMEA NMEA
NMEA
GLL VTG
GLL ZDA GLL ZDA GLL ZZU HDP VCD
RMA
RMB
RMC
VTG
WPL
RMA
RMB
RMC
VTG
WPL
GSV
WPL RMA RMB RMC ZLZ ZDA GLL VTG MTW DBS DBT DBK VWT VWR VDR
AP3-1
NMEA
WPL
ZDA
GGA>RMC>RMA>GLL VTG>RMC>RMA HDG (>HDM>HCC) HDT>RMC>RMA>VTG DPT>DBT
CIF or NMEA
OUT:GB-92
GGA
GP>LC>DE>LA>TR>II
CIF or NMEA
OUT:GN-74/77/ 78 CIF or NMEA NMEA CIF or NMEA CIF or NMEA
Appendix
EX) NMEA data connection NMEA OUT
RC-1500 GPS Reciver
NMEA
MD-500
DSC-60
Distributor (05P0606)
NMEA
DP-6
FELCOM-12
FM-8500
FM-8500
Case-1
NMEA OUT
RC-1500 MD-500
NMEA
DSC-60
Distributor (05P0606)
DP-6
NMEA
FELCOM-12 (GPS Reciver)
FM-8500
FM-8500
Case-2
AP3-2
Appendix
3.2 Sentences formatters
Ver1.5
Ver2.0:+UTC
1. NMEA-0183-Ver2.0
AP3-3
Appendix
AP3-4
Appendix
AP3-5
Appendix
2. IEC 1162-1
AP3-6
Appendix
AP3-7
Appendix
AP4. Program ROM 4.1 Communication Equipment ROM List Model AA50/50R
PCB type 05P0514 (CONTROL)
U4
DMC-5
05P0407E
(CONTROL)
(CONTROL)
(MODEM)
05-501-39-141
M27C4001-10F1
05-501-39-142 and after
M27C4001-10F1
U3
05-501-40-2xx
WS57C49C-45D
05-501-68-102 05-501-68-103 05-501-68-105 and after
05P0407G (CONTROL)
(MODEM)
U2 U3
05P0407B
M27C4001-10F1
05-501-40-1xx 05-501-40-2xx 05-501-67-102 05-501-67-103
M27C4001-10F1 WS57C49C-45D M27C4001-10F1
U8
Note)
(MODEM)
For Old type LCD(yellow) Full parts For new LCD type (green) Reject parts For Old type LCD(yellow) Full parts For new LCD type (green) Reject parts MODEM For Old type LCD(yellow) Full parts For new LCD type (green) Reject parts MODEM For Old type LCD(yellow) Full parts For new LCD type (green) Reject parts
05-501-67-104 and after
M27C4001-10F1
U2 U3
05-501-40-1xx 05-501-40-2xx
WS57C49C-45D
MODEM
U4
05-502-01-1xx
FD U4:MBM29F800TA-70PFTN (Flash ROM)
MAIN (Update from FD)
U11
05-502-02-1xx
U11:MBM29F400BC90PFTNFK (Flash ROM)
05P0407F 05P0370A
(FD:both for DSC and MODEM)
M27C4001-10F1
U8
05P0370A
DSC-60
M27C4001-10F1
05-501-48-143 and after
05-501-40-1xx
(CONTROL)
DSC8V/8VP
CONTROL
U2
05P0407C
DSC-6/6A
M27C256B-10F1
U8
05P0407D 05P0370A
Note)
05-501-45-1xx
U8
05P0407 -none DSC5/5A/5R 5AR/5V
Note
05-501-48-141
(CONTROL)
(CONTROL)
Note)
ROM type
05-501-48-140
05P0407A Note)
ROM Version No.
05P0702 (CONTRL)
FD
Note) Refer to section “4.2 Compatibility of CONTROL board, and LCD module changed”.
AP4-1
MODEM (Update from FD)
Appendix
Model
DP-5
PCB type U41 05P0386 U42 (CONTROL) U43 U2 05P0370 (MODEM) U3 U2 05P0370 (MODEM)
DP-6
ARB1378FC or AR-B1374
ROM Version No. 05-501-38-1xx 05-501-38-2xx 05-501-38-3xx 05-501-33-1xx 05-501-33-2xx 05-501-33-1xx
U3
05-501-33-2xx
U2
05-501-96-1xx
U3
05-501-96-2xx
FROM
05-501-87-1xx
--U2 U3
05-501-89-1xx 05-501-96-1xx 05-501-96-2xx
FROM
05-501-87-1xx
---
05-501-88-1xx
ROM type
Note
M5M27C100k-15
Terminal
WS57C49C-45D
MODEM
WS57C49C-45D
MODEM (DP-5/6:Ver14 and before) MODEM (DP-6:Ver17 and after)
FD (both for terminal and main unit)
MAIN (DP-6/10)
(CPU)
IB-581 05P0370 (MODEM)
DP-10
ARB1378FC or AR-B1374
WS57C49C-45D
FD
Terminal MODEM (DP-6/10) MAIN (DP-6/10)
(CPU)
PC
AP4-2
Terminal
Appendix
Model
PCB type 05P0373
FM-7000
(PANEL)
05P0377 (SUB-CPU) 05P0373 (PANEL)
05P0377 (SUB-CPU)
Note)
FM-7500
ROM Version No. U1
05-501-29-1xx
U1
05-501-30-1xx
U1
05-501-29-1xx
U1
05-501-30-1xx
05P0407 -none
M27C4001-10F1
05-501-39-142 and after
M27C4001-10F1
U2 U3
05-501-40-1xx 05-501-40-2xx
WS57C49C-45D
DSC MODEM
U6
05-501-66-1xx
HD6475328CP-10
Control
U2 U4 U2 U4
05-501-83-1xx 05-501-82-1xx 05-501-93-1xx 05-501-92-1xx
HD6475328CP-10 M27C4001-10F1 HD6475328CP-10 M27C4001-10F1
RT DSC RT DSC
U2
05-502-03-1xx
AT28C64B-15TC
RT
U2
05-502-04-1xx
HD64F3067RF20
HS-2721 (Hand set)
U8 (CONTROL)
05P0370A (MODEM)
FM-8500 FM-8700
05P0575 (CPU)
05P0616 (CONTROL)
05P0616A (CONTROL)
05P0714 FM-2721 (FD:both for RT and HS)
(CONT)
05P0716 (HS C0NT)
Note Main CPU (05S9131-0) Sub CPU (05S9132-0) Main CPU (05S9131-0) Sub CPU (05S9132-0) DSC CONTROL For Old type LCD(yellow) Full parts DSC CONTROL For new LCD type (green) Reject parts
05-501-39-141
(CONTROL)
05P0407D
FM-8000
ROM type HD63B01Y0RDS7P (Mask ROM) HD63B01Y0RDS8P (Mask ROM) HD63B01Y0RDS7P (Mask ROM) HD63B01Y0RDS8P (Mask ROM)
Note) Refer to section “4.2 Compatibility of CONTROL board, and LCD module changed”.
AP4-3
Appendix
Model
PCB type 05P0355 (CPU:5000C)
05P0347 (CPU:5000T)
FS-2500/ 5000/8000
05P0358-33 and before 05P0358-44 and after
ROM Version No.
ROM type
Note
U9
05-501-31-1xx
M5M27C100k-15
U10
05-501-31-1xx
M5M27C100k-15
Controller & Transceiver CPU
U3
05-501-32-1xx
M27C256B-10F1 AT-5000
U1
05-501-54-1xx
HD6475328CP
05-501-57-1xx
FS-156215/25
05P0456A (CPU)
05P0528 (COUP)
U6
RT HD6475328CP-10
05-501-57-106A
U1
05-501-61-1xx
HD6475328CP-10
05-501-58-1xx 05P0456B FS-75
(CPU)
05P0528 (COUP)
FT-158
05P0425
FT208/508/808 RC208/508/808
05P0418
(CPU) (CPU)
05P0442 (CPU)
05P0665 FS-1503
(CPU)
05P0669 (COUP)
05P456 FS-1502
(CPU)
05P0278B (COUP)
05P0271 FS-1550
(CPU)
05P0278 (COUP)
05P0456D FS-1552
(CPU)
05P0278 (COUP)
U6
RT: for maintenance ROM, PCB Ver 05P0526-33 (T/Rx PCB) and before
AT-1560-15/25 RT
HD6475328CP–10 05-501-58-106A
RT: for maintenance ROM, PCB Ver 05P0526-33 (T/Rx PCB) and before
U1
05-501-61-1xx
HD6475328CP-10
AT-1560-15/25
U9
05-501-41-1xx
M5M27C100k-15
CONTROL
U9
05-501-41-1xx
M5M27C100k-15
U2
05-501-43-1xx
M5M27C100-k-15
U6
05-501-91-1xx
HD6475328F10
RT
U8
05-501-21-1xx
HD63B01Y0E76P
AT-1503 (05S0522-0)
U6
05-501-44-1xx
HD6475328CP-10
RT
U8
05-501-21-1xx
HD63B01Y0E76P
U1
05-501-25-1xx
HD63B01YORCQ1P (Mask)
U8
05-501-21-1xx
HD63B01Y0E76P
U6
05-501-69-1xx
HD6475328CP-10
RT
U8
05-501-21-1xx
HD63B01Y0E76P
AT-1500 (05S0522-0)
AP4-4
FX-3058 Exciter unit CU-5521 controller unit
AT-1502 (05S0522-0) RT (05S0955-0) AT-1500 (05S0522-0)
Appendix
Model
PCB type 05P0271
FS-1501
(CPU)
05P0278 (COUP)
05P0271 FS-1500
(CPU)
05P0278 (COUP)
ROM Version No.
ROM type HD637B01YOP (Mask)
U1
05-501-20-1xx
U8
05-501-21-1xx
HD63B01Y0E76P
AT-1500 (05S0522-0)
U1
05-501-20-1xx
HD637B01YOP (Mask)
RT
U8
05-501-21-1xx
HD63B01Y0E76P
05-501-47-1xx RB-500
05P0483 (MAIN)
U2
M5M27C100K-15 05-501-60-1xx
RB-700
05P0483A
IF-8500
05P0640
(MAIN) (CPU)
08P3151 NX-500
(MAIN)
08P3119A (NAVTEX)
RV128G/118G
05P0258 (CONT)
05P0261 (I/F)
Note RT
AT-1500 (05S0522-0) CONTROL For FS series SSB RT CONTROL For RC-508 series console
U2
05-501-46-1xx
M5M27C100K-15
CONTROL
U1
05-501-86-1xx
HD647180X0FS8L
CONTROL
U8
08-501-50-1xx
HD63B01YOREBOP
U2
08-501-51-1xx
HD63B01YOREJ4P
U8
05-501-18-1xx
M27C512-10F1
CONTROL
U3
05-501-19-1xx
MBM27C64-30
I/F
AP4-5
Mask ROM (08S0247-1) Mask ROM (08S0248-1)
Appendix
Model
EGC-5
PCB type U37 16P0049 (MAIN CPU) U41 16P0052 U5
(PANEL CPU)
16P0034 (DEMOD)
16P0043-33 and after (CPU)
16P0043 FELCOM 10
(CPU)
16P0034 (DEMOD)
05P0386 (CONTROL)
Soft for PC 16P0108 (CONTROL)
FELCOM 11 05P0386 (CONTROL)
16P0148 (CPU)
IB-581
ROM type MBM27C1000-15Z-G
16-500-52-1xx
Note CPU 1 CPU 2 PANEL CPU
U18 U21 U52
16-500-49-1xx 16-500-49-2xx 16-500-40-1xx
27CX321-45
DEMOD
MBM27C1000-15Z-G
U1
16-500-41-1xx
M5M27C401AK-15
U1
16-500-41-1xx
MBM27C1000-15Z-G
CPU 1 CPU 2 (4M ROM) CPU2 (1M ROM)
U18 U27 U41 U42 U43 --U6 U18 U41 U43 U21 U41 U42 U43 U39 U44
16-500-42-1xx 16-500-42-2xx 16-500-39-1xx 16-500-39-2xx 16-500-39-3xx 16-500-38-0xx 16-500-86-1xx 16-500-87-1xx 16-500-42-1xx 16-500-42-2xx --16-500-90-1xx 16-500-90-2xx 16-500-90-3xx 16-500-91-0xx 16-501-12-1xx 16-501-14-1xx
U26
16-501-18-1xx
U11
---
---
16-501-16-1xx
IB-581
FELCOM 12
ROM Version No. 16-500-50-1xx 16-500-51-1xx
AP4-6
27CX321-45
DEMOD
MBM27C1000-20/25
Terminal (For IC-500)
FD MBM27C1000A-15Z M5M27C401AK
Terminal CPU 1 CPU 2
AT27HC641R-45DC
DEMOD
AT28C64
FW/RT ID
MBM27C1000A-15Z
Terminal (For IC-511)
FD M27C1001-10F1 HN27C1024HG-85 MBM29F400TA12PFTN M6M80041P (EEPROM) FD
Terminal CPU 1 DEMOD CPU 2 (Update from FD) FW/RT ID Terminal
Appendix
Model
PCB type
ROM Version No.
U69
16-500-68-1xx MBM27C1000A-15Z
16P0080 (CPU 1)
16P0081
ROM type
(CPU 2)
FELCOM 80
*9.6k data:Ver104--
RX CPU
U38
16-500-69-1xx
U21
16-500-70-1xx
TC57H1024AD
U5
16-500-74-1xx
µPD27C4096DZ-12
*9.6k data:Ver114-*HSD:Ver116--
U65
16-500-75-1xx
HD647180X0FS8L
NAV CPU
16-501-08-1xx
M27C4001-10F1
*9.6k data:Ver102-*HSD:Ver103--
16-500-83-1xx
MBM27C1000A-15Z
IO CPU (1M)
16-500-77-1xx
TC57H1024AD-85
DEMOD
*9.6k data:Ver106--
(CPU 2)
16P0081-66 (C) and after
Note TX CPU
SYNCCPU SYS CPU
IO CPU (4M) U89
16P0081 (A) (CPU 2)
16P0079 (DEMOD)
16P0078 (TX/RX IF)
16P0082 (V CODEC)
16P0064 (AZ CPU)
16P0065 (EL CPU)
PC 16P0084 (MOTHER)
U34 U46 U48 U21 U22 U13 U14
16-500-76-1xx
MBM27C256A-25
TX IF MOD
16-500-96-1xx 16-500-96-2xx 16-500-96-3xx 16-500-96-4xx
M27C256B
4 pcs./set CODEC
U2
16-500-81-1xx
TC57256AD-15
AZ CPU
U4
16-500-82-1xx
TC57256AD-15
EL CPU
---
16-500-84-0xx
FD
Terminal
U1
---
M6M80041P
FW/RT ID
U5
16-501-05-1xx
M27C4002-12F1
*9.6k data:Ver105-*HSD:Ver110--
U67
16-501-06-1xx
M27C4001-10F1
*9.6k data:Ver103-*HSD:Ver106--
U37
16-500-75-0xx
HD647180X0FS8L
NAV CPU
U34
16-501-07-1xx
TC57H1024AD-85
DEMOD
U26 U27 U32 U33 U38 U69 U21 U50 U52
16-501-96-1xx 16-501-96-2xx 16-501-96-3xx 16-501-96-4xx 16-501-03-1xx 16-501-04-1xx 16-500-70-1xx
M27C256B
4 pcs./set CODEC
HN27C1024HG-85
RX CPU TX CPU SYNC CPU
16-500-76-1xx
M27C256B-10F1
TX IF MOD
U1
M6M80041P
---
FW/RT ID
--
16-501-09-0xx
FD
Terminal
(Old type pcb:16S0121)
SYS CPU 16P0133 (CPU 2)
16P0131 (DEMOD)
FELCOM 81
16P0134 (V.CODEC)
16P0132 (CPU 1)
16P0130 (RF CON)
16P0135 (MOTHER)
IB-581
IO CPU
AP4-7
M27C1001-10F1
Appendix
Model
PCB type ARF B1378FH ROM
ROM Version No.
ROM type
16-501-33-0xx
Note HSD CPU
(CPU)
IB-680/681
16P0160 (DEMOD)
16P0158 (TX/RX IF)
U16 U3
16-501-34-1xx 16-501-35-1xx
M27C10024-12F1
DEMOD DECODE
U35
16-501-37-1xx
M27C256B-10F1
TX IF MODE
AP4-8
Appendix
4.2 Compatibility of CONTROL board, and LCD module changed (DSC-5/6/8 series and DMC-5 and FM-7500) Production of LCD module, LCM-523-68HE-4, used in above mentioned models has been discontinued. We are now using the different type, PC2402LR-AEA-E. (The current LCD is green color, while the previous one is yellow) In addition, the CONTROL board has been modified to be used for the LCD module of current type. Note that no compatibility exists between two LCD modules; The new LCD module cannot be used in combination with the previous CONTROL board, because of different LCD supply voltage. Replace the LCD and the CONTROL board at the same time. If a wrong combination is selected, the display becomes entirely black or white. In DSC-6 and DSC-8 series, replace the PANEL board if the LCD is defective. The LCD module is soldered to the PANEL board in these models.
05P0407 board suffix character Model None
DSC-5 DSC-5R DSC-5A DSC-5AR DSC-5V DSC-6 DSC-6A DSC-8V DSC-8VP
Type of LCD module Note 2) Combination of Suffix number and program ver.
Delete of unnecessary parts
B
C
X X X X X
D
E
F
G
X X X X X
05-501-39-141
X X
X X
X X
DMC-5 FM-7500
A
X X
X
05-501-48-141
X
05-501-39-141
Old type: LMC-523-68HE-4
New type: PC24021LR-AEA-E
05P0407-11, 22, 33 DSC-5 series, DMC-5 and FM-7500 05P0407-11, 22: Ver 12x
05P0407-33, 66 DSC-5 series, DMC-5 and FM-7500 05P0407-33, 66: Ver 14x
X
05-501-68-102 05-501-67-102
X
X
Combination of boards and Program version Note 1) A to C and D to G type none type board board
X
AP4-9
X
X
05-501-39-142 and after 05-501-68-103 and after 05-501-67-103 and after 05-501-48-142 and after 05-501-39-142 and after
Appendix
*** D type board: commonly used ***
Note 1) Old and new LCDs are controlled by different programs. Program of D to G boards can be used to A to C and none suffix board. Program of A to C and none boards cannot be used to D to G suffix board. Note 2) Select adequate program version level for the board in DSC-5 series, DMC-5, and FM-7500. Software was upgraded as hardware was changed. Note 3) *CONTROL pcb 05P0407D Code No.00551370000 (DSC-5/5A/5V, FM-7500) 05P0407E Code No.00551511000 (DMC-5) 05P0407F Code No.00560546000 (DSC-8V/8VP) 05P0407G Code No.00594569000 (DSC-6/6A) *PANEL pcb 05P0577 Code No.00560545000 *LCD print PC2402LR-AEA-E Code No.00593141000
AP4-10
Appendix
4.3 FURUNO Information
FQ5-1999-004
AP4-11
1/2
Appendix
2/2
AP4-12
View more...
Comments
